JP2023076151A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To increase interest of a game.SOLUTION: A Pachinko game machine PY1, when displaying a specific image (pseudo-continuous symbol GZ) in a variation performance performs re-variation display of performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, EZ3 which are once stopped and displayed. Patterns for displaying the specific image in the variation performance include a predetermined reference pattern (pattern through pseudo-continuous abetment), a first non-reference pattern (pattern through symbol slide), and a second non-reference pattern (pattern for displaying a "continuance" character image G49 or the like in an SP ready-to-win) in which the timing of displaying the specific image is later than that of the first non-reference pattern.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 31

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine such as a pachinko game machine.

Conventionally, as a pachinko game machine, which is an example of a game machine, a game machine capable of executing a re-variation display of production symbols in a fluctuation production (so-called pseudo-continuous production) is known, for example, as described in Patent Document 1 below. It is Since the pseudo-continuous effect is an effect with a higher degree of expectation for a big win as the number of times of execution increases, the player expects that the pseudo-continuous effect will be performed many times when the pseudo-continuous effect is executed.

JP-A-2020-32212

By the way, like the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, there is room for improvement in the pattern when the re-variation display of the performance symbols is performed in the gaming machine that performs the re-variation display of the performance symbols. In other words, there is still room for improvement in the gaming machine that performs re-variation display of the effect symbols in order to improve the game interest.

The gaming machine of the present invention is
After the performance symbols are variably displayed, it is possible to execute a variable performance of stop-displaying in a stop mode indicating the result of determination as to whether an advantageous state advantageous to the player is made,
When a specific image is displayed in the variable effect, the temporarily stopped and displayed effect pattern is again displayed in a variable manner,
The pattern for displaying the specific image in the variable effect includes a predetermined reference pattern, a first non-reference pattern different from the reference pattern, and the specific image displayed more than the first non-reference pattern. The gaming machine is characterized by having a second non-reference pattern with late timing.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game through the performance.

1 is a front view of a game machine; FIG. It is a front view of a game board unit. It is a front view which shows a 2nd big prize-winning apparatus etc. in detail. It is a front view of display devices. (A) is a front view of the production unit when the on-board mobile device and the lower-board mobile device are in a standby state, and (B) is the production unit when the on-board mobile device and the lower-board mobile device are in operation. It is a front view. It is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration on the main control board side. 3 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration on the sub-control board side; FIG. It is a perspective view showing the back side of the gaming machine. It is a front view which shows a 7 segment display. (A) is a table showing general-purpose random numbers, and (B) is a table showing special-related random numbers. (A) is an example of a hit determination table, (B) is an example of a normal pattern variation pattern determination table, and (C) is an example of an auxiliary game control table. (A) is an example of a jackpot determination table, (B) is an example of a jackpot symbol type determination table, and (C) is an example of a ready-to-win determination table. It is an example of a special figure 1 variation pattern determination table. It is an example of a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table. It is an example of a prefetch determination table. It is an example of a jackpot game control table. It is explanatory drawing of a game state. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of production|presentation mode. It is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of normal variation of special figure variation production. It is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of N reach of special figure fluctuation production. It is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the SP reach of special figure fluctuation production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a pending|holding production|presentation. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of movable body production|presentation. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of operation effects; 4 is a flowchart of main control main processing; 10 is a flowchart of main-side timer interrupt processing; 9 is a flowchart of sub-control main processing; 10 is a flowchart of 1 ms timer interrupt processing; 10 is a flowchart of 10 ms timer interrupt processing; It is a jackpot game control table related to the characteristic part of the pachinko game machine PY1. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a pattern of occurrence of pseudo-runs; It is a figure which shows the specific example of "pseudo continuation fanning." It is a figure which shows the specific example of the scene which "symbol sliding" generate|occur|produces. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a specific example of a scene in which a “pseudo-coupled/non-effect” occurs; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a specific example of a “pseudo-coupling/not effect”; It is a figure which shows the specific example of the scene which branches to the aspect of "development" and the aspect of "continuation" in "SP reach." It is a variation pattern determination table related to the characteristic part of the pachinko game machine PY1, and is a special figure 1 variation pattern determination table of the classification of the non-time saving state and the jackpot. It is a special figure 1 variation pattern determination table of the classification of non-time saving state and reach loss. It is a special figure 1 variation pattern determination table of the division of non-time saving state and reach no loss. It is a figure for demonstrating the structure of the production|presentation time of special figure fluctuation production|presentation. This is a lottery table for pseudo-run patterns. It is a special figure 1 variation pattern determination table of the non-time saving state according to the second embodiment. It is a table for explaining the type of production design in the second embodiment. It is a special figure 1 effect symbol determination table at the time of non-time saving state and reach establishment according to the second embodiment. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the kind of production|presentation design which formed the reach in 2nd Embodiment, and a big-hit expectation degree. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a specific example of the first performance of the drive chance according to the second embodiment; It is a figure which shows the specific example of the 2nd production|presentation of a drive chance. It is a figure which shows the over prize ball prevention function with which the gaming machine of 3rd Embodiment is provided. It is a figure which shows the reset of the difference ball number. (A) is a diagram showing an effect mode in the case of over-prizing abnormality, and (B) is a diagram showing an effect mode in the case of magnetic detection abnormality. (A) is a diagram showing an over-prize notice image, and (B) is a diagram showing a game stop notice image. (A) is a diagram in which a purple edged image is displayed when in a high probability high base state, and (B) is a diagram in which a red edged image is displayed when in a high probability high base state. (A) is a diagram showing when a special reset switch is pressed down, and (B) is a diagram showing when the customer waiting state has passed for one hour. 10 is a flowchart of main-side timer interrupt processing; It is a flow chart of input processing. It is a flow chart of difference ball number measurement processing. 4 is a flowchart of special action processing; It is a flowchart of a special symbol standby process. It is a flow chart of customer waiting measurement processing. It is a flowchart of special design decision processing. It is a flowchart of a game state management process. 6 is a flowchart of output processing; 9 is a flowchart of outer-end signal output processing; It is a figure which shows the excessive prize ball prevention function in the modification of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the reset of the difference ball number in the modification of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the case where the difference ball number is displayed with a 7 segment display in the modification of 3rd Embodiment. They are a jackpot determination table, a jackpot symbol type determination table, a small hit symbol type determination table, a losing symbol type determination table, and a reach determination table according to the fourth embodiment. It is a determination table of the big hit design type and the small hit design type according to the fourth embodiment, and is a table for explaining the types of the big hit and the small hit. It is a determination table of the lost symbol type according to the fourth embodiment, and is a table for explaining the types of the lost symbols. It is a table|surface which shows the kind of the hit determination table based on 4th Embodiment, the normal figure fluctuation pattern determination table, and the release pattern table of an electric chew. It is a special figure variation pattern determination table according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 14 is a flowchart of game state management processing according to the fourth embodiment; FIG. It is a figure explaining the outline of the game flow of the gaming machine which concerns on 4th Embodiment. It is a figure etc. which show the display screen of each production mode which concerns on 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the RUSH rush production|presentation which concerns on 4th Embodiment.

EMBODIMENT OF THE INVENTION Hereinafter, embodiment of the gaming machine of this invention is concretely described with reference to drawings. In each figure referred to, the same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and redundant descriptions of the same parts are omitted in principle. In this specification, for simplification of description, by describing a symbol or code that refers to information, a signal, a physical quantity, or a member, the name of the information, signal, physical quantity, member, etc. corresponding to the symbol or code is omitted or may be abbreviated. Further, in any flow chart described later, a plurality of processes in a plurality of arbitrary steps can be arbitrarily changed in execution order or executed in parallel as long as there is no contradiction in the processing contents.

1. Structure of Gaming Machine The pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the first embodiment will be described. First, the structure of the pachinko game machine PY1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 5. FIG. In the following description, the left, right, up and down directions of each part of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 are the left, right, up and down directions for the player facing the pachinko gaming machine PY1 (as seen from the front). In addition, "forward" is the direction from the pachinko gaming machine PY1 toward the player facing the pachinko gaming machine PY1, and "backward" is the direction from the player facing the pachinko gaming machine PY1 toward the pachinko gaming machine PY1. and

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 has a gaming machine frame 2. As shown in FIG. The game machine frame 2 includes a game board mounting frame 2A to which a game board unit YU, which will be described later, is mounted, and a front frame 23m rotatably supported by the game board mounting frame 2A via hinges 2B. The front frame 23m can be opened and closed with respect to the game board mounting frame 2A. A transparent plate 23t is attached to the front frame 23m. When the front frame 23m is closed, the game board 1 attached to the game board attachment frame 2A faces the transparent plate 23t. Therefore, when the pachinko game machine PY1 is installed in a game parlor, a player in front of the pachinko game machine PY1 can visually recognize the game area 6 formed on the game board 1 through the transparent plate 23t. A transparent glass plate, a transparent synthetic resin plate, or the like can be used as the transparent plate 23t. 23 t of transparent plates should just be able to visually recognize the game area 6 from the front of the pachinko game machine PY1.

A rotatable handle 72k for shooting game balls is provided at the lower right portion of the front surface of the front frame 23m. The amount (rotational angle) by which the handle 72k is operated is associated with the magnitude (firing strength) of the force applied to the game ball for firing the game ball (the amount that the firing device 72, which will be described later, drives the firing solenoid). It is Therefore, the game ball is shot with a shooting intensity corresponding to the rotation operation of the handle 72k. A lower decorative body 36 projecting greatly forward is provided at the lower center of the front surface of the front frame 23m. An upper plate 34 is formed on the upper surface of the lower decorative body 36 for storing game balls supplied to the handle 72k. A lower tray 35 is provided in the center of the lower part of the front face of the lower decorative body 36 for storing surplus game balls that cannot be accommodated in the upper tray 34 .

A first input device (hereinafter referred to as “normal button”) 40 that can be pressed downward is provided on the upper surface of the lower decorative body 36 in front of the upper plate 34 . A second input device (hereinafter referred to as a "special button") 41 that can be pressed downward is provided on the right decorative body 32 formed so as to protrude forward from the right edge of the surface of the front frame 23m. . The normal button 40 is configured to vibrate. That is, the normal button 40 has a built-in vibration mechanism for vibrating the normal button 40. When the vibration motor included in the vibration mechanism is driven, the normal button 40 vibrates to the extent that the player can visually recognize it. 40 is designed to vibrate. As for the vibrating mechanism for vibrating the normal button 40, a known configuration can be appropriately adopted. The normal button 40 is an example of an operation unit and an example of a vibrator.

A speaker 52 capable of outputting sound is provided on the bottom surface of the upper decorative body 31 formed so as to protrude forward from the upper surface of the front frame 23m. The speaker 52 consists of a left speaker 52L arranged on the left side and a right speaker 52R arranged on the right side. Frame lamps 53 capable of emitting light are provided on the right edge of the front frame 23m and on the left and right sides of the lower plate 35 on the front side of the lower decorative body 36 . Further, a movable frame moving device 58 is attached as a performance device for increasing the interest in the game on the upper side of the left edge and right edge of the front frame 23m. The frame movable device 58 is composed of a left frame movable device 58L arranged on the left side and a right frame movable device 58R arranged on the right side.

It should be noted that the positions and numbers of the members and devices provided in the game machine frame 2 can be appropriately changed within a range that does not interfere with the game.

Next, the game board unit YU will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 2 to 5. FIG. The game board unit YU has a game board 1 and a performance unit 1U attached to the back side of the game board 1. - 特許庁First, the game board 1 will be explained. The game board 1 is made of a transparent synthetic resin plate. A generally circular opening 1A is formed in the approximate center of the game board 1 when viewed from the front. Along the opening 1A, a substantially ring-shaped inner wall portion 1B for defining a game area 6 in which game balls can flow down is formed so as to protrude forward. A substantially ring-shaped outer wall portion 1C for partitioning the game area 6 is also formed outside the inner wall portion 1B so as to protrude forward.

A game area 6 surrounded by an inner wall portion 1B, an outer wall portion 1C, and the like is formed on the front surface of the game board 1. As shown in FIG. That is, the front surface of the game board 1 is partitioned into a game area 6 and other areas by the inner wall portion 1B and the outer wall portion 1C.

The game area 6 is an area where a game ball shot by operating the handle 72k can flow down, and is provided for playing a game in the pachinko game machine PY1. Note that the game area 6 is provided with a large number of game pegs (not shown). The game nail is a game ball that enters the game area 6 and flows down the game area 6 through a first start opening 11, a second start opening 12, a general winning opening 10, a gate 13, a first big winning opening 14, In addition, a route is configured to moderately guide the player to the second prize-winning port 15 or the like. In addition, starting openings such as the first starting opening 11 and the second starting opening 12 are referred to as entry openings, and large winning openings such as the first large winning opening 14 and the second large winning opening 15 are referred to as special winning openings or specific winning openings. and the gate can be referred to as a passage opening or a passage area.

A center frame (center decoration) 61 is provided near the center of the game area 6 to decorate the periphery of the opening 1A. The center frame 61 is provided with a stage capable of guiding a game ball to a first starting port 11, which will be described later, and a warp capable of guiding a game ball to the stage.

In addition, in the game area 6, there is a first start winning device 11D formed with a first start opening 11 into which a game ball can enter, and a second start winning device 11D that enables or disables entry into the second start opening 12. A starting winning device (so-called “electric chew”) 12D is provided.

The first start winning device 11D is stationary. Therefore, the first starting port 11 is constant (unchangeable) without changing the ease with which a game ball enters. The winning of the game ball to the first start port 11 is the lottery of the first special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "special figure 1") (acquisition and determination of special figure 1 related random numbers described later: hereinafter, "special figure 1 lottery" It is also called) and the variable display of special figure 1 is triggered. Also, when the game ball enters the first start hole 11, a predetermined number (four in this embodiment) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

The electric chew 12D has an actuatable electric chew opening/closing member 12k. The electric chew opening/closing member 12k is normally (in a normal state) in a closed position where it is impossible for a game ball to enter the second starting port 12.例文帳に追加Then, when the special state is reached, the game ball moves to the open position where the game ball can be entered into the second starting port 12.例文帳に追加In this way, the movement of the electric chew opening/closing member 12k to the open position is also referred to as the “open state” of the second starting port 12 or the electric chew 12D. It is possible to enter the ball. On the other hand, the fact that the electric tube opening/closing member 12k is in the closed position is also referred to as the "closed state" of the second starting port 12 or the electric tube 12D. In addition, when the second starting port 12 or the electric tube 12D is in the "open state", it is also called "the electric tube 12D opens", and when the electric tube 12D is in the "closed state", it is called "the electric tube 12D is closed". ” is also called.

The winning of the game ball to the second start port 12 is the lottery of the second special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "special figure 2") (acquisition and determination of special figure 2 related random numbers described later: hereinafter, "special figure 2 lottery" It is also called) and the variable display of special figure 2 is triggered. Also, when the game ball enters the second starting port 12, a predetermined number (four in this embodiment) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In addition, the game area 6 is provided with a guiding stage 12g for guiding the game ball to the second starting port 12. As shown in FIG.

In addition, the game area 6 is provided with a general winning opening (ordinary winning opening) 10 into which game balls can enter. When game balls enter the general winning hole 10, a predetermined number (three in this embodiment) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

In addition, the game area 6 is provided with a gate 13 through which game balls can pass. Passage of the game ball through the gate 13 is the trigger for the normal pattern (hereinafter referred to as "normal pattern") lottery (that is, normal pattern random number acquisition and determination: hereinafter referred to as "normal pattern lottery") and the variable display of the normal pattern. It's becoming The power chew 12D is released by executing the auxiliary game. That is, the auxiliary game is a game accompanied by the opening of the electric chew 12D.

Also, the game area 6 is provided with a first big winning device 14D (hereinafter also referred to as "normal AT 14D") having a first big winning hole 14 into which a game ball can enter. The first big prize winning device 14D has a normal AT opening/closing member 14k that can be operated in an open state and a closed state. The normal AT opening/closing member 14k is operated to open/close the first big winning hole 14.例文帳に追加The normal AT opening/closing member 14k is normally in a closed state to close the first big winning hole 14, and it is impossible for the game ball to enter the first big winning hole 14.例文帳に追加When the normal AT opening/closing member 14k operates in the open state, it becomes possible for the game ball to enter the first big winning hole 14.例文帳に追加In this way, it is possible for the game ball to enter the first big winning hole 14 only when the normal AT opening/closing member 14k is in the open state. When game balls enter the first big winning hole 14, a predetermined number (15 in this embodiment) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Further, the game area 6 is provided with a second big winning device 15D (hereinafter also referred to as "VAT 15D") having a second big winning opening 15 into which a game ball can enter. The second big winning device 15D has an operable VAT opening/closing member 15k. The VAT opening/closing member 15k normally closes the second big winning opening 15. - 特許庁The VAT opening/closing member 15k can be in an open state. Only when the VAT opening/closing member 15k is in the open state, the game ball can enter the second big winning hole 15.例文帳に追加On the other hand, the state in which the VAT opening/closing member 15k closes the second big winning opening 15 is also called "closed state". In this manner, the second big winning opening 15 is opened and closed by the operation of the VAT opening/closing member 15k. When game balls enter the second big winning hole 15, a predetermined number (15 in this embodiment) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Here, with reference to FIG. 3, the second big winning device 15D will be described in detail. Inside the second big winning device 15D, a gate-shaped second big winning hole sensor 15a capable of detecting a game ball entering the second big winning hole 15 and allowing the game ball to pass downward is provided. It is

A specific area 16 through which a game ball can pass (enter) and a non-specific area 17 are provided in the downstream area of the second big winning hole sensor 15a. A game ball that has passed through the second big winning hole sensor 15a is sorted into a specific area 16 or a non-specific area 17 by a sorting device 16D. The distribution device 16D includes a distribution member 16k made of a substantially rectangular flat plate, and a distribution solenoid 16s that drives the distribution member 16k. The distribution member 16k is configured to be slidable left and right by driving a distribution solenoid 16s.

When the distribution solenoid 16s is not energized, the distribution member 16k is in the first state (passage prevention state: the left end of the distribution member 16k in the front view of FIG. 3A) that prevents passage of the game ball to the specific area 16 is positioned slightly to the right of the left end of the specific region 16, and the distribution member 16k covers the specific region 16 directly above it). When the sorting member 16k is in the first state, it is impossible for the game ball that has won the second big winning hole 15 to pass through the specific area 16 after passing through the second big winning hole sensor 15a. , passes through the non-specific region 17 . The route of the game ball flowing down from the second big winning hole 15 to the non-specific area 17 is called a first route.

On the other hand, when the distribution solenoid 16s is energized, the distribution member 16k is in a second state (passage permission state: swinging in the front view of FIG. The left end of the dividing member 16k is positioned slightly to the left of the right end of the specific region 16, the distribution member 16k does not cover the specific region 16 directly above it, and the specific region 16 is open directly above it). When the distribution member 16k is in the second state, the game ball that has won the second big winning hole 15 can easily pass through the specific area 16 after passing through the second big winning hole sensor 15a. The route of the game ball flowing down from the second big winning port 15 to the specific area 16 is called a second route.

Basically, the distribution member 16k is held in the first state. That is, it can be said that the first state is the normal state of the distribution member 16k. Only in a predetermined round game (for example, 16R), the distribution solenoid 16s is energized and can be changed to the second state. In addition, the operating mode of the distribution member 16k can be changed as appropriate.

The specific area 16 and the non-specific area 17 are provided with a specific area sensor 16a and a non-specific area sensor 17a that detect game balls passing through (entering) the respective areas 16 and 17 and pass the game balls downward. .

Only one of the first big winning device 14D and the second big winning device 15D can be provided as long as the game is not hindered. In addition, it is possible to provide two large winning devices, such as the first large winning device 14D, which do not have a specific area or a sorting device, depending on the playability. Also, although the first big winning device 14D and the second big winning device 15D are provided, depending on the playability, only the first big winning device 14D may be used, or only the second big winning device 15D may be used. It is possible to use It should be noted that in the case of the configuration using only the first big winning device 14D, the processing related to the second big winning device 15D is not performed, and in the case of the configuration using only the second big winning device 15D, , the first big winning device 14D is not performed.

Also, as shown in FIG. 2, at substantially the bottom of the game area 6, there are two game balls for discharging game balls that have been hit into the game area 6 but have not won any of the winning holes to the outside of the game area 6. An out port 19 is provided. Also, the game board 1 is provided with a board lamp 54 capable of emitting light.

By the way, the game area 6 where the game ball can flow down can be divided into a left game area 6A (first game area) on the left side of the center in the horizontal direction and a right game area 6B (second game area) on the right side. can. The operation mode of the handle 72k that shoots the game ball so that the game ball flows down the left game area 6A is called "left hitting". On the other hand, the operation mode of the handle 72k that shoots the game ball so that the game ball flows down the right game area 6B is called "right hitting". In the pachinko game machine PY1, a flow path through which a game ball can flow down when a game ball is shot left-handed is called a first flow path R1, and a game ball flows down when a game ball is shot right-handed. A possible flow path is referred to as the second flow path R2. The first flow path R1 and the second flow path R2 are also composed of a large number of game nails and the like.

A first starting port 11 and two general winning ports 10 are provided on the first flow path R1. Therefore, the player can aim to win the first starting hole 11 or the general winning hole 10 by shooting the game ball so as to flow down the first flow path R1 by hitting to the left. On the other hand, a second starter opening 12, a general winning opening 10, a gate 13, a first big winning opening 14, and a second big winning opening 15 are provided on the second flow path R2. Therefore, the player shoots the game ball so as to flow down the second flow path R2 by hitting to the right, thereby passing through the gate 13, the second starting opening 12, the general winning opening 10, and the first big winning opening 14. Or, you can aim to win a prize to the second big prize opening 15 .

In addition, game balls that did not enter any of the winning openings (first starting opening 11, second starting opening 12, general winning opening 10, first big winning opening 14, and second big winning opening 15) It is guided to the out port 19 and discharged. Also, the number of winning balls to be awarded to each winning hole can be appropriately set.

In addition, a display device 8 is arranged below and to the left of the game area 6 formed on the front surface of the game board 1 (part other than the game area 6). As shown in FIG. 4, the display devices 8 include a special figure 1 indicator 81a that variably displays the special figure 1, a special figure 2 indicator 81b that variably displays the special figure 2, and a general figure that is variably displayed. A normal map display 82 is included. In addition, the display device 8 has a special figure 1 reservation indicator 83a that displays the number of special figures 1 pending (U1: the number of variable display of the special figure 1 by the special figure 1 indicator 81a is suspended), which will be described later. And the special figure 2 reservation indicator 83b which displays the special figure 2 reservation number (U2: the number that the variable display of the special figure 2 by the special figure 2 indicator 81b is withheld) which will be described later is included.

The variable display of the special figure 1 is executed when the special figure 1 lottery is performed with the winning of the game ball to the first start port 11 as a trigger. Also, the variable display of the special figure 2 is executed when the special figure 2 lottery is performed with the winning of the game ball to the second start port 12 as a trigger. In the following description, special figures 1 and 2 are collectively called special figures or special symbols, and special figure 1 lottery and special figure 2 lottery are collectively called special figure lotteries. In addition, the special figure 1 indicator 81a and the special figure 2 indicator 81b are collectively referred to as the special figure indicator 81. Furthermore, the special figure 1 reservation indicator 83a and the special figure 2 reservation indicator 83b are collectively referred to as the special figure reservation indicator 83.

The variable display of the special figure notifies the result of the special figure lottery. In the variable display of the special figure, it is stopped and displayed after the special figure is variably displayed. The special figure to be stopped and displayed (stop special figure, special symbol derived and displayed as a display result of variable display) is one special figure selected from a plurality of kinds of special figures by a special figure lottery. When the stop special figure is a predetermined special figure (a special figure of a specific stop mode, i.e., a jackpot pattern), the large winning openings (the first large winning opening 14 and the second large winning opening 15) are opened. A jackpot game (an example of a special game) is performed. In addition, the game state in which the jackpot game is performed is called a jackpot game state. The jackpot gaming state is an example of a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player.

The special figure indicator 81 is composed of, for example, eight LEDs (Light Emitting Diodes) arranged side by side, and displays a special figure according to the result of the special figure lottery by its lighting mode. For example, when the result of the special drawing lottery is a jackpot (one of a plurality of types of jackpots described later), the special drawing indicator 81 displays "□□■■□□■■" (□: lighting, ■ : off), the jackpot pattern consisting of the lighting of the 1st, 2nd, 5th, and 6th LEDs from the left is displayed. In addition, when the result of the special figure lottery is a loss, the special figure indicator 81 has a lost figure composed of lighting only the rightmost LED, such as "■■■■■■■□". display. In addition, the lighting mode of the LED corresponding to the result of the special drawing lottery is not limited, and can be set as appropriate. Therefore, for example, all the LEDs may be extinguished as a lost pattern.

In addition, in the variable display of the special figure, the special figure is variably displayed over a predetermined fluctuation time before the special figure is stopped and displayed. The aspect of the variable display of the special figure is, for example, the aspect in which each LED is lit so that the light flows repeatedly from left to right. In addition, the aspect of the variable display of the special figure is not particularly limited, and if each LED is not displayed (lighting display in a specific aspect), all LEDs may be set as appropriate, such as blinking all at once.

By the way, in the pachinko game machine PY1, when a game ball enters the first start hole 11 or the second start hole 12, various random numbers (an example of judgment information) for performing a special drawing lottery are generated. may be obtained. These various random numbers are temporarily stored in the special figure reservation storage unit 105 described later as special figure reservation. In the following, various random numbers obtained by winning (entering the game ball) to the first start port 11 are referred to as "special figure 1 related random numbers", and winning the game ball to the second start port 12 Various random numbers obtained by (entry) are referred to as "special figure 2 related random numbers". Here, the special figure 1 relation random number is stored in the special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a in the special figure reservation storage unit 105 as the special figure 1 reservation. On the other hand, the special figure 2 relation random number is stored in the special figure 2 reservation storage unit 105b in the special figure reservation storage unit 105 as the special figure 2 reservation. To the number of special figures 1 reservation that can be stored in the special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a (number of special figures 1 reservation) and the number of special figures 2 reservations that can be stored in the special figure 2 reservation storage unit 105b (number of special figures 2 reservations) has an upper limit (4 in this embodiment). The upper limit of the special figure 1 reservation number and the special figure 2 reservation number can be changed as appropriate, and the upper limit may be "none". In the following, the special figure 1 reservation and the special figure 2 reservation are collectively referred to as "special figure reservation", and the special figure 1 reservation number and the special figure 2 reservation number are collectively referred to as "special figure reservation number". In addition, the special figure 1 relation random number and the special figure 2 relation random number are collectively referred to as "special figure relation random number".

In the pachinko game machine PY1, when the variable display of the special symbol is not performed immediately after the game ball enters the first start port 11 or the second start port 12, specifically, the variable display of the special symbol is being executed. If there is a prize during the execution of the jackpot game, the variable display of the special figure (or the right of the special figure lottery) for the winning can be reserved. The special figure reservation stored in the special figure reservation storage unit 105 is terminated when the variable display of the special figure based on the special figure reservation becomes possible. That is, the digestion of the special figure reservation means that the special figure relation random number etc. corresponding to the special figure reservation is determined, and the variable display of the special figure for showing the determination result is executed.

And the special figure reservation number is displayed on the special figure reservation indicator 83 . Each of the special figure 1 reservation indicator 83a and the special figure 2 reservation indicator 83b is composed of, for example, four LEDs, and displays the special figure reservation number by lighting the LED for the special figure reservation number. Is possible.

In addition, the variable display of the general map notifies the result of the general map lottery. In the variable display of the normal map, after the normal map is displayed variably, the display is stopped. The normal map to be stopped and displayed (stop normal map, normal map derived and displayed as a display result of variable display) is one normal map selected from a plurality of types of normal map lottery. When the stop-displayed normal pattern is a predetermined specific normal pattern (predetermined stop mode normal pattern, ie, winning pattern), an auxiliary game is performed to open the second starting port 12 (electric chew 12D). .

The general pattern indicator 82 is composed of, for example, two LEDs, and displays the general pattern according to the results of the general pattern lottery by its lighting mode. When the result of the normal pattern lottery is winning, the normal pattern display 82 displays a winning pattern composed of lighting of both LEDs such as "□□" (□: lighting, ■: lighting off). In addition, when the result of the normal drawing lottery is a loss, a losing pattern composed of only the right LED lighting is displayed, such as "■□". A mode in which all the LEDs are extinguished may be adopted as the lost pattern. In addition, the lighting mode of the LED corresponding to the result of the normal drawing lottery is not limited, and can be set as appropriate.

Also, before the normal map is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the normal map is performed for a predetermined fluctuation time. The mode of the variable display of the normal map is, for example, a mode in which both LEDs are lit alternately. In addition, the aspect of the variable display of the normal figure is not particularly limited, and if each LED is not displayed stopped (lighting display in a specific aspect), all LEDs may be set as appropriate, such as blinking all at once .

In the pachinko game machine PY1, when a game ball passes through the gate 13, a normal symbol random number (an example of determination information) for performing a general pattern lottery may be acquired. This random number is stored in the general pattern reservation storage unit 106, which will be described later, on condition that the normal pattern variable display or the auxiliary game is not being executed. An upper limit (four in the present embodiment) is set to the number of normal pattern reservations that can be stored in the normal pattern reservation storage unit 106 (the number of general pattern reservations). The upper limit of the number of normal pattern reservations can be changed as appropriate, and the upper limit may be set to "none". In the following, the normal symbol random number obtained by passing the game ball through the gate 13 is also referred to as "normal symbol related random number". In addition, in the present embodiment, the general figure reservation display for displaying the number of general figure reservations is not provided, but the general figure reservation display may be added to the indicators 8. As the normal figure reservation display, for example, it is possible to adopt the same configuration as the special figure reservation display 83.

Next, the production unit 1U attached to the back surface of the game board 1 will be described with reference to FIG. The production unit 1U is formed by unitizing a plurality of devices that mainly produce production. An image display device 50, a first panel movable device (hereinafter referred to as "on-board movable device") 55, and a second panel movable device (hereinafter referred to as "under-board movable device") 56 are mounted on the effect unit 1U.

The image display device 50 is composed of, for example, a 20-inch 3D liquid crystal display, and includes a display section (display screen) 50a capable of displaying a 3D image. Note that the image display device 50 may be another display device such as a plurality of liquid crystal displays or an EL (Electro Luminescence) display as long as it can display images. may

The on-board movable device 55 includes a decorated on-board movable body 55k configured to be movable along the display section 50a. The under-board movable device 56 includes a decorated under-board movable body 56k configured to be movable along the display section 50a.

FIG. 5(A) schematically shows how the on-board movable body 55k and the lower-board movable body 56k are held in a normal standby state (initial position) in which they are not in operation. When the drive source of the on-board movable device 55 is driven, the on-board movable body 55k moves downward (falls), and when the drive source of the under-board movable device 56 drives, the under-board movable body 56k moves upward (rises). do. At this time, the image display device 50 is covered with the lowered upper board movable body 55k or the raised lower board movable body 56k, and the image display device 50 becomes difficult to see.

It should be noted that the positions and numbers of members and devices provided in the game board unit YU can be appropriately changed within a range that does not interfere with the game.

2. Electrical Configuration of Gaming Machine Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 6 and 7. FIG. As shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, the pachinko game machine PY1 has a special figure lottery, a variable display of a special figure, a jackpot game, a game state setting described later, a normal figure lottery, a variable display of a normal figure, an auxiliary game, and the like. A game control board (hereinafter referred to as "main control board") 100 that controls the game profit (progress of the game), and a game effect (special figure fluctuation effect, holding effect, operation effect, jackpot) according to the progress of the game by the main control board 100 game effects, etc.) and performances such as customer waiting effects (hereinafter referred to as "sub-control board") 120, and a payout control board 170 for controlling the payout of game balls. It is provided further behind the image display device 50 . The main control board 100 can be positioned as a game control section (main control section) that controls the game. In addition, the sub-control board 120 can be positioned as an effect control section (sub-control section) that controls the effects together with the image control board 140, the lamp control circuit 151, and the sound control circuit 161, which will be described later. In addition, the effect control unit includes at least a sub-control board 120, and various It is sufficient if the production can be controlled.

Moreover, the pachinko game machine PY1 is provided with a power board 190. As shown in FIG. The power board 190 supplies power to the main control board 100, the sub-control board 120, and the payout control board 170, and supplies necessary power to other devices via these boards. The power board 190 is provided with a RAM clear switch 191 that can be pressed. RAM clear switch 191 (specific operation means), when the power is turned on, the game information stored in the game RAM 104 of the game control microcomputer 101 described later (for example, game state information such as high probability state, the number of special figure pending and information such as the judgment result of the big hit) to the gaming CPU 102 (hereinafter referred to as "RAM clear"). As shown in FIG. 8, the RAM clear switch 191 is provided on a power board 190 arranged on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine PY1. Therefore, the RAM clear switch 191 cannot be operated unless it is an employee of the amusement arcade who can open and close the front door 23 . That is, the RAM clear switch 191 can be said to be an operating means that is substantially impossible for the player to operate. When the RAM clear switch 191 is pressed down, a detection signal indicating that the RAM clear switch 191 is ON is input to the game control microcomputer 101 . In this embodiment, the RAM clear switch 191 is provided on the power supply board 190, but the location of the RAM clear switch 191 can be changed as appropriate. can be

A backup power supply circuit 192 is provided on the power supply board 190 . The backup power supply circuit 192 supplies power to the game RAM 104 of the main control board 100 and the performance RAM 124 of the sub control board 120, which will be described later, when power is not supplied to the pachinko game machine PY1. Therefore, the information stored in the game RAM 104 of the main control board 100 and the effect RAM 124 of the sub-control board 120 is retained even when the pachinko game machine PY1 is powered off. A power switch 193 is connected to the power board 190 . ON/OFF operation of the power switch 193 switches on/off of power. A backup power supply circuit for the game RAM 104 of the main control board 100 may be provided on the main control board 100 , or a backup power supply circuit for the performance RAM 124 of the sub control board 120 may be provided on the sub control board 120 .

As shown in FIG. 6, the main control board 100 is mounted with a game control one-chip microcomputer (hereinafter "game control microcomputer") 101 for controlling the progress of the game of the pachinko game machine PY1 according to a program. The game control microcomputer 101 includes a game ROM (Read Only Memory) 103 storing programs, tables, etc. for controlling the progress of the game, a game RAM (Random Access Memory) 104 used as a work memory, and A game CPU (Central Processing Unit) 102 for executing a program stored in a game ROM 103 is included.

The game ROM 103 stores programs for performing main control main processing, main side timer interrupt processing, and the like, which will be described later. In addition, the game ROM 103 contains a jackpot determination table, a jackpot pattern type determination table, a reach determination table, a special figure variation pattern determination table, a look-ahead determination table, a jackpot game control table, a hit determination table, and a normal figure variation pattern determination table. , Auxiliary game control table, etc. are stored. Note that the game ROM 103 may be externally attached.

The game RAM 104 is provided with the above-described special figure reservation storage unit 105, normal figure reservation storage unit 106, and the like. The game RAM 104 is provided with a non-erasable storage unit 107, and the non-erasable storage unit 107 is provided with a total number of winning balls storage unit 107a, a total number of shot balls storage unit 107b, and a difference number storage unit 107c. It is In the non-erasing storage unit 107, the game CPU 102 does not erase the stored contents even if the RAM clear is executed. The non-erasing storage unit 107 (total number of winning balls storage unit 107a, total number of shot balls storage unit 107b, difference number storage unit 107c) will be described in detail later.

The main control board 100 is also provided with a 7-segment display 300, a setting key cylinder 180, and a special reset switch 181 (special operating means) (see FIG. 8). As shown in FIG. 9, the 7-segment display 300 is a so-called 4-segment 7-segment display, and has a total of 32 lighting (light emitting) portions. Specifically, the 7-segment display 300 has a first display area 310, a second display area 320, a third display area 330, and a fourth display area 340 in order from left to right. The four display areas 310, 320, 330, and 340 have eight lighting portions (LED elements) LB1 to LB8, LB9 to LB16, LB1 to LB8, LB9 to LB16, and LB1 to LB8, LB9 to LB16, so as to be able to represent the numbers "0" to "9" respectively. It has LB17 to LB24 and LB25 to LB32. Display control of the 7-segment display 300 is performed by the game control microcomputer 101 .

The setting key cylinder 180 functions as operating means when setting a set value corresponding to the probability of judging a big win. The inside of the setting key cylinder 180 is rotated between an initial position and a rotational position with a setting key (not shown) inserted. Therefore, in the pachinko game machine PY1, by rotating the setting key cylinder 180 to the rotation position and turning on the power while pushing down the RAM clear switch 191, the setting mode is shifted to a setting mode in which setting values can be set. can do. Then, in this setting mode, the setting value can be set to "1". However, in this pachinko game machine PY1, only one kind of set value, ie, "1" is provided. Therefore, the set value cannot be changed from "1". When the setting key cylinder 180 is rotated from the rotating position to the standby position while the setting mode is set, the setting mode is terminated and the RAM is cleared.

The main control board 100 is also provided with a special reset switch 181 that can be pressed. As shown in FIG. 8, the special reset switch 181 is provided on the main control board 100 arranged on the back side of the pachinko game machine PY1. Therefore, the special reset switch 181 cannot be operated unless it is an employee of the game arcade who can open and close the front door 23 . That is, the special reset switch 181 can be said to be an operating means that is substantially impossible for the player to operate. The function of the special reset switch 181 will be detailed later. Also, the main control board 100 is mounted with a game I/O (Input/Output) port section 118 for inputting and outputting data and signals.

Various sensors MS and actuators MA are connected to the main control board 100 via a predetermined relay board (not shown). Therefore, signals output from various sensors MS are input to the main control board 100 . The main control board 100 also outputs signals to various actuators MA.

The various sensors MS connected to the main control board 100 include a first starting opening sensor 11a, a second starting opening sensor 12a, a general winning opening sensor 10a, a gate sensor 13a, a first big winning opening sensor 14a, a second It includes a big winning hole sensor 15a, a specific area sensor 16a, and a non-specific area sensor 17a.

The first starting hole sensor 11 a detects a game ball that has entered the first starting hole 11 . The second starting hole sensor 12 a detects a game ball that has entered the second starting hole 12 . The general winning hole sensor 10 a detects a game ball that has entered the general winning hole 10 . The general winning hole sensor 10 a is provided for each general winning hole 10 . The gate sensor 13 a is provided at the gate 13 and detects a game ball that has passed through the gate 13 . The first big winning hole sensor 14 a detects a game ball that has entered the first big winning hole 14 . The second big winning hole sensor 15 a detects a game ball that has won the second big winning hole 15 . The specific area sensor 16a detects a game ball that has passed through the specific area 16 (entered the specific area 16). The non-specific area sensor 17a detects a game ball that has passed through the non-specific area 17 (entered the non-specific area 17). When each sensor detects a game ball, it outputs a signal to the main control board 100 according to the content of the detection.

Although not shown in FIG. 6, the various sensors MS include an outlet sensor for detecting all game balls flowing down the game area 6 (total number of shot balls). Here, the game balls that flow down to the outside of the game area 6 are discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 through a discharge path (not shown) provided at the bottom of the game board mounting frame 2A. Therefore, the outlet sensor is provided in the discharge path. Further, the various sensors MS include a magnetic sensor for detecting illegal magnetism. The magnetic sensor detects magnetism generated when a player uses a magnet or the like to illegally enter game balls into various prize winning openings 10, 11, 12, 14, and 15. FIG. Each of the sensors described above outputs a signal corresponding to the content of the detection to the main control board 100 when the game ball is detected.

The various sensors MS include a front door open sensor for detecting opening of the front door 23 with respect to the outer frame 22, and a front frame sensor for detecting opening of the front frame 23m with respect to the game board mounting frame 2A. . When the front door open sensor detects that the front door 23 is opened, it outputs a signal corresponding to the content of the detection to the main control board 100 . When the front frame sensor detects that the front frame 23m is open, it outputs a signal to the main control board 100 according to the content of the detection. The types and number of sensors connected to the main control board 100 can be changed as appropriate within a range that does not interfere with the game.

Further, the various actuators MA connected to the main control board 100 include an electric chew solenoid 12s, a first big winning solenoid 14s, a second big winning solenoid 15s and a distribution solenoid 16s. The electric chew solenoid 12s drives the electric chew opening/closing member 12k of the electric chew 12D. The first big winning opening solenoid 14s drives the normal AT opening/closing member 14k of the first big winning device 14D. The second big winning opening solenoid 15s drives the VAT opening/closing member 15k of the second big winning device 15D. The distribution solenoid 16s drives the distribution member 16k of the distribution device 16D.

The type and number of actuators connected to the main control board 100 can be changed as appropriate within a range that does not interfere with the game.

Further, the main control board 100 is connected to the display devices 8 (special figure display device 81, normal figure display device 82, and special figure reservation display device 83). Display control of these display devices 8 is performed by a game control microcomputer 101 .

The main control board 100 also transmits various commands to the payout control board 170 and receives signals from the payout control board 170 for payout monitoring. The payout control board 170 includes a card unit CU (which is installed adjacent to the pachinko game machine PY1 and enables ball lending based on information such as an inserted prepaid card) and a prize ball payout device 73. , and a launcher 72 is connected via a launch control circuit 175 . The firing device 72 includes a handle 72k (see FIG. 1).

The payout control board 170 drives the prize ball motor 73m of the prize ball payout device 73 based on the signal from the game control microcomputer 101 and the signal from the connected card unit CU to pay out the prize balls. , Paying out rental balls. The game balls to be paid out are detected by the prize ball sensor 73 a for counting the game balls, and a detection signal by the prize ball sensor 73 a is output to the payout control board 170 .

The shooting device 72 is also provided with a touch switch 72a capable of detecting contact with a handle 72k (see FIG. 1) by a person such as a player. When the player operates the handle 72 k , the touch switch 72 a detects the player's contact with the handle 72 k and outputs a detection signal to the payout control board 170 . Also, the firing device 72 is connected with a firing volume knob 72b capable of detecting the rotation angle (operation amount) of the handle 72k. The shooting device 72 drives the shooting solenoid 72s so that the game ball is shot with the strength according to the rotation angle of the handle 72k detected by the shooting volume knob 72b. In addition, in the pachinko game machine PY1, one game ball is shot about every 0.6 seconds while the rotation operation to the handle 72k is maintained.

Also, the payout control board 170 is connected to the external terminal board 160 . That is, the external terminal board 160 is connected to the main control board 100 via the payout control board 170 . The external terminal board 160 transmits an outer end signal transmitted from the main control board 100 to an external unit GU (data counter, hall computer, etc.) provided outside the pachinko game machine PY1. The information included in the outer end signal includes, for example, information indicating whether a jackpot has been won, information on the game state, and information indicating an error or irregularity (abnormality). Although the external terminal board 160 transmits the outer end signal to the external unit GU by parallel communication, the outer end signal may be transmitted by asynchronous serial communication (common asynchronous serial communication port). Also, the main control board 100 is connected to the external terminal board 160 via the payout control board 170, but the main control board 100 is connected to the external terminal board 160 via a board other than the payout control board 170 (for example, a relay board). Alternatively, the main control board 100 and the external terminal board 160 may be directly connected.

In addition, the main control board 100 transmits various commands including information on the game to the sub-control board 120 according to the progress of the game. Based on various commands sent from the main control board 100 , the sub-control board 120 can grasp the progress of the game (game control details) by the main control board 100 . The connection between the main control board 100 and the sub control board 120 is a unidirectional communication connection that allows only transmission of signals from the main control board 100 to the sub control board 120 . That is, between the main control board 100 and the sub-control board 120, a unidirectional circuit (for example, a circuit using a diode) (not shown) is interposed as communication direction control means.

As shown in FIG. 7, the sub-control board 120 is mounted with an effect control one-chip microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as "effect control microcomputer") 121 for controlling the effect of the pachinko game machine PY1 according to a program. In the effect control microcomputer 121, the effect ROM 123 storing a program for controlling the effect with the progress of the game by the main control board 100, the effect RAM 124 used as a work memory, and the effect ROM 123 are stored. It includes a performance CPU 122 that executes the program.

The effect ROM 123 stores programs for sub-control main processing, reception interrupt processing, 1 ms timer interrupt processing, 10 ms timer interrupt processing, and the like, which will be described later. Note that the performance ROM 123 may be externally attached.

Also, the sub-control board 120 is mounted with an effect I/O port section 138 for inputting and outputting data and signals, and an RTC (Real Time Clock) 139 . The RTC 139 measures the current date and time (date and time). The RTC 139 operates on the power supplied to the pachinko game machine PY1 from a predetermined island power supply (not shown), and when power is not supplied from the island power supply, the power supply board 190 operates. It operates by power supplied from a backup power supply circuit 192 provided. Therefore, the RTC 139 can measure the current date and time even when the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is not powered on. A backup power supply circuit for the RTC 139 may be provided on the sub-control board 120 . A circuit including a capacitor or an internal battery (button battery or the like) can be adopted as the backup power supply circuit.

An image control board 140 is connected to the sub control board 120 . The effect control microcomputer 121 of the sub control board 120 is based on the command received from the main control board 100, that is, in accordance with the progress of the game by the main control board 100, to the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140. 50 display control is performed. The connection between the sub-control board 120 and the image control board 140 enables both transmission of signals from the sub-control board 120 to the image control board 140 and transmission of signals from the image control board 140 to the sub-control board 120. two-way communication connection.

The image control board 140 includes an image ROM 142 storing programs for image control, an image RAM 143 used as a work memory, and an image CPU 141 for executing the programs stored in the image ROM 142. . The image control board 140 also includes a CGROM 145 storing image data to be displayed on the image display device 50, a VRAM 146 used for developing image data stored in the CGROM 145, and a VDP (Video Display Processor) 144. It has Of course, all or part of these electronic components may be configured as one chip. The CGROM 145 stores, for example, image data (still image data and moving image data, specifically characters, items, figures, letters, numbers, symbols, etc.) for displaying images to be displayed on the image display device 50. (including background images) and image data such as background images) are stored.

The VDP 144 reads the image data from the CGROM 145 and develops it in the development area in the VRAM 146 according to the display list created by the image CPU 141 based on the command from the effect control microcomputer 121 . Then, the developed image data are appropriately synthesized and an image is drawn in the frame buffer in the VRAM 146 . Then, the image drawn in the frame buffer is output to the image display device 50 as RGB signals. As a result, various effect images are displayed on the display section 50a.

Note that the display list is composed of a command group for instructing execution of drawing on a frame-by-frame basis. The display list contains information on various parameters such as the type of image to be drawn, the position to draw the image, the order of priority of display, the display magnification, and the transmittance of the image.

Based on the command received from the main control board 100, that is, according to the progress of the game by the main control board 100, the performance control microcomputer 121 outputs voice, music, effect sound, etc. from the speaker 52 via the voice control circuit 161. to output

Sound data such as sound output from the speaker 52 is stored in the performance ROM 123 of the sub-control board 120 . A CPU may be mounted on the audio control circuit 161 as a substrate. In this case, the CPU may be caused to execute voice control. Furthermore, in this case, a ROM may be mounted on the board and the voice data may be stored in the ROM. Alternatively, the speaker 52 may be connected to the image control board 140 to cause the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 to perform audio control. Furthermore, in this case, the audio data may be stored in the image ROM 142 of the image control board 140 .

Various switches serving as input units, various actuators SA serving as drive sources, and various lamps SL are connected to the sub-control board 120 via a predetermined relay board (not shown). Signals output from various switches are input to the sub-control board 120 . Also, the sub-control board 120 outputs signals to various actuators SA. Also, the sub-control board 120 performs lighting control of various lamps SL via the lamp control circuit 151 based on commands received from the main control board 100 .

Various switches connected to the sub-control board 120 include a normal button detection switch 40a and a special button detection switch 41a. The normal button detection switch 40a detects that the normal button 40 has been pressed. The special button detection switch 41a detects that the special button 41 has been pressed. Each of the detection switches 40a and 41a outputs a signal to the sub-control board 120 according to the content of detection. The type and number of switches connected to the sub-control board 120 can be appropriately changed within a range that does not interfere with the game.

Various actuators SA connected to the sub-control board 120 include an on-board drive motor 55m that drives the on-board movable device 55, an under-board drive motor 56m that drives the under-board movable device 56, and a frame movable device 58. A frame drive motor 58m and the like are included. The effect control microcomputer 121 can drive these motors to cause each movable device to perform a predetermined operation. Specifically, the production control microcomputer 121 creates operation pattern data that determines the operation mode of each movable device, and controls the operation of each movable device via the lamp control circuit 151 . A vibration motor (not shown) for vibrating the normal button 40 is also connected to the sub-control board 120 . The type and number of actuators connected to the sub-control board 120 can be appropriately changed within a range that does not interfere with the game.

Various lamps SL connected to the sub-control board 120 include a frame lamp 53, a board lamp 54, and the like. The effect control microcomputer 121 can cause each lamp to emit light. Specifically, the production control microcomputer 121 creates light emission pattern data (data for deciding on/off and emission color, also called lamp data) that determines the light emission mode of each lamp, and controls light emission of each lamp according to the light emission pattern data. Control. Data stored in the performance ROM 123 of the sub-control board 120 is used to create the light emission pattern data.

A CPU may be mounted using the lamp control circuit 151 as a substrate. In this case, the CPU may be caused to execute lighting control of each lamp and operation control of each movable device. Furthermore, in this case, a ROM may be mounted on the substrate, and data relating to light emission patterns and operation patterns may be stored in the ROM. Also, the type and number of lamps connected to the sub-control board 120 can be appropriately changed within a range that does not interfere with the game.

3. Main Games by Gaming Machine Next, main games played by the pachinko gaming machine PY1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 17. FIG. The tables shown in FIGS. 10 to 17 are general ones for explanation of this item, and tables other than these are shown in the explanation of "features of the pachinko game machine PY1" to be described later. In this case, it is assumed that the table is used in the pachinko game machine PY1. However, in the description of the "features of the pachinko gaming machine PY1" to be described later, it is assumed that the table shown in this item is used for the configuration that does not show a separate table. It is also assumed that the configuration showing another table in the description of "Characteristic part" can be changed to the table shown in this item.

3-1. Games Related to Universal Figures First, games related to universal charts will be described. The pachinko game machine PY1 conducts a normal drawing lottery when the shot game ball passes through the gate 13. - 特許庁When the general pattern lottery is performed, the general pattern display device 82 performs variable display of the general pattern (stop display after performing variable display). Here, the normal symbols to be stopped and displayed include winning symbols and losing symbols. In addition, the losing pattern of the normal map is also called "losing universal map" in order to distinguish it from the losing pattern of the special pattern, which will be described later. When the winning symbols are stopped and displayed, the auxiliary game is executed, and the game related to the passage of the gate 13 ends. On the other hand, when the losing normal figure is stopped and displayed, the auxiliary game is not performed, and the game related to passing through the gate 13 ends. Also, in the following, the passage of the game ball through the gate 13 is referred to as "formation of normal figure start condition".

The pachinko gaming machine PY1 acquires a general pattern-related random number when a general pattern start condition is established in performing such a series of games (normal pattern lottery, variable display of general pattern, auxiliary game). As shown in FIG. 10(A), normal pattern random numbers are included in general pattern related random numbers to be acquired. The normal symbol random number is a random number for performing hit determination. The random number is also called judgment information. Random numbers are appropriately bounded.

3-1-1. Hit Judgment Hit judgment is a judgment for determining whether or not there is a hit (whether or not an auxiliary game is executed) according to a hit judgment table as shown in FIG. 11(A). The hit determination table is associated with game states, which will be described later. That is, the hit determination table includes a hit determination table (non-time-saving hit determination table) used in a non-time-saving state and a hit determination table (time-saving hit determination table) used in a time-saving state. In each hit determination table, the determination value of the normal symbol random number (normal symbol random number) is distributed to the hit and the loss, which are the results of the hit determination. Therefore, the pachinko game machine PY1 judges whether it is a win or a loss by judging the obtained normal symbol random number according to the hit judgment table. Then, based on the result of the hit determination, the normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination for performing the variable display of the normal pattern is performed. If the result of the hit determination is hit, basically, the hit pattern is displayed in a variable display of the normal pattern and stopped. On the other hand, if the result of the hit determination is a loss, basically, the lost normal figure is stopped and displayed in variable display of the normal figure. It should be noted that the winning probability can be changed as appropriate. Also, the hit determination table does not need to be divided for each game state.

3-1-2. Normal pattern fluctuation Normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination is a determination for determining a normal pattern fluctuation pattern according to a normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination table as shown in FIG. 11(B). The normal pattern fluctuation pattern is identification information related to predetermined matters related to the variable display of the normal pattern, such as the normal pattern fluctuation time.

The normal figure fluctuation pattern determination table is associated with the game state (non-time saving state/time saving state). That is, the normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination table includes the normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination table (non-short-time normal pattern determination table) used in the non-short-time state and the normal-fluctuation pattern determination table used in the short-time state ( There is a time-saving normal figure fluctuation pattern judgment table). In addition, it is not necessary to divide the normal figure fluctuation pattern determination table for each game state.

In each normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination table, one normal pattern fluctuation pattern, which is the result of the normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination, is stored for each normal pattern to be stopped. That is, the pachinko game machine PY1 can vary the normal figure fluctuation time between the non-time saving state and the time saving state. For example, in a non-time-saving state, for the variable display of the normal figure when stopping the normal figure of loss (losing general figure), the normal figure fluctuation time is determined to be a normal figure fluctuation pattern, for example, 30 seconds, and the winning pattern For the variable display of the normal pattern in the case of stop display, the normal pattern fluctuation time is determined to be, for example, 30 seconds. In addition, in the time saving state, the variable display of the normal pattern when the losing normal pattern is stopped and displayed is determined to be a normal pattern fluctuation pattern in which the normal pattern fluctuation time is, for example, 5 seconds, and when the winning pattern is stopped and displayed For the variable display of the figure, a normal figure variation pattern is determined in which the normal figure variation time is, for example, 5 seconds. The variable display of the normal pattern fluctuation time associated with the normal pattern fluctuation pattern determined by this determination is performed by the normal pattern display device 82 . Moreover, it is possible to appropriately change these normal pattern fluctuation times. In this way, by performing the hit determination and the normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination, the normal pattern display device 82 performs variable display of the normal pattern.

3-1-3. Auxiliary game Auxiliary game is a variable display of the general pattern, and as a display result (the result of the general pattern lottery), it is executed when the winning design is stopped and displayed (derived).

Elements constituting the auxiliary game (auxiliary game components) include various elements such as the number of times the electric chew 12D is opened and the opening time for each opening. And each of these elements is associated with a game state (non-time saving state/time saving state). Pachinko game machine PY1 controls the auxiliary game according to the auxiliary game control table as shown in FIG. 11(C) based on the game state (non-time saving state/time saving state). The auxiliary game control table is associated with the game state (non-time saving state/time saving state). Each auxiliary game control table stores auxiliary game components. It should be noted that the number of times of opening and the opening time in each of these elements can be changed as appropriate.

The pachinko game machine PY1 makes the opening time of the electric chew 12D different between the auxiliary game in the non-time saving state and the auxiliary game in the time saving state. For example, in the auxiliary game in the non-time-saving state, the electric chew 12D is opened only for the first opening time (time (for example, 0.08 seconds) in which it is difficult for the game ball to win the electric chew 12D). In the following, the auxiliary game in the non-time saving state is also referred to as "short opening auxiliary game". In addition, in the auxiliary game in the time saving state, the electric chew 12D is held for a second opening time longer than the first opening time (a time (for example, 3.0 seconds) that makes it easy for the game ball to win the electric chew 12D). Open. In the following, the auxiliary game in the time saving state is also referred to as "long opening auxiliary game". In addition, the opening time of the electric chew 12D may be the same between the auxiliary game in the non-time saving state and the auxiliary game in the time saving state.

3-2. Games Related to Special Figures Next, games related to special figures will be described. The pachinko game machine PY1 performs a special figure 1 lottery when the launched game ball wins the first start hole 11.例文帳に追加When the special figure 1 lottery is performed, the special figure 1 variable display (stopped display after performing the variable display) is performed on the special figure 1 display device 81a to notify the result of the special figure 1 lottery. Here, the stop-displayed special figure 1 includes a jackpot symbol and a losing symbol. That is, the results of the special figure 1 lottery include a big hit and a loss. When the jackpot symbols are stop-displayed, the jackpot game is executed, a new game state is set, and the game based on the winning is finished. On the other hand, when the losing symbol is stopped and displayed, the big win game is not performed, and the game based on the winning is finished.

Similarly, the pachinko game machine PY1 performs a special figure 2 lottery when the launched game ball wins the second start hole 12. - 特許庁When the special figure 2 lottery is performed, the special figure 2 variable display (stop display after performing the variable display) is performed in the special figure 2 display device 81b to notify the result of the special figure 2 lottery. Here, the stop-displayed special figure 2 includes a big hit pattern and a losing pattern. That is, the results of the special figure 2 lottery include a big hit and a loss. When the jackpot symbols are stop-displayed, the jackpot game is executed, a new game state is set, and the game based on the win is finished. On the other hand, when the losing symbol is stopped and displayed, the big winning game is not performed, and the game based on the winning is finished.

In the following, the winning of the game ball in the first starting hole 11 is called "establishment of the first starting condition", and the winning of the game ball in the second starting hole 12 is called "establishment of the second starting condition". It says. Also, "satisfaction of the first starting condition" and "satisfaction of the second starting condition" are collectively referred to as "satisfaction of the starting condition". In addition, the special design losing pattern is also called "loss special pattern" in order to distinguish it from the above-mentioned normal pattern losing pattern.

When the pachinko gaming machine PY1 performs such a series of games (special figure lottery, variable display of special figures, jackpot game, game state setting), it acquires a special figure related random number by establishment of the start condition, Various decisions are made on random numbers. As shown in FIG. 10B, the special symbol-related random numbers to be acquired include special symbol random numbers (jackpot random numbers), jackpot symbol type random numbers, reach random numbers, and special symbol variation pattern random numbers. The special symbol random number is a random number for judging the jackpot. The jackpot symbol type random number is a random number for judging the jackpot symbol type. A reach random number is a random number for performing reach determination. The special symbol variation pattern random number is a random number for determining the variation pattern of the special symbol. The random number is also called judgment information. Each random number is appropriately bounded.

3-2-1. Big Hit Judgment Big hit judgment is a judgment for determining whether or not a big hit (whether or not to execute a jackpot game) according to a big hit determination table as shown in FIG. 12(A). The jackpot determination table is associated with the game state, more specifically, whether it is a normal probability state or a high probability state. That is, the jackpot determination table includes a jackpot determination table used in the normal probability state (normal probability jackpot determination table) and a jackpot determination table used in the high probability state (high probability jackpot determination table).

In each big hit determination table, the judgment value of the special symbol random number (special symbol random number value) is distributed to the big hit and loss, which are the results of the big hit determination. The pachinko game machine PY1 judges whether it is a big win or a loss by judging the acquired special symbol random number according to the big win judgment table. As shown in FIG. 12(A), the high-probability jackpot determination table has more special symbol random number determination values that are determined to be a jackpot than the normal-probability jackpot determination table. In addition, it is possible to appropriately change the probability of winning the jackpot.

3-2-2. Jackpot pattern type determination The jackpot pattern type determination is used to determine the jackpot pattern type (jackpot pattern type) according to a jackpot pattern type determination table as shown in FIG. Judgment. Each type of the jackpot symbol is associated with the content of the jackpot, in other words, the constituent elements of the jackpot composed of the game privilege given to the player.

The jackpot symbol type determination table includes the types of special symbols that are variably displayed (special figure 1/special figure 2), in other words, the prize that causes the jackpot symbol type determination (the prize that caused the jackpot symbol type determination). is associated with the type of starting port (first starting port 11/second starting port 12) where the is performed. That is, in the jackpot symbol type determination table, the jackpot symbol type determination table (first jackpot symbol type determination table) used when performing variable display of special figure 1 and the jackpot used when performing variable display of special figure 2 There is a symbol type determination table (second jackpot symbol type determination table).

There are multiple types of jackpot patterns, and in each jackpot pattern type determination table, the judgment value of the jackpot pattern type random number (jackpot pattern type random number) is distributed to the jackpot pattern type that is the result of the jackpot pattern type determination. there is Therefore, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 determines the type of the jackpot symbol by determining the acquired jackpot symbol type random number according to the jackpot symbol type determination table. In the first jackpot symbol type determination table and the second jackpot symbol type determination table, the jackpot symbol type random numbers are appropriately distributed to various jackpot symbols. It should be noted that it is possible to appropriately change the distribution rate of the jackpot symbol type. Also, the types of jackpot symbols can be increased or decreased as appropriate.

For example, as shown in FIG. 12 (B), the allocation rate of the jackpot design type by the jackpot design type determination for the special diagram 1 is set to 50% for the jackpot design A and 50% for the jackpot design B, and for the special diagram 2 It is possible for the jackpot pattern C to make the distribution rate of the jackpot pattern type determined by the jackpot pattern type determination 100%. In this way, in the special figure 1 lottery performed by winning the game ball in the first start port 11 and the special figure 2 lottery performed by winning the game ball in the second start port 12, the swing of the jackpot symbol type Different fractions are possible.

3-2-3. Reach Judgment Reach judgment is for determining whether or not to generate a reach with a special figure fluctuation effect described later according to a reach judgment table as shown in FIG. Judgment.

The reach determination table is associated with the game state (non-time saving state/time saving state). That is, the reach determination table has a reach determination table (non-time-saving reach determination table) used in the non-time-saving state and a reach determination table (time-saving reach determination table) used in the time-saving state. It should be noted that the ready-to-reach determination table does not have to be divided for each game state.

In each reach determination table, the reach random number determination value (reach random value) is distributed to the reach determination results "with reach (generate reach)" and "no reach (not generate reach)". . Therefore, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 determines whether there is a reach or not (whether or not to generate a reach) by determining the obtained random number according to the reach determination table. As shown in FIG. 12(C), the number of reach random numbers determined to be "with reach (generate reach)" differs between the non-time saving reach determination table and the time saving reach determination table. In addition, it is possible to change the probability of being determined to have reach as appropriate. Below, "with reach (generate reach)" performed on the premise that the result of the jackpot judgment is "losing" is referred to as "losing with reach" and "no reach (not generating reach)". This is sometimes called "no reach".

3-2-4. Special figure variation pattern determination Special figure variation pattern determination uses a special symbol variation pattern determination table (special figure variation pattern determination table) as shown in FIGS. It is a determination for determining the figure fluctuation pattern), and is performed when the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot or a loss. The special figure fluctuation pattern is identification information for identifying predetermined matters related to the special figure fluctuation time and the production flow (production content) of the special figure fluctuation production described later. It should be noted that the special figure variation pattern includes identification information regarding the result of the jackpot determination and the result of the reach determination in addition to the special figure variation time and the effect flow of the special figure variation effect (contents of effect). Identification information to be included in the special figure variation pattern can be changed as appropriate. Moreover, as a special figure variation pattern, it is possible to use a plurality of types of special figure variation patterns with different identification information, respectively, and the number can be changed as appropriate.

The special figure variation pattern determination table is the type of special symbol that performs variable display to be determined (special figure 1 / special figure 2), in other words, the starting opening where the winning that causes the special figure variation pattern determination was performed (first start port 11/second start port 12). That is, in the special figure variation pattern determination table, the special figure variation pattern determination table (special figure 1 variation pattern determination table: FIG. 13) used when performing variable display of special figure 1, and the variable display of special figure 2 There is a special figure variation pattern determination table (special figure 2 variation pattern determination table: FIG. 14) used when performing. In addition, the special figure variation pattern determination table may not be divided according to the type of special symbol (special figure 1/special figure 2).

Each special figure variation pattern determination table is also associated with the game state (non-time saving state/time saving state). That is, the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table includes the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table (special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for non-time saving) used in the non-time saving state, and the special figure used in the time saving state There is a 1 variation pattern determination table (time saving special figure 1 variation pattern determination table). On the other hand, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table is also used when the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table (special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for non-time saving) used in the non-time saving state and the time saving state There is a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table (time saving special figure 2 variation pattern determination table). In addition, the special figure variation pattern determination table may not be divided for each game state.

In addition, each special figure variation pattern determination table associated with the gaming state (non-time saving state/time saving state) is also associated with the jackpot determination result and the reach determination result. That is, the non-time-saving special figure 1 variation pattern determination table and the non-time-saving special figure 2 variation pattern determination table each have a big hit, a loss with reach, and a loss without reach. Similarly, the time-saving special figure 1 variation pattern determination table and the time-saving special figure 2 variation pattern determination table each have a big hit, a reach loss, and a reach no loss. In addition, it is not necessary to divide the special figure variation pattern determination table according to the jackpot determination result or the reach determination result.

Furthermore, the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for each reach no loss is also associated with the number of special figures pending. For example, the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for reach no loss used when the special figure 1 reservation number (U1) is 0 to 2, and the special figure 1 reservation number (U1) is used when it is 3 to 4 There is a special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for reachless loss. In addition, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table for each reach no loss is also associated with the number of special figures pending. Specifically, when the special figure 2 reservation number (U2) is 0 to 2 and the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for reachless loss used when the special figure 2 reservation number (U2) is 3 to 4 There is a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for reachless loss used for . In addition, the special figure variation pattern determination table may not be divided according to the number of special figure reservations.

Then, variable display of the special figure of the special figure variation time according to the special figure variation pattern determined by each special figure variation pattern determination is performed by the special figure display device 81. Then, in the variable display of the special figure, when the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed as the display result (the result of the special figure lottery), the variable display of the next special figure is not immediately performed, and the jackpot game is executed subsequently. be.

In addition, each special figure fluctuation pattern is associated with the production flow of the special figure fluctuation production as shown in the second column from the right of the table in FIGS. In addition, it is not necessary to associate the production flow of the special figure fluctuation effect with the special figure fluctuation pattern.

Also, as shown in the rightmost column of the table of FIGS. 13 to 14, the special figure variation pattern can be called by a name associated with the special figure (jackpot determination result) and the production contents of the special figure variation production. be. For example, the special figure variation pattern related to the big hit is called "big hit variation", and the special figure variation pattern related to the loss is called "losing variation". And, among the jackpot fluctuations, the special figure fluctuation pattern in which SP reach, which is a kind of reach, is performed is called "SP jackpot fluctuation", and the special figure fluctuation pattern in which L reach is performed is called "L jackpot fluctuation". The special fluctuation pattern where the special fluctuation effect ends with N reach is called "N jackpot fluctuation", and the special fluctuation pattern in which the double eyes are aligned as soon as the reach is established is called "immediate jackpot fluctuation". To tell. On the other hand, in the loss with reach, the special figure variation pattern in which SP reach, which is a type of reach, is performed is called "SP loss variation", and the special figure variation pattern in which L reach, which is a type of reach, is performed is called "L loss variation", and the special figure variation pattern in which the special figure variation effect ends with N reach, which is a kind of reach, is called "N loss variation", and the special figure variation pattern related to reach no loss It is called "Normal Loss Fluctuation". There are three types of normal losing fluctuations (normal A losing fluctuation, normal B losing fluctuation, normal C losing fluctuation) with different fluctuation times. In addition, the special figure variation pattern which is a special figure variation pattern related to reach no loss and has a shorter variation time than the "normal loss variation" is referred to as "shortened loss variation". There are two types of shortened losing fluctuations (shortening A losing fluctuation and shortening B losing fluctuation) with different fluctuation times. It should be noted that when the SP jackpot and the SP loss variation are collectively referred to as SP variation or SP reach variation.

3-2-5. Prefetching determination The pachinko gaming machine PY1 performs prefetching determination according to a prefetching determination table as shown in FIG. 15 based on the obtained special figure-related random number. The look-ahead determination is performed before the jackpot determination (specifically, for example, when winning a start opening). For the look-ahead determination, for example, determination of whether or not the special symbol random number is determined to be a big hit in the big hit determination, determination of which jackpot symbol type the jackpot symbol type random number is determined in the jackpot symbol type determination, special There is a determination of which special figure variation pattern the figure variation pattern random number is determined in the special figure variation pattern determination. The look-ahead determination table is associated with the type of starting opening (first starting opening 11/second starting opening 12) related to the starting prize. That is, the lookahead determination table includes a lookahead determination table (first lookahead determination table) when winning the first starting gate 11 and a lookahead determination table (second lookahead determination table) when winning the second start gate 12. And there is. Since the first starting port 11 is a starting port that triggers the special figure 1 lottery, the first look-ahead determination table can also be called a special figure 1 look-ahead determination table. In addition, since the second starting port 12 is a starting port that triggers the special figure 2 lottery, the second look-ahead determination table can also be referred to as a special figure 2 look-ahead determination table. It should be noted that the look-ahead determination table does not have to be divided according to the type of starter opening (first starter opening 11/second starter opening 12).

In addition, the look-ahead determination table is also associated with the game state (non-time saving state/time saving state). That is, the lookahead determination table includes a lookahead determination table (non-time-saving lookahead determination table) used in the non-time-saving state and a look-ahead determination table (time-saving lookahead determination table) used in the time-saving state. .

That is, the look-ahead determination table includes the first look-ahead determination table used in the non-time-saving state, the first look-ahead determination table used in the time-saving state, and the second look-ahead determination table used in the non-time-saving state. and a second look-ahead determination table used in the time saving state. Note that the look-ahead determination table does not have to be divided for each game state. In addition, it is possible to appropriately change what kind of determination is included in the prefetch determination.

3-3. Jackpot Game Next, the jackpot game will be described. The jackpot game includes a plurality of round games with opening and closing of the jackpot (first jackpot 14 or second jackpot 15), and the time between the start of the jackpot game and the start of the first round game. It includes an opening (also referred to as OP) and an ending (also referred to as ED) from the end of the final round game to the end of the jackpot game. Each round begins with the end of the opening or the end of the previous round and ends with the beginning of the next round or the beginning of the ending. Moreover, it is possible not to provide OP and ED. In addition, below, the round game of the predetermined number of times (predetermined order) is simply referred to as "round". For example, the first round game is called "1 round (1R)", and the tenth round game is called "10 rounds (10R)".

Elements that make up such a jackpot game (jackpot game components) include the number of round games, the number of openings of the big winning holes (first big winning hole 14, second big winning hole 15) in each round game, It includes the type and opening time of each opening, the time to close until the next opening (closing time or interval time), the opening time (opening time), and the ending time (ending time). there is The pachinko game machine PY1 controls the jackpot game according to the jackpot game control table as shown in FIG. 16 after the stop display of the special figure.

As shown in FIG. 16, the jackpot game control table stores a jackpot game component for each jackpot game (for example, each jackpot game A to C). In each jackpot game, from 1R to 15R, a round game in which the first big prize winning port 14 opens for a maximum of 29.5 seconds, or a round game in which the first big prize winning port 14 opens for a maximum of 0.1 second. , is performed. Then, in 16R (final round), there is a round game in which the second large prize winning port 15 opens for a maximum of 29.5 seconds, or a round game in which the second large prize winning port 15 opens for a maximum of 0.1 seconds. done. Further, in each round game, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are detected by the large winning opening sensors 14a and 15a, the maximum opening time of the large winning openings 14 and 15 has not elapsed. end the round game.

Incidentally, the jackpot game A shown in FIG. 16 is executed when the type of the jackpot pattern that has been won is the jackpot pattern A (see FIG. 12(B)), and the jackpot game B is executed when the type of the jackpot pattern that has been won is the jackpot pattern. It is possible to adopt a configuration in which the jackpot game C is executed when the type of the jackpot symbol that is won is the jackpot symbol C.

In addition, the number of times and time in each jackpot game component can be changed as appropriate. In addition, the jackpot game can be performed using both the first big winning hole 14 and the second big winning hole 15 or using only one of them. In the case of the configuration in which only the big winning game using only the first big winning opening 14 is performed, or the configuration in which only the big winning game using only the second big winning opening 15 is performed, the configuration which does not include the big winning opening which is not used. may be Also, the number of types of executable jackpot games may be plural or may be one.

Here, the specific area 16 will be described in detail. Since the specific area 16 takes a closed state in which a prize cannot be won and an open state in which a prize can be won by the distribution member 16k, the operating mode of the distribution member 16k can be said to be the opening/closing mode of the specific area 16. FIG. Hereinafter, the operating mode of the distribution member 16k is also referred to as "opening/closing mode of the specific area 16". Further, the open state of the specific region 16 is also referred to as “V open”, and the closed state of the specific region 16 is also referred to as “V closed”.

The distribution member 16k is controlled in a constant operation mode (that is, the specific area 16 is controlled in a constant opening/closing mode). For example, the distribution solenoid 16s is energized and the distribution member 16k is controlled to the second state (FIG. 3(B)) for 15 seconds after the opening of the second big prize opening 15 is started. Therefore, in a round game in which the second large winning opening 15 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds, the opening time and timing of the second large winning opening 15 and the time and timing during which the distribution member 16k is controlled to the second state Due to the timing, it is easy for the game ball to pass through the specific area 16 (to make the game ball enter the specific area 16). On the other hand, in the round game in which the second large winning opening 15 is opened for a maximum of 0.1 seconds, the opening time and timing of the second large winning opening 15, the time and Due to the timing, it is almost impossible (difficult) for the game ball to pass through the specific area 16 (to make the game ball enter the specific area 16). In this way, in combination with a certain operation mode of the distribution member 16k (a certain opening and closing mode of the specific area 16) and the opening and closing mode of the second big winning opening 15 in the big win game, the game ball is placed in the specific area in the big win game. It is possible to set the difficulty (easiness) of entering 16. In addition, the operating mode of the distribution member 16k can be changed as appropriate. When another operation mode is shown in the explanation of "Characteristics of the pachinko game machine PY1" to be described later, it is assumed that the pachinko game machine PY1 adopts that operation mode.

In addition, during the jackpot game, the VAT opening/closing member 15k and the distribution member 16k are opened in the first opening pattern (V long opening pattern) that makes it easy for the game ball to pass through the specific area 16 (hereinafter also referred to as "V passage"). The activated jackpot is called "V long jackpot", and the VAT opening/closing member 15k and the distribution member 16k operate in a second opening pattern (V short opening pattern) in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area 16. The big win is called "V-short big win".

3-4. Game State Next, the game state will be described. As shown in FIG. 17, the pachinko machine PY1 has a "low probability low base game state", "low probability high base game state", "high probability low base game state", "high probability high base game state" and " It is possible to make it into any game state of "jackpot game state". In addition, "low probability low base game state" is "low probability low base state", "low probability high base game state" is "low probability high base state", and "high probability low base game state" is "high probability". "Low base state" and "high probability high base gaming state" may be abbreviated as "high probability high base state", respectively. As states constituting the game state, there are a state related to the probability of being determined as a "big win" in the big win determination and a state related to the ease of opening the electric chew 12D. The former includes a normal probability state and a high probability state. On the other hand, the latter includes a non-time saving state and a time saving state.

The normal probability state is set in the "low-probability low-base game state" or "low-probability high-base game state", and is a state in which the probability of being judged as a big hit in the jackpot judgment is a normal probability. The high-probability state is set in the "high-probability low-base game state" or "high-probability high-base game state", and is a state in which the probability of being judged as a big hit in the jackpot judgment is higher than the normal probability. Therefore, it can be said that the high-probability state is a game state more advantageous to the player than the normal-probability state. When the pachinko game machine PY1 is powered on for the first time, the normal probability state is set. Then, by winning a jackpot, it becomes possible to switch from the normal probability state to the high probability state. For example, it is possible to switch to a high probability state by passing a game ball through the specific area 16 in a jackpot game. It is also possible to switch to a high probability state depending on the type of the jackpot symbol. It is assumed that whether the trigger for switching to the high-probability state is the V passage or the type of the jackpot symbol is determined in advance according to the game characteristics to be realized. In the high-probability state, it is possible to switch from the high-probability state to the normal-probability state by performing a predetermined number of jackpot determinations without winning the jackpot, or by winning the next jackpot.

The non-time saving state is set in the "low probability low base game state", "high probability low base game state" or "jackpot game state". The time-saving state is set in the "low-probability high-base game state" or "high-probability high-base game state", and compared to the non-time-saving state, the game state in which the opening time of the electric chew 12D in one auxiliary game tends to be longer. is. For example, in the time-saving state, the opening time (eg, 3.0 seconds) is longer than the opening time (eg, 0.08 seconds) of the electric chew 12D in the non-time-saving state. In addition, in the time saving state, the special figure variation pattern determination is performed according to the special figure variation pattern determination table that is determined so that the special figure variation pattern with a short special figure variation time is selected more than the non-time saving state. (See FIGS. 13-14). As a result, in the time-saving state, the pace of digestion of the special figure reservation becomes faster, and the effective winning to the starting opening (the winning that can be stored as the special figure reservation) is likely to occur. Therefore, it is possible to aim for a big hit under the smooth progress of the game.

In addition, in the time saving state, the normal figure fluctuation time tends to be shorter than in the non-time saving state. For example, in the time saving state, the normal figure fluctuation time (5 seconds) shorter than the normal figure fluctuation time (30 seconds) determined in the non-time saving state is determined (FIG. 11(B)). Therefore, the number of executions of the normal drawing lottery per unit time is greater in the time saving state.

In addition, the time saving state is more likely to be determined as a hit in the hit determination than the non-working time saving state. For example, in the time saving state, it is determined to be a hit with a probability (eg, 59936/65536) higher than the probability (eg, 6600/65536) determined to be a hit in the non-time saving state (FIG. 11(A)). Therefore, the time-saving state has a larger number of hit determinations per unit time.

Thus, in the time-saving state, the opening time of the electric chew 12D per unit time is longer than in the non-time-saving state, and the game balls are likely to enter the second starting port 12 frequently. As a result, the base, which is the ratio of the number of balls awarded to the number of balls fired, increases. Therefore, in a time-saving state with a high base, it is possible to aim for a jackpot election without greatly reducing the number of game balls possessed. Therefore, it can be said that the time-saving state is a game state more advantageous to the player than the non-time-saving state.

When the pachinko game machine PY1 is powered on for the first time, a non-time-saving state is set. Then, for example, by winning a jackpot, a time saving state can be set. In the time-saving state, it is possible to change from the time-saving state to the non-time-saving state by performing a predetermined number of big win determinations without winning the big win, or by winning the next big win.

In addition, in the time-saving state, it is easier to win a win than in the non-time-saving state. In other words, three points of the game related to the general pattern are set to be advantageous to the player. However, the points that are set in favor of this player may be some of them. Moreover, the special figure variation pattern determination table in the time saving state may not be one in which the special figure variation pattern with the short special figure variation time is more likely to be selected than the one in the non-time saving state.

In addition, the game state after the pachinko game machine PY1 is powered on for the first time is a "low-probability low-base game state" in which a normal probability state and a non-time-saving state are set. This game state is also called "normal game state". In addition, in the "jackpot game state", the normal drawing lottery (hit judgment related to the normal drawing) is performed, but the special drawing lottery (jackpot judgment) is not performed, so a non-time-saving state is set with the start of the jackpot game. be. As for the game state, it is possible to use all or part of the game states described above. Also, the various game states described in this specification can be arbitrarily expressed in the form of "nth game state" (where n is an integer equal to or greater than 1). In addition, the low-probability low-base gaming state (low-probability low-base state) is a low-probability short-time state, the low-probability high-base gaming state (low-probability high-base state) is a low-probability short-time state, and the high-probability low-base gaming state (high probability Low base state) can be called a high probability non-time saving state, and a high probability high base gaming state (high probability high base state) can be called a high probability time saving state.

4. Main effects by game machine Next, main effects performed by the pachinko game machine PY1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 18 to 24. FIG.

4-1. Production Mode First, the production mode will be described. The production mode is a division of production (or a higher-level attribute). The pachinko game machine PY1 can set, as production modes, a customer waiting production mode, a normal production mode, a variable probability production mode, a short working hours production mode and a jackpot production mode.

In the customer waiting production mode, a special variable production is performed in the "low probability low base game state", "low probability high base game state", "high probability low base game state" and "high probability high base game state". It is a production mode that can be set when there is no special figure fluctuation production and indicates that it is in a standby state. A customer waiting performance is performed when the customer waiting performance mode is set. In the customer waiting effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 18A-1, a customer waiting demonstration video G100 introducing the pachinko game machine PY1 is displayed on the display section 50a. Further, when the normal button 40 is operated while the customer waiting demonstration video G100 is being displayed, a setting screen G101 for setting the effects of the pachinko game machine PY1 is displayed as shown in FIG. 18(A-2). is displayed. Settings related to effects include volume setting of sound output from speaker 52, brightness setting of display section 50a, frequency setting of effects to be executed, and the like.

Normal production mode can be set when special figure fluctuation production is performed in "low probability low base game state" or "high probability low base game state", and it is a production mode indicating that it is a non-time saving state be. In the normal effect mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 18B-1, a first normal effect mode in which a background image (daytime normal background image G102) representing a daytime mountain view is displayed on the display unit 50a. Then, as shown in FIG. 18(B-2), a second normal effect mode in which a background image (ordinary evening background image G103) representing the evening mountain scenery is displayed on the display unit 50a; -3), there is a third normal effect mode in which a background image (normal nighttime background image G104) representing a mountain view at night is displayed on the display unit 50a, and 1 without winning the jackpot. It can be switched as one condition that the special figure fluctuation effect is performed once or more times. Further, each of the first to third normal performance modes includes a normal front stage performance mode before reach is established and a normal rear stage performance mode after reach is established in the special figure fluctuation performance. In the normal front stage effect mode, any one of the daytime normal background image G102, the evening normal background image G103, and the nighttime normal background image G104 is displayed on the display unit 50a. A custom background image will be displayed. Also, a special effect mode that is set only in the "high probability low base game state" may be provided.

The probability variable production mode is a production mode that can be set when the special figure fluctuation production is performed in the "high probability high base game state", and is a production mode indicating that it is a high probability state and a time saving state. In the probability variation effect mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 18(B-4), a background image representing the universe (probability variation background image G105) is displayed on the display section 50a. Furthermore, the probability variation performance mode includes a probability variation front stage performance mode before the reach is established and a probability variation rear stage performance mode after the reach is established in the special figure fluctuation performance. In the variable probability front stage effect mode, the probability variable background image G105 is displayed on the display unit 50a, but in the variable probability latter stage effect mode, a dedicated background image corresponding to the type of reach is displayed.

The time-saving performance mode is a performance mode that can be set when the special figure variation performance is performed in the "low-probability high-base game state", and is a performance mode indicating that it is a normal probability state and a time-saving state. In the time saving effect mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 18B-5, a background image representing the sky (background image for time saving G106) is displayed on the display unit 50a. Furthermore, the time reduction production mode includes a time reduction front stage production mode before the reach is established and a time reduction rear stage production mode after the reach is established in the special figure fluctuation production. In the time saving front stage production mode, the background image G106 for time saving is displayed on the display unit 50a, but in the time saving rear stage production mode, a dedicated background image corresponding to the type of reach is displayed.

The jackpot production mode is a production mode that can be set when a jackpot game is being performed in the "jackpot game state", and is a production mode indicating that the jackpot game is being performed. In the jackpot performance mode, for example, during the opening of the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. A jackpot opening production is performed in which a winning image G108 is displayed. During the round of the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 18(C-2), the display unit 50a displays a round image G109 indicating the number of rounds and a prize ball number image G110 indicating the number of prize balls paid out. A round production will be performed. During the ending of the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 18(C-3), the ending image G111 suggesting the effect mode set after the jackpot game and the total number of awarded balls are indicated on the display section 50a. A jackpot ending effect is performed in which the total prize number image G112 is displayed.

It should be noted that the types of production modes can be changed or added as appropriate.

4-2. Special figure fluctuation production Next, the special figure fluctuation production (also simply referred to as "variation production") will be described. Pachinko gaming machine PY1, when the variable display of the special figure is started, the special figure variation pattern and the special figure lottery result related to the variable display of the special figure (jackpot determination result, jackpot pattern type determination result, reach determination result, and Based on the special figure fluctuation pattern determination result) etc., the special figure fluctuation production is executed. In the special figure variation effect, the variation display of the effect symbol is performed in the display unit 50a so as to be superimposed on a predetermined background image. In the variable display of performance symbols, the game stops after the performance symbols are varied. That is, after the special figure fluctuation time and the variable display of the effect design are performed, the variation is stopped and the stop display of the effect design is performed. Then, the result of the special figure lottery is informed by the stop display of the production pattern.

In addition, in the special figure fluctuation production, in addition to the fluctuation display of the production pattern, various functions such as the image display device 50, the speaker 52, the frame lamp 53, the board lamp 54, the movable devices 55, 56, 58, the normal button 40, and the special button 41 It is possible to perform other productions using a production device. In this case, other effects can be continued even after the stop display of the effect symbols.

4-2-1. Effect Symbol Display Area In the display portion 50a of the image display device 50, as shown in FIG. It is possible to provide a symbol area 50b1, a middle effect symbol area 50b2, and a right effect symbol area 50b3. The left effect symbol area 50b1 is an area for displaying the left effect symbol EZ1 when the effect symbol is stopped and displayed in the special figure fluctuation effect. Similarly, the middle production design area 50b2 and the right production design area 50b3 are areas for displaying the middle production design EZ2 and the right production design EZ3.

Further, as shown in FIG. 19A, it is possible to provide a small pattern area 50c in a section of the left end (upper left corner) of the upper end of the display section 50a. The small pattern area 50c is an area for variably displaying the small patterns KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 when the special symbols are variably displayed.

In addition, in FIG. 19(A), the left effect pattern area 50b1, the medium effect pattern area 50b2, the right effect pattern area 50b3, and the small pattern area 50c are indicated by two-dot chain lines, but this is the left effect symbol area 50b1. , middle effect symbol region 50b2, right effect symbol region 50b3, and small symbol region 50c, but are not actually displayed. Also, the range of each area can be changed as appropriate.

4-2-2. Normal variation The pachinko game machine PY1 can perform normal variation first in the special figure variation effect. The normal variation functions as an effect suggesting that the variable display of the special figure has started.

When the variable display of the special figure is started, for example, as shown in FIG. Left small pattern KZ1, medium and small pattern KZ2, and right small pattern KZ3 are stopped and displayed, variable display of special symbols is not performed, and from the state of waiting for variable display of special symbols, Fig. 19 (B) , along with the start, the variable display of the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 is started, and the variable display of the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 is started. Then, when the special figure fluctuation pattern of the variable display of this special figure is, for example, "normal loss fluctuation", as shown in FIG. 19 (C-1), the left production pattern EZ1 and the right production pattern EZ3 are different After temporarily stopping in the stop mode, the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are stop-displayed in a stop mode (so-called split eyes) suggesting a loss, as shown in FIG. 19(D). At this time, the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 are all stopped and displayed in a stop mode suggesting a failure. On the other hand, when the special figure fluctuation pattern of the variable display of the special figure is a special figure fluctuation pattern with reach such as "N loss fluctuation", as shown in FIG. and the right performance symbol EZ3 are temporarily stopped in the same stop mode, and ready-to-win is established. At this time, the fluctuation display of the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 is continuously performed, and the ready-to-win performance corresponding to the special figure fluctuation pattern is performed. It should be noted that the stop order and stop mode of the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 can be changed as appropriate.

4-2-3. The N-reach pachinko game machine PY1 can perform N-reach when the reach is established in the normal variation. The N reach is an effect suggesting that the result of the big win determination may have been a "big win", and functions as an effect for making the player expect a big win.

In the N reach, as shown in FIG. 20 (A), the state in which the reach is established is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds), and as shown in FIG. decelerates to Then, when the special figure fluctuation pattern of the variable display of the special figure is, for example, "N loss fluctuation", as shown in FIG. Symbols EZ1, EZ2 and EZ3 are stopped and displayed. At this time, the small patterns KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 are all stopped and displayed in a stop mode suggesting a failure. On the other hand, when the special figure fluctuation pattern of the variable display of the special figure is, for example, "N jackpot fluctuation", as shown in FIG. indicate. At this time, the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 are all stopped and displayed in a stop mode suggesting a big win. It should be noted that the content of the N reach effect is not limited to the gradual deceleration of the medium effect symbol EZ2, and can be changed or added as appropriate.

In addition, with respect to the stop mode of the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 suggesting a loss, the loose stitches when the reach is not established are referred to as "non-reach loose stitches" and "non-reach loose stitches", and the scattered stitches when the reach is established. They are called "reach loose eyes" or "reach loose eyes". How to combine the production patterns EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 that make up the non-reach loose stitches (for example, "2, 3, 1" and "5, 8, 6", etc.), and The performance control microcomputer 121 selects how the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are combined (for example, "2.1.2" or "5.4.5"). Also, how to combine the production patterns EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 that constitute the stop mode (double eyes) suggesting a big win (for example, "2.2.2" or "7.7.7"). is selected by the effect control microcomputer 121 based on the type of the winning jackpot symbol.

4-2-4. SP reach The pachinko game machine PY1 can perform SP reach after N reach. The SP reach is an effect suggesting that the possibility that the result of the big win determination is a "big win" is higher than the N reach, and functions as an effect for making the player expect a big win.

In SP reach, after N reach, for example, as shown in FIG. An image (SP reach start title image) G1 indicating that reach has started is displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 21(B), an SP ready-to-win effect (for example, a battle effect) is performed. Then, when the final phase of the SP reach-only production is reached, the special figure fluctuation pattern of the special figure variable display is, for example, "SP jackpot fluctuation", as shown in FIG. 21 (C-1), the display unit At 50a, an effect suggesting a big win (for example, a display in which the main character (one of the ally characters) wins the battle and stands tall) is performed, and the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are in a stop mode suggesting a big win. (So-called double eyes) stop display. At this time, the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 are all stopped and displayed in a stop mode suggesting a big win. On the other hand, when the special figure variation pattern of the variable display of the special figure is, for example, "SP loss variation", as shown in FIG. ) is performed, and the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are stopped and displayed in a stop mode (so-called split eyes) suggesting a loss. At this time, the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 are all stopped and displayed in a stop mode suggesting a failure. It should be noted that it is possible to appropriately change or add the contents of the effect of the SP reach.

Here, the possibility that the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 for each ready-to-win are stopped in a mode indicating a big win (big win expectation) will be described in detail. The degree of jackpot expectation for each reach is determined by the execution probability based on the result of jackpot determination. For example, the execution probability of N reach is set to 10% when the result of jackpot determination is "losing", and 100% when the result of jackpot determination is "jackpot", and the execution probability of SP reach is set to jackpot determination. 4% if the result of the judgment is "losing", and 100% if the result of the jackpot determination is "jackpot". It is possible to In addition, SP reach A and SP reach B are made executable as SP reach, the execution probability of SP reach A is set to 2% when the result of big hit determination is ``losing'', and the result of big hit determination is ``big hit''. In the case of 30%, the execution probability of SP reach B is set to 2% when the result of the big hit determination is "losing", and 20% when the result of the big hit determination is "big hit", It is possible to set the SP reach A jackpot expectation higher than the SP reach B jackpot expectation. In this way, by appropriately setting the execution probability according to the result of the judgment of the big win, it is possible to set the expected degree of the big win.

4-2-5. L reach Pachinko game machine PY1 can perform L reach after N reach. The L reach is an effect suggesting that the possibility that the lottery result of the special lottery was a "jackpot" is lower than the SP reach but higher than the N reach, and is an effect for making the player expect a big win. function as The execution time of the ready-to-win effect of L reach is shorter than the effect time of the ready-to-win effect of SP ready-to-win (FIGS. 13 and 14). Therefore, in the reach effect of the L reach, for example, a shorter moving image than the reach effect of the SP reach is displayed on the display unit 50a. In addition, the content of the ready-to-win effect of the L-to-win can be changed as appropriate. In addition, a special figure variation pattern may be provided in which the ready-to-reach production of SP reach is executed expansively after the ready-to-reach production of L reach.

4-3. Suspended Icon Display Area The display unit 50a of the image display device 50 can be provided with a suspended icon display area 50d consisting of four display areas, as shown in FIG. 22(A). The pending icon display area 50d is composed of a first display area 50d1, a second display area 50d2, a third display area 50d3 and a fourth display area 50d4, depending on the number of special figures 1 pending or the number of special figures 2 pending, each A pending icon HA can be displayed in the display areas 50d1, 50d2, 50d3, 50d4. For example, when the special figure 1 reserved number is "1", the reserved icon HA is displayed in the first display area 50d1, and when the special figure 1 reserved number is "2", the first display area 50d1 and the second 2 display area 50d2 and the pending icon HA is displayed.

Also, as shown in FIG. 22A, it is possible to provide an icon display area 50e consisting of one display area in the vicinity of the pending icon display area 50d. The icon display area 50e can display the same icon TA as the pending icon HA (also referred to as the pending icon TA) in response to the start of the special figure variation effect. An icon different from the pending icon HA may be displayed as the icon TA.

It should be noted that the number of display areas constituting the pending icon display area 50d can be changed as appropriate. Further, the pending icon display area 50d can be a display area that displays both the special figure 1 pending number and the special figure 2 pending number, or a display area that displays only one of them. It is also possible to provide a configuration in which the pending icon display area 50d is provided but not the icon display area 50e, or a configuration in which both are not provided.

4-3-1. Suspension effect The pachinko game machine PY1 can perform a suspension effect in response to the winning of the game ball in the first start port 11 or the second start port 12. - 特許庁The pending effect can notify the player of the number of special figure 1 suspension or special figure 2 suspension.

In the pending effect, when the game ball wins the first starting port 11 when the special figure 1 pending number is "0", the special figure fluctuation effect is started, for example, as shown in FIG. 22 (B), the icon The icon TA is displayed in the display area 50e. Then, when two more game balls win the first starting hole 11 during the special figure fluctuation production, as shown in FIG. A pending icon HA is displayed at 50d2, and the player is notified that the special figure 1 pending number is "2". After that, when the special figure variation effect is completed and a new special figure variation effect is started, as shown in FIG. HA moves to the icon display area 50e and is displayed as the icon TA, and the pending icon HA displayed in the second display area 50d2 of the pending icon display area 50d moves to the first display area 50d1 and is displayed. The player is notified that the special figure 1 pending number is "1".

4-4. Notice Effect The pachinko game machine PY1 can perform a notice effect at an arbitrary timing during the special figure variation effect. The notice effect is a effect using the image display device 50, the speaker 52, the frame lamp 53, the board lamp 54, the movable devices 55, 56, 58, the input device (normal button 40, special button 41), etc. It is possible to suggest the result and the result of special figure fluctuation pattern determination.

4-4-1. Movable Body Effect The pachinko game machine PY1 can perform a movable body effect using the movable devices 55, 56, and 58 as an advance notice effect. The movable body performance is a performance for operating the movable devices 55, 56, 58, and functions as a performance for making the player expect a big win.

In the movable body production, for example, when developing from N reach to SP reach, as shown in FIG. It is suggested that the lower movable body 56k moves so as to overlap the display section 50a and develops into SP reach. At this time, the effect image is displayed in the space of the display unit 50a that does not overlap the on-board movable body 55k and the under-board movable body 56k. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 23(B), the on-board movable body 55k and the lower-board movable body 56k return to the normal standby state (initial position) and develop into SP reach. This movable body production is an example of a development production. Note that the movable body presentation is not limited to suggestions for developing SP reach, and can be changed or added as appropriate. In addition, it is possible to appropriately change or add the operation contents of the movable device in the movable body presentation. Also, the movable device to be operated in the movable body presentation can be changed as appropriate. In addition, when the effect does not develop (for example, in the case of N loss variation), it is possible to perform a movable body effect as a so-called fake effect. The movable body production is also called a movable body driving production.

4-4-2. Operation Effect The pachinko game machine PY1 can perform an operation effect using the normal button 40 and the special button 41 as an advance notice effect. The operation performance is a performance for causing the player to operate the normal button 40 or the special button 41, and functions as a performance for making the player expect a big win.

In the operation effect, for example, in SP reach, a period (operation valid period) during which the pressing operation of the input device (special button 41) is valid occurs, and with the occurrence of this operation valid period, shown in FIG. 24 (A) As shown, an effect (operation promotion effect) for prompting the operation of the special button 41 is performed. In the operation promotion effect, an operation promotion image G30 is displayed on the display section 50a. The operation prompting image G30 includes an image simulating the special button 41 (special button image G31), an image (operation method instruction image G32) representing the operation method (that is, pressing operation) of the special button 41, and the remainder of the operation valid period. and an image representing time (effective period image G33). Note that the effective period image G33 is composed of a generally curvilinear progress bar, and changes with the passage of time so that the player can easily understand the remaining time of the operation effective period. After that, in response to pressing of the special button 41 during the operation effective period, or after the operation effective period elapses without the special button 41 being operated during the operation effective period, as shown in FIG. At the same time, the on-board movable device 55 is activated, and the on-board movable body 55k moves so as to overlap the display portion 50a, suggesting the degree of expectation for a big win. Note that the operation effect is not limited to the operation of the on-board movable device 55, and can be changed or added as appropriate. Further, the operation prompting effect for prompting the operation of the operation means (operation unit) such as the special button 41 and the normal button 40 is also called an operation instruction effect.

4-4-3. Prefetching Effect The pachinko game machine PY1 can perform a prefetching effect for the special figure 1 reserve or the special figure 2 reserve in which the special figure lottery is not performed as the notice effect. The look-ahead performance functions as a performance for suggesting in advance the lottery result of the special figure lottery for the special figure 1 reservation or the special figure 2 reservation.

In the look-ahead effect, for example, when the result of the look-ahead determination for the special figure 1 suspension is "jackpot", as shown in FIG. may be displayed as "☆". Further, when the result of the pre-reading determination is "missing", the pending icon HA may be displayed as "*" as a so-called fake effect. In this way, the pending icon HA and the icon TA are displayed in a special mode (for example, "*" in this mode, also called a special mode) instead of in a normal mode ("○" in this mode, also called a normal mode). The look-ahead effect is called a pending change effect. Further, the pending icon HA and the icon TA are collectively referred to as pending display. In this embodiment, as the pending display, the pending icon HA and the icon TA are displayed, but the configuration may be such that only the pending icon HA is displayed and the icon TA is not displayed. In addition, the timing of performing the suspension display of the special mode in the suspension change effect may be the time of the start winning that triggers the suspension display, or the shift display of the suspension display (the display area of the suspension icon HA It may be changed), or it may be during execution of the special figure variation (so-called the variation) corresponding to the pending display (when displayed as the icon TA). In addition, there may be a plurality of types of special modes of pending display.

In addition, the look-ahead effect can be performed for both or one of the special figure 1 reservation and the special figure 2 reservation. Further, the look-ahead effect is not limited to changing the display mode of the pending icon HA, and can be changed or added as appropriate. As the look-ahead effect other than the pending change effect, for example, there is a so-called continuous notice.

5. Game Control by Game Control Microcomputer 101 Next, game control by the game control microcomputer 101 will be described with reference to FIGS. Note that counters, timers, buffers, and the like appearing in game control by the game control microcomputer 101 described below are provided in the game RAM 104 .

[1. Main control main processing]
The game control microcomputer 101 provided on the main control board 100 reads and executes the main control main processing program shown in FIG. 25 from the game ROM 103 when the pachinko game machine PY1 is powered on. As shown in the figure, in the main control main process, first, power-on process (S001) is performed. In the power-on process, access permission setting to the game RAM 104, setting of the game CPU 102, setting of SIO, PIO, CTC (circuit for managing interrupt time), etc. are performed.

In addition, in the power-on process (S001), the game control microcomputer 101 executes RAM clear when a signal based on the pressing operation to the RAM clear switch 191 is input. When the RAM clear is executed, the game information stored in the game RAM 104 (for example, game state information such as a high probability state, information such as the number of special figure reservations and the result of judging whether a big hit is successful or not) is erased. Thereby, the game state is set to the normal game state (low probability low base state, low probability non-time saving state). However, even if the RAM is cleared, the information on the total number of prize balls stored in the total number of prize balls storage unit 107a, the information on the total number of shot balls stored in the total number of shot balls storage unit 107b, The information on the difference number of balls stored in the number storage unit 107c is not cleared.

Following the power-on process, interrupts are prohibited (S002), and a normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S003) is executed. In this normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S003), the counter values of various random numbers shown in FIGS. 10(A) and 10(B) are updated by adding 1 to them. When the counter value of each random number reaches the upper limit, it returns to "0" and is added again. The initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0", or may be changed randomly. At least some of the random numbers may be so-called hardware random numbers generated using a known random number generation circuit such as a counter IC.

When the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S003) is completed, an interrupt is permitted (S004). While interrupts are enabled, it is possible to execute main-side timer interrupt processing (S005). The main-side timer interrupt processing (S005) is executed based on an interrupt pulse that is repeatedly input to the game CPU 102 at a cycle of, for example, 4 msec. That is, the main-side timer interrupt processing (S005) is executed at a cycle of 4 msec. Then, after the main side timer interrupt processing (S005) is completed, before the next main side timer interrupt processing (S005) is started, various types of normal symbol/special symbol main random number update processing (S003) The process of updating the random number counter value is repeatedly executed. When an interrupt pulse is input to the game CPU 102 in the interrupt disabled state, the main timer interrupt processing (S005) is not started immediately, but is started after the interrupt is permitted (S004).

[2. Main side timer interrupt processing]
Next, the main-side timer interrupt processing (S005) will be described. As shown in FIG. 26, in the main-side timer interrupt processing (S005), input processing (S102) is first executed. In the input process (S102), the game control microcomputer 101 takes in, for example, a detection signal from the lower tray full switch for detecting the fullness of the lower tray 35, and stores it in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 as lower tray full data.

The normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S103) performed next is the same as the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S003) performed in the main control main process of FIG. That is, the processing for updating the counter values of various random numbers shown in FIGS. 10A and 10B includes the execution period of the main-side timer interrupt processing (S005) and the other period (main-side timer interrupt processing ( S005) is completed and the period until the next main side timer interrupt process (S005) is started).

Following the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S103), the game control microcomputer 101 performs sensor detection process (S104), then performs normal operation process (S105), and further performs special operation process (S107). conduct. Sensor detection processing, normal operation processing, and special operation processing will be described later.

After the special action process (S107), a sorting device control process (S108) for controlling the sorting device 16D is performed. It should be noted that the sorting device 16D is operated when a special game using the second big winning device 15D is performed. However, the sorting device 16D may always be operated in a constant operation from power-on.

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 executes output processing (S112). In the output process (S112), the commands set in the output buffer provided in the game RAM 104 of the main control board 100 in each process described above are output to the sub control board 120, the payout control board 170, and the like.

After that, the game control microcomputer 101 executes other processing (S113) and terminates the main side timer interrupt processing (S005). As other processing (S113), a power-off monitoring process when the power is turned off, a timer provided in the game RAM 104, and the like are performed. In addition, as other processing (S113), a payout control processing for paying out prize balls to the player is performed. In the payout control process, a prize ball request signal is transmitted to the payout control board 170 in accordance with the winning of the game ball into each winning hole. That is, the payout control board 170 pays out prize balls based on the prize ball request signal.

Then, the game control microcomputer 101 repeatedly executes the processing of steps S002 to S004 of the main control main processing until an interrupt pulse is input to the game CPU 102 next time (see FIG. 25), and an interrupt pulse is input. (After about 4 msec), the main side timer interrupt processing (S005) is executed again.

[2-1. Sensor detection processing]
In the sensor detection process (S104), the general winning opening sensor process, the gate sensor process, the second starting opening sensor process, the first starting opening sensor process, the first big winning opening sensor process, the second big winning opening sensor process, the specific area Sensor processing and outlet sensor processing are sequentially performed. Then, commands generated in each process are set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 .

In the general winning opening sensor process, it is determined whether or not a game ball is detected by the general winning opening sensor 10a. Also, according to the result of the processing, a command for the general winning opening sensor is generated.

In the gate sensor process, it is determined whether or not the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 13a. When it is determined that the game ball is detected, the normal symbol random number indicated by the counter value of the normal symbol random number counter is acquired, and the acquired normal symbol random number is stored in the normal symbol reservation storage part 106 provided in the game RAM 104.例文帳に追加. In addition, when a predetermined number (for example, four) of normal symbol random numbers are stored in the normal pattern reservation storage unit 106, the newly acquired normal symbol random numbers are not stored. Also, a gate sensor command is generated according to the result of the processing.

In the second starting hole sensor process, it is determined whether or not the game ball is detected by the second starting hole sensor 12a. When it is determined that the game ball is detected, a special symbol 2 related random number consisting of a special symbol random number counter, a jackpot symbol type random number counter, a reach random number counter and a special symbol variation pattern random number counter is acquired, and the acquired special symbol 2 related random number is stored in the special figure 2 reservation storage unit 105b provided in the game RAM 104. The special figure 2 reservation storage unit 105b has a plurality of storage areas from the first area to the nth area (n is an integer of 2 or more, for example "4"), and the acquired special figure 2 related random number is the first They are stored in order from the area. In addition, when the Toku-zu 2 relation random number is stored up to the n-th area, the newly acquired Toku-zu 2 relation random number is not stored. In addition, the second look-ahead determination is performed using the obtained Toku-zu 2 related random number and the second look-ahead determination table. In addition, according to the result of the process, the special figure 2 reservation number command representing the number of special figure 2 relation random numbers (number of special figure 2 reservations) stored in the special figure 2 reservation storage unit 105b and the second look-ahead determination Generate a command for the second starting port sensor including a second starting win command representing the result.

In the first starting hole sensor process, it is determined whether or not the game ball is detected by the first starting hole sensor 11a. When it is determined that a game ball is detected, a special symbol 1 related random number consisting of a special symbol random number counter, a jackpot symbol type random number counter, a reach random number counter and a special symbol variation pattern random number counter is acquired, and the acquired special symbol 1 related random number is stored in the special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a provided in the game RAM 104. The special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a has a plurality of storage areas from the first area to the nth area (n is an integer of 2 or more, for example "4"), and the acquired special figure 1 related random number is the first They are stored in order from the area. It should be noted that, when the Toku-zu 1-related random number is stored up to the n-th area, the newly acquired Toku-zu 1-related random number is not stored. In addition, the first prefetching determination is performed using the acquired special figure 1 related random number and the first prefetching determination table. In addition, according to the result of the process, the special figure 1 reservation number command representing the number of special figure 1 relation random numbers (special figure 1 reservation number) stored in the special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a and the first look-ahead determination Generate a command for the first start opening sensor including a first start win command representing the result.

In the first big winning hole sensor process, it is determined whether or not a game ball is detected by the first big winning hole sensor 14a. Also, a command for the first big winning hole sensor is generated according to the result of the processing.

In the second big winning hole sensor process, it is determined whether or not the game ball is detected by the second big winning hole sensor 15a. Also, a command for the second big winning opening sensor is generated according to the result of the processing.

In the specific area sensor process, it is determined whether or not a game ball is detected by the specific area sensor 16a. Also, a specific area sensor command is generated according to the result of the processing.

In the outlet sensor process, it is determined whether or not a game ball is detected by the outlet sensor.

[2-2. Normal operation processing]
In the normal operation process (S105), the normal symbol standby process, normal symbol variation process, normal symbol determination process, and auxiliary game control process are sequentially performed. Then, commands generated in each process are set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 .

The normal symbol standby process is a process that is performed during standby when the normal symbol variable display and auxiliary game are not performed. In the normal symbol standby process, the hit determination is performed based on the normal symbol random number stored in the normal symbol reservation storage unit 106. - 特許庁In addition, based on the current gaming state, normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination is performed to determine the normal pattern fluctuation pattern. Then, to generate a normal pattern fluctuation start command including information about the result of the hit determination and the normal pattern fluctuation pattern. Then, based on the normal pattern fluctuation time associated with the determined normal pattern fluctuation pattern, the normal pattern display device 82 is caused to start variable display of the normal pattern.

The normal symbol variation process is a process performed during the variable display of the normal pattern. In the normal pattern variation process, the normal pattern is stopped and displayed based on the hit determination result when the normal pattern variation time elapses after the start of the variable display of the normal pattern being executed. Then, it generates a general pattern fluctuation stop command indicating the end of the variable display of the general pattern.

The normal symbol determination process is a process performed when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed. In the normal design determination process, after a predetermined stop time (for example, 0.8 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the stop display of the normal pattern being executed, the normal pattern that is stopped and displayed is a winning pattern. Determine whether or not there is If the winning pattern is stopped and displayed, the auxiliary game is started based on the current game state and the auxiliary game control table, and an auxiliary game start command indicating the start of the auxiliary game is generated.

Auxiliary game control processing is a process that is performed when the auxiliary game is being performed. In the auxiliary game control process, the auxiliary game is controlled based on the current game state and the auxiliary game control table. Moreover, according to the result of the said process, the command for auxiliary game control is produced|generated.

[2-3. Special operation processing]
In the special action process (S107), a special symbol standby process, a special symbol variation process, a special symbol determination process, a big hit game control process, and a game state setting process are sequentially performed. Then, commands generated in each process are set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 .

[2-3-1. Special symbol standby process]
The special symbol standby process is not a jackpot game state, but a process performed during standby when variable display of special symbols is not performed. In the special symbol standby process, based on the special figure 2 relationship random number stored in the special figure 2 reservation storage unit 105b, along with performing the special figure 2 determination process and the special figure 2 variation pattern determination process, the special figure 2 reservation storage unit Perform shift processing. Also, based on the special figure 1 related random number stored in the special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a, the special figure 1 determination process and the special figure 1 variation pattern determination process are performed, and the special figure 1 reservation storage unit shift process is performed. .

In the special figure 2 determination process, using the special symbol random number of the special figure 2 relation random numbers stored in the first area of the special figure 2 reservation storage unit 105b and the jackpot determination table according to the current game state , Big hit determination is performed to determine whether it is a big hit or a loss. If the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, the jackpot pattern type determination is performed to determine the type of the jackpot pattern using the jackpot pattern type random number of the special-figure 2 related random numbers and the special-figure 2 jackpot pattern type determination table. . Then, a symbol designation command representing the determined big hit symbol type is generated. Also, if the result of the big hit determination is a loss, a symbol designation command representing a loss is generated. It should be noted that a plurality of types of losing may be provided, and if the result of the jackpot determination is a loss, the type of the losing pattern may be determined. In this case, it is preferable to include information indicating the type of the lost symbol in the symbol designation command.

Special figure 2 fluctuation pattern decision processing is the processing which is done after special figure 2 decision processing. In the special figure 2 variation pattern determination process, the special figure variation pattern random number of the special figure 2 relation random numbers stored in the first area of the special figure 2 reservation storage unit 105b, and the special figure 2 according to the current game state Using the variation pattern determination table, determine the special figure 2 variation pattern. In the special figure 2 variation pattern determination process when the result of the big hit determination is loss, reach determination is made, and the special figure 2 variation pattern is determined according to the result of the reach determination. In addition, the determination of the special figure 2 variation pattern is also associated with the number of special figure 2 relation random numbers (special figure 2 reservation number) stored in the special figure 2 reservation storage unit 105b. And to generate a special figure 2 variation start command representing the determined special figure 2 variation pattern. The special figure 2 variation start command includes information about being a special figure 2, information about the result of the jackpot determination, information about the result of the jackpot pattern type determination, information about the result of the reach determination, and the special figure 2 variation pattern. Includes information such as special figure fluctuation time. Then, based on the special figure fluctuation time associated with the determined special figure 2 fluctuation pattern, the special figure 2 indicator 81b is caused to start variable display of the special figure 2.

Special figure 2 reservation storage unit shift processing is a process performed when special figure 2 determination processing and special figure 2 variation pattern determination processing are performed. In the special figure 2 reservation storage unit shift process, the special figure 2 relationship random number stored in the special figure 2 reservation storage unit 105b is shifted to the first area side by one, and the special figure 2 relationship random number of the first area is special. It is cleared from the FIG. 2 reservation storage unit 105b. In this way, the special figure 2 related random numbers are digested in the order in which they were acquired. Then, to generate a special figure 2 reservation number command representing the special figure 2 reservation number after the processing.

In the special figure 1 determination process, using the special symbol random number of the special figure 1 relation random numbers stored in the first area of the special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a and the jackpot determination table according to the current game state , Big hit determination is performed to determine whether it is a big hit or a loss. If the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, the jackpot pattern type determination is performed to determine the type of the jackpot pattern by using the jackpot pattern type random number of the special-figure 1 related random numbers and the special-figure 1 jackpot pattern type determination table. . Then, a symbol designation command representing the determined big hit symbol type is generated. Also, if the result of the big hit determination is a loss, a symbol designation command representing a loss is generated. It should be noted that a plurality of types of losing may be provided, and if the result of the jackpot determination is a loss, the type of the losing pattern may be determined. In this case, the symbol specifying command may include information indicating the type of the missing symbol.

The special figure 1 variation pattern determination process is a process performed after the special figure 1 determination process. In the special figure 1 variation pattern determination process, the special figure variation pattern random number of the special figure 1 relation random numbers stored in the first area of the special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a, and the special figure 1 according to the current game state Using the variation pattern determination table, determine the special figure 1 variation pattern. In the special figure 1 variation pattern determination process when the result of the big hit determination is loss, reach determination is made, and the special figure 1 variation pattern is determined according to the result of the reach determination. In addition, the determination of the special figure 1 variation pattern is also associated with the number of special figure 1 relation random numbers (special figure 1 reservation number) stored in the special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a. Then, a special figure 1 variation start command representing the determined special figure 1 variation pattern is generated. The special figure 1 variation start command includes information about being a special figure 1, information about the result of the jackpot determination, information about the result of the jackpot pattern type determination, information about the result of the reach determination, and the special figure 1 variation pattern. Includes information such as special figure fluctuation time. Then, based on the special figure variation time associated with the determined special figure 1 variation pattern, the special figure 1 indicator 81a is caused to start the variable display of the special figure 1.

Special figure 1 reservation storage unit shift processing is a process performed when special figure 1 determination processing and special figure 1 variation pattern determination processing are performed. In the special figure 1 reservation storage unit shift process, the special figure 1 relationship random number stored in the special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a is shifted to the first area side by one, and the special figure 1 relationship random number of the first area is special. It is cleared from the FIG. 1 reservation storage unit 105a. In this way, the special figure 1 related random numbers are digested in the order in which they were obtained. Then, to generate a special figure 1 reservation number command representing the special figure 1 reservation number after the processing.

It should be noted that if there are both the special figure 2 pending number and the special figure 1 pending number, the special figure 2 determination process is performed with priority, and the variable display of the special figure 2 and the variable display of the special figure 1 are in parallel This is no longer done. That is, the game control microcomputer 101 does not perform the special figure 1 determination process even if there is a special figure 1 suspension when there is a special figure 2 suspension. In addition, the variable display of the special figure 2 and the variable display of the special figure 1 may be configured to be performed in order of winning, or may be configured to be performed at the same time.

[2-3-2. Special symbol variation processing]
The special symbol variation process is a process performed during variable display of special symbols. In the special symbol variation processing, when the special symbol variation time elapses, the special symbol indicator 81 is caused to end the variable display of the special symbol and stop displaying the special symbol according to the result of the big hit determination. If the result of the big win determination is a big win, the big win pattern indicating the big win is stopped and displayed, and if the result of the big win determination is a loss, the losing pattern indicating the loss is stopped and displayed. And, to generate a special figure fluctuation stop command indicating the end of the variable display of the special figure.

[2-3-3. Special symbol confirmation process]
The special symbol determination process is a process performed when the special symbol is stopped and displayed. In the special symbol determination process, when the currently stopped and displayed special symbol is a big winning symbol, the game state is shifted to a big winning game state. Then, an opening command indicating the start of the jackpot game is generated. The opening command includes information about the result of the jackpot symbol type determination. In addition, when the currently stopped and displayed special figure is a lost symbol and the high probability state is terminated, the normal probability state is set. Then, it generates a high-probability end command indicating transition to the normal-probability state. In addition, when the special figure currently stopped and displayed is a lost pattern and the time saving state is terminated, the non-time saving state is set. And the time saving end command which shows transition to non-time saving state is produced|generated. In addition, when the currently stopped and displayed special figure is a losing pattern and the number of reserved special figures 2 and the number of reserved special figures 1 are "0", the pachinko machine PY1 is waiting for a customer indicating that it is in a standby state. Generate commands.

[2-3-4. Jackpot game control process]
The jackpot game control process is a process performed in the jackpot game state. In the jackpot game control process, a jackpot game is played according to the jackpot game control table. After shifting to the jackpot game state, each round game is started according to the lapse of opening time or closing time. Then, a round game command indicating the start of the round game is generated. Also, the ending is started in accordance with the end of the final round game. Then, an ending command indicating the end of the jackpot game is generated. The ending command includes information about the result of the jackpot symbol type determination.

[2-3-5. Game state setting process]
The game state setting process is a process performed when the jackpot game state ends. In the game state setting process, when changing from the normal probability state to the high probability state, the high probability state is set at the end of the jackpot game state. When the duration of the high probability state is limited, the duration of the high probability state (for example, the number of times of variable display of a special figure that allows the high probability state to continue without winning a jackpot) is also set. Then, it generates a high-probability setting command indicating the setting of the high-probability state. In addition, when changing from the non-time-saving state to the time-saving state, the time-saving state is set when the jackpot game state ends. When limiting the duration of the time saving state, the duration of the time saving state (for example, the number of times of variable display of a special figure that allows the time saving state to continue without winning a jackpot) is also set. And the time saving setting command which shows the setting of a time saving state is produced|generated.

The command generated by the game control microcomputer 101 in each process can be added or changed as appropriate.

6. Effect Control by Effect Control Microcomputer 121 Next, the effect control by the effect control microcomputer 121 will be described with reference to FIGS. 27 to 29. FIG. Note that counters, timers, flags, buffers, etc. appearing in the explanation of the control of the effect by the following effect control microcomputer 121 are provided in the effect RAM 124 .

[1. Sub control main processing]
The effect control microcomputer 121 provided on the sub-control board 120 reads and executes the sub-control main processing program shown in FIG. As shown in the figure, in the sub-control main process, first, power-on processing corresponding to power-on is performed (S4001). In the power-on process, for example, settings of the performance CPU 122, settings of SIO, PIO, CTC (circuit for managing interrupt time), etc. are performed.

Next, interrupts are prohibited (S4002), and random number update processing is executed (S4003). In the random number update process (S4003), the values of various effect determination random number counters for determining various effects are updated. As an example of a method for updating the effect determination random number counter for various effects, the same method as the random number update process performed by the main control board 100 can be used. Instead of adding 1 to the random value at the time of updating, it is also possible to add 2 at a time. This also applies to the random number update process performed by the main control board 100 described above.

When the random number update process ends, the command transmission process is executed (S4004). In the command transmission process, various commands stored in the output buffer in the effect RAM 124 of the sub control board 120 are transmitted to the image control board 140 . The image control board 140 that has received the command displays an image on the display section 50a according to the received command (performs various effects based on the image). In addition to various effects performed by the image control board 140, the sub-control board 120 outputs sound from the speaker 52 via the sound control circuit 161 (executes various sound effects by sound), and controls the lamp. Through the circuit 151, the frame lamp 53 and the board lamp 54 are made to emit light (executing various light emission effects by light emission), and the movable devices 55, 56, 58 are operated (various movable body effects are produced by actions). run or). In this way, various effects (special figure fluctuation effect, suspension effect, operation effect, look-ahead effect, other advance notice effect, jackpot game effect, customer waiting effect, control of effect mode, etc.) are realized.

The effect control microcomputer 121 subsequently permits an interrupt (S4005). Thereafter, steps S4002 to S4005 are looped. While interrupts are enabled, reception interrupt processing (S4010), 1 ms timer interrupt processing (S4011), and 10 ms timer interrupt processing (S4012) can be executed.

The reception interrupt process (S4010) is executed each time various commands sent from the main control board 100 are input to the effect control microcomputer 121. In the reception interrupt process (S4010), the production control microcomputer 121 stores various commands transmitted and received by the output process (S112) of the main control board 100 in the reception buffer of the production RAM124. This reception interrupt process is executed with priority over other interrupt processes (S4011, S4012).

[2.1 ms timer interrupt processing]
The 1ms timer interrupt process (S4011) is executed each time an interrupt pulse with a period of 1msec is input to the sub-control board 120. FIG. In the 1 ms timer interrupt processing (S4011), as shown in FIG. 28, input processing (S4101), light emission data output processing (S4102), movable device control processing (S4103), and watchdog timer processing (S4104) are sequentially performed.

In the input process, the operation of the player's operable operation units such as the normal button detection switch 40a and the special button detection switch 41a is detected, and depending on the detection result, a command is set or production data is created. In the light emission data output process, the lamps such as the frame lamp 53 and the board lamp 54 are caused to emit light at the timing suitable for the image effect, etc., based on the effect data created in the input process, the effect data creation process, etc., which will be described later. Therefore, the light emission data is output to the lamp control circuit 151 . That is, the production control microcomputer 121 causes the frame lamp 53, the board lamp 54, and the like to emit light in a predetermined light emission mode according to the light emission data. In the movable device control process, based on the data for effects created in the input process, the later-described effect data creation process, etc., a movable body effect is performed by operating the movable devices such as the movable devices 55, 56, and 58 at a predetermined timing. drive data is output. That is, the effect control microcomputer 121 performs the movable object effect by operating the movable devices 55, 56, 58 and the like in a predetermined operation mode according to the drive data. The watchdog timer process resets the watchdog timer.

[3.10 ms timer interrupt processing]
The 10ms timer interrupt process (S4012) is executed each time an interrupt pulse with a period of 10msec is input to the sub-control board 120. FIG. In the 10 ms timer interrupt processing (S4012), as shown in FIG. 29, received command analysis processing (S4201), effect timer update processing (S4202), voice control processing (S4203), and effect data creation processing (S4204) are sequentially performed. .

In the received command analysis process, the received interrupt process (S4010) analyzes the command stored in the reception buffer of the production RAM 124, and performs processing according to the command (for example, selection of production, setting of production mode, command setting, etc.). I do. In the production timer update process, a timer for measuring the time for each production is updated. For example, in the performance timer update process, the start timing and end timing of the operation effective period of the operation unit such as the normal button 40 and the special button 41 are measured. In the audio control process, audio data (data for controlling audio output from the speaker 52) is created and output to the audio control circuit 161 based on the processing results of the input process and received command analysis process. In the effect data creation process, the effect data is created based on the processing result of the received command analysis process.

Here, an example of processing when the effect control microcomputer 121 receives a command from the game control microcomputer 101 will be described. The command received by the production control microcomputer 121 is a special figure variation start command (special figure 1 variation start command or special figure 2 variation start command). Production control microcomputer 121, in the received command analysis process (S4201), when it is determined that the special figure fluctuation start command is received, as the fluctuation start command reception processing, based on the special figure fluctuation pattern indicated by the command , selects the performance pattern (sub-variation pattern) of the special figure variation performance, sets the information of the sub-variation pattern, and sets the variation performance start command including the information of the sub-variation pattern to the output buffer. For example, if the special figure variation pattern indicated by the special figure variation start command is SP variation (SP jackpot variation or SP loss variation), select a sub variation pattern to perform SP reach, start variation production corresponding to the sub variation pattern Put the command in the output buffer. After that, each process (command transmission process (S4004), emission data output process (S4102), movable device control process (S4103), voice control process (S4203), etc.) is executed, corresponding to the selected sub-variation pattern A special figure variation production is realized. The flow of processing related to the realization of such an effect is basically the same for other effects such as a jackpot game effect, a customer waiting effect, a look-ahead effect, and a so-called advance notice effect associated with the change.

7. Characteristic Portion of Pachinko Gaming Machine PY1 Characteristic portions of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 will be described in detail below. One of the features of the pachinko game machine PY1 is the pseudo continuous effect.

First, the jackpot game that can be executed by the game control microcomputer 101 of the pachinko game machine PY1 will be described. The game control microcomputer 101 can execute various jackpot games (jackpot games 1 to 4) shown in the jackpot game control table of FIG.

As shown in FIG. 30, the game control microcomputer 101 determines "jackpot pattern 1" or "jackpot pattern" in the jackpot symbol type determination in the special figure 1 determination process (special figure determination process based on the winning to the first start port 11). Any of the symbols 2” can be determined. More specifically, the game control microcomputer 101 determines "jackpot pattern 1" at a rate of 60% and "jackpot pattern 2" at a rate of 40%. In addition, the game control microcomputer 101, in the jackpot symbol type determination in the special figure 2 determination process (special figure determination process based on the winning to the second start port 12), either "jackpot symbol 3" or "jackpot symbol 4" It is possible to determine whether More specifically, the game control microcomputer 101 determines "jackpot pattern 3" at a rate of 60% and "jackpot pattern 4" at a rate of 40%.

Then, the game control microcomputer 101 executes a jackpot game corresponding to the determined jackpot symbol type. Specifically, in the "jackpot game 1" that is executed when the "jackpot pattern 1" is determined, and the "jackpot game 2" that is executed when the "jackpot pattern 2" is determined, the round game is performed 10 times. Then, from 1R to 4R, the first big winning port 14 is opened over a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round game, and from 5R to 10R, the first opening is opened over a maximum of 0.1 seconds per round game. The big prize opening 14 is opened. From the 5th round to the 10th round of this jackpot game, the opening time of the first big winning hole 14 is extremely short, and it is a round in which winning to the first big winning hole 14 cannot be expected in reality. That is, although the total number of round games in this jackpot game is ten times, the substantial number of round games is four times.

In addition, in the "jackpot game 3" executed when the "jackpot pattern 3" is determined and the "jackpot game 4" executed when the "jackpot pattern 4" is determined, the round game is played 10 times. done. Then, in all of 1R to 10R, the first big winning port 14 is opened for 29.5 seconds at maximum per one round game. In other words, in this jackpot game, the total number of round games and the substantial number of round games are 10 times.

Therefore, "jackpot game 3" and "jackpot game 4" with a substantial number of round games of 10 are "jackpot game 1" or "jackpot game 2" with a substantial number of round games of 4 times. It can be said that the jackpot game is more advantageous to the player than the jackpot game, and the jackpot game state in which "jackpot game 3" or "jackpot game 4" is executed is the jackpot game state in which "jackpot game 1" or "jackpot game 2" is executed. It can be said that this is a game state more advantageous to the player than the game state.

Next, game states that can be controlled by the game control microcomputer 101 will be described. The game control microcomputer 101, even when executing any of the jackpot games of "jackpot game 1", "jackpot game 2", "jackpot game 3" and "jackpot game 4", changes the game state after the jackpot game to Set to the time saving state (high base state). Further, when either "jackpot game 1" or "jackpot game 3" is executed, the game state after the jackpot game is set to a high probability state, while "jackpot game 2" or "jackpot game 2" or "jackpot game 2" is set. When any jackpot game of game 4" is executed, the game state after the jackpot game is set to the normal probability state. That is, after "jackpot game 1" or "jackpot game 3", control to a high probability high base game state (high probability state and short time state), and after "jackpot game 2" or "jackpot game 4", Control to low probability high base game state (normal probability state and time saving state).

In this form, when winning a jackpot controlled to a high-probability high-base game state according to the end of the jackpot game (referred to as variable probability jackpot), the final stop of the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 in the variable performance. As a mode, odd-numbered patterns (1 pattern, 3 patterns, 5 patterns, 7 patterns, or 9 patterns), or even-numbered patterns (2 patterns, 4 patterns, 6 patterns, or 8 patterns) are displayed. be. On the other hand, when winning a jackpot controlled to a low-probability high base game state according to the end of the jackpot game (usually referred to as a jackpot or a short-time jackpot), the final effects of the production patterns EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 in the variable production As a stop mode, even-numbered symbols are displayed, and odd-numbered symbols are not displayed. In other words, the probability variable jackpot is confirmed for the double eyes of the odd pattern. Therefore, the odd pattern is also called a probability variation pattern. In addition, even-numbered double eyes usually have the potential for a big hit. Therefore, even-numbered designs are also called normal designs.

In this embodiment, the "high probability high base game state" can be continued until the next big winning game is executed. On the other hand, the "low probability high base game state" can be continued until the number of times of variable display of special symbols reaches 100 times (predetermined upper limit number of times of execution).

Therefore, the "jackpot game 1" or "jackpot game 3" in which the high probability state is set after that is more advantageous to the player than the "jackpot game 2" or "jackpot game 4" in which the high probability state is not set after that. It can be said that it is a jackpot game. Also, the jackpot game state in which "jackpot game 1" or "jackpot game 3" is executed is a game state more advantageous to the player than the jackpot game state in which "jackpot game 2" or "jackpot game 4" is executed. I can say

It should be noted that the jackpot game state can be said to be a game state more advantageous than the normal game state regardless of the type of jackpot symbol. Also, the "high-probability high-base game state", which is one of the high-probability states, can be said to be a game state more advantageous to the player than the "low-probability high-base game state", which is one of the normal-probability states. In this specification, a game state that is advantageous to the player is sometimes referred to as an advantageous game state or an advantageous state.

Next, the pseudo-continuous effect that can be executed by the pachinko game machine PY1 will be described. Pseudo-continuous production is a production that makes it appear that multiple fluctuations are being performed in one special symbol fluctuation display (special fluctuation), and the fluctuation production with pseudo-continuous production is all production patterns EZ1 , EZ2, and EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed once again, and then re-variation display is performed once or more. In this embodiment, the numbers of the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 related to the temporary stop display are predetermined pseudo consecutive numbers. Specifically, it is a result in which the middle effect symbol EZ2 is a pseudo-continuous symbol GZ (corresponding to a specific image) suggesting execution of a pseudo-continuous effect (see FIG. 32(E)). The pseudo-continuous design GZ is a performance design (icon) including characters of "pseudo" meaning pseudo-continuous performance. The display of the pseudo-continuous symbol GZ (pseudo-continuous display) can be said to be a display indicating that the effect being executed is a pseudo-continuous effect, or a display suggesting the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect. The pseudo-continuation effect is also simply called “pseudo-continuation”. Further, as will be described later, the pseudo-continuous effect is executed such that the greater the number of times it is executed, the higher the degree of expectation for a big win.

In addition, the temporary stop display means that the variation speed of the production pattern is "0", but it changes such as shaking at the position where the production pattern is displayed, and the expansion and contraction are repeated, and it is completely stopped. Say no state. On the other hand, the fixed stop display (definite stop display) and the final stop display (final stop display) refer to a state in which the performance symbols are completely stopped. The term "stop display" may refer to temporary stop display or fixed stop display.

The pachinko gaming machine PY1 of this embodiment can execute pseudo-runs in various patterns. That is, in this embodiment, a pseudo-continuation can occur at various timings in the variable performance. FIG. 31 is a diagram for explaining a pattern of occurrence of pseudo-runs. As shown in FIG. 31, the pseudo-running patterns include a pattern that succeeds in a "pseudo-running" (corresponding to a "predetermined reference pattern") and a pattern in which a "symbol slide" is performed (a "first non-reference pattern"). pattern”), a pattern that succeeds in the “pseudo-coupling/failure effect”, and a pattern in which characters of “continue” are displayed in the SP reach (corresponding to the “second non-reference pattern”). In this embodiment, each of the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 includes number symbols 1 to 9 (1 symbol to 9 symbols), and can be stopped at any symbol.

First, the “pseudo-reaming” will be explained. Pseudo-continuous fanning (corresponding to "enthusiastic performance") is an effect performed after the left performance symbol EZ1 and the right performance symbol EZ3 are stop-displayed, and whether the pseudo-continuous-symbol GZ is stop-displayed as the middle performance symbol EZ2. It is a production that incites whether or not. Pseudo-continuum stimulus functions as an effect that makes the player expect that the pseudo-continuum will be executed. As shown in FIG. 31, when the left performance symbol EZ1 and the right performance symbol EZ3 are stopped and displayed in the non-reach state (non-reach state) in the variable display of the performance symbols, the middle performance symbol EZ2 is stopped as it is with the number symbols. There are cases in which a losing loop is formed and in which a pseudo-continuous swing is performed. The pseudo-continuous fanning has a failure mode in which the pseudo-continuous symbol GZ is not stop-displayed as the medium effect symbol EZ2, and a successful mode in which the pseudo-continuous symbol GZ is stop-displayed. In the case where the pseudo consecutive fanning of failure is performed, the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are stop-displayed with a losing eye. On the other hand, when the pseudo-fighting of success is performed, the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are again variably displayed.

FIG. 32 is a diagram of the display section 50a when the pseudo-continuous fanning is performed. As shown in FIGS. 32(A) and 32(B), in the variable display of the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2 and EZ3, the left performance symbol EZ1 and the right performance symbol EZ3 are stopped and displayed in a non-reach state, and then a pseudo-continuous swing is performed. sometimes be In the pseudo-continuous fanning, the pseudo-continuous symbol GZ, which is the medium effect symbol EZ2, is relatively slowly moved toward the stop position (FIG. 32(B)). As a result, whether or not the pseudo-continuous symbol GZ is stop-displayed as the intermediate effect symbol EZ2 is encouraged.

As shown in FIG. 32(C), the pseudo-continuous pattern GZ is moved and displayed from the display section 50a without stopping at a predetermined stop position (the stop position of the medium effect pattern EZ2) until it is framed out of the display section 50a. , and as the middle effect symbol EZ2, number symbols (for example, 2 symbols) constituting a losing eye (unbalanced eye) are stop-displayed. Then, with this result, the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are definitely stopped and displayed (FIG. 32(D)).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 32(E), the pseudo-continuous pattern GZ is stop-displayed as the medium effect symbol EZ2 in the successful pseudo-continuous swing. The stop display of the pseudo consecutive symbols GZ corresponds to "display of a specific image". After that, the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are displayed again (FIG. 32(F)). In this way, the pseudo-continuous effect is performed through the pseudo-continuous effect of success.

Next, "symbol sliding" will be explained. Symbol sliding (corresponding to "symbol change performance") is to slide the right performance symbol EZ3 out of the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 forming the ready-to-win state (ready-to-win state) and stop and display another number symbol. It is a production that makes it a non-reach state. As shown in FIG. 31, when the left performance symbol EZ1 and the right performance symbol EZ3 are stop-displayed in the ready-to-win state in the variable display of the performance symbols, the case where the symbol sliding is performed, and the case where the N-reach ready-to-win performance is performed. There is. When the symbol sliding is performed, the pseudo consecutive symbol GZ is stopped and displayed as the middle effect symbol EZ2, and all the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are changed again, as in the case of the successful pseudo-continuous fanning. Is displayed.

FIG. 33 is a view of the display section 50a when branching to a symbol slide. As shown in FIGS. 33(A) and 33(B), when the left performance symbol EZ1 and the right performance symbol EZ3 are stopped and displayed in the ready-to-win state in the variable display of the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3, FIG. As shown, there are cases in which the ready-to-win performance of N-reach is performed, and in other cases, symbol skiing is performed as shown in FIGS. When the pattern sliding is performed, a predetermined character (a mini character A with an apple as a motif) is expressed after the performance patterns EZ1, EZ2 and EZ3 are stopped and displayed in the ready-to-win state and before the pattern sliding is performed. A mini character image G40 (corresponding to the "first suggestive image") is displayed on the display section 50a (Fig. 33(D)). The effect in which the mini character image G40 is displayed on the display section 50a is called a mini character display effect. In this mini-character display effect, a state in which the mini-character A is framed in the display section 50a and stops on the right effect pattern EZ3 is expressed.

The symbol sliding is executed after this mini character display effect. In the symbol slide, first, an effect image G41 representing a predetermined effect is displayed so as to overlap in front of the right performance symbol EZ3 (FIG. 33(E)). Then, the number pattern (for example, 3 patterns) stopped and displayed as the right production pattern EZ3 slides downward together with the effect image G41 and out of the frame (the number pattern stopped and displayed as the right production pattern EZ3 moves downward. frame out), and another number pattern (for example, 4 patterns) scrolls from above and is stopped and displayed (FIGS. 33(F) and (G)). As a result, the left effect symbol EZ1 and the right effect symbol EZ3 change to the non-reach state. After that, the pseudo consecutive symbol GZ slowly moves toward the stop position (FIG. 33(G)) in the same manner as the successful pseudo consecutive blow, and is stop-displayed as the medium effect symbol EZ2. Then, the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are displayed again with a change.

As described above, in this embodiment, a mini character display effect is performed before the symbol sliding, and when the symbol sliding is performed, the pseudo continuous symbol GZ is stopped and the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are re-variably displayed. Therefore, the mini-character display effect (the display of the mini-character image G40) functions as an effect suggesting the execution of the symbol slide, and also functions as an effect suggesting the execution of the pseudo-run. In addition, in this embodiment, the mini character display effect (display of the mini character image G40) is started at a timing before the start timing of the N reach (Fig. 33(C)) in the variable effect (Fig. 33(B), (D) reference). Therefore, it is possible to give a pleasant surprise to the player who thinks that the ready-to-win performance will be performed instead of the pseudo-run because the ready-to-win is formed.

Next, the “pseudo-coupled non-effect” will be described. Pseudo-continuous failure effect (equivalent to "specific development effect") is one of the development destinations from N reach. It is a production that branches into a mode of failure that suggests something. That is, the pseudo-continuation failure effect is an effect suggesting the execution of the pseudo-continuation upon success. The pseudo-continuation/non-continuation effect functions as an effect to expect execution of the pseudo-continuation. As shown in FIG. 31, when the ready-to-reach performance of N reach is performed in the variable display of the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3, the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 stop display with the number (double) indicating the winning of the jackpot. , when the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are stop-displayed with the dots indicating failure (ready-to-miss failure), and when the performance is developed. Development destinations from N reach include SP reach and pseudo-coupling/non-representation. The pseudo-coupling-failure effect has a mode of success and a mode of failure. When the pseudo-continuous non-success effect is performed, the pseudo-continuous symbol GZ is stop-displayed as the middle effect symbol EZ2, and the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are variably displayed again. In other words, when the pseudo-continuity failure effect of success is performed, the pseudo-continuation is performed. On the other hand, when the pseudo-coupling/non-failure effect is performed, a number pattern different from the left effect pattern EZ1 and the right effect pattern EZ3 is stop-displayed as the medium effect pattern EZ2. That is, the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are stop-displayed with the reach-losing eyes.

FIG. 34 is a diagram of the display section 50a showing the case of branching to the pseudo-combination-non-effect, and FIG. 35 is a diagram of the display section 50a showing the pseudo-combination-non-effect. When N reach is performed as shown in FIG. 34 (A), when it develops into SP reach as shown in FIGS. 34 (B) and (C), and as shown in FIG. It may develop into In the simulated success/failure effect, first, “succeed in the rescue mission and get a “simulated succession pattern”! is displayed on the display unit 50a (FIGS. 34(D) and 35(A)). By displaying the explanatory image G45, the player is informed of the meaning of the pseudo-coupling/non-coupling effect to be performed from now on. Subsequently, a scene is displayed in which a friendly character appearing in the work, which is the motif of the pachinko game machine PY1 of this embodiment, goes to rescue the heroine (FIG. 35(B)). Then, when the success/failure divergence is reached, if it is a pseudo-coupling/failure effect in the mode of success, a scene in which the heroine is happy to be rescued and a character image G46 of "success" are displayed on the display section 50a (Fig. 35(C)). . When the image shown in FIG. 35(C) is hidden after being displayed for a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds), the screen returns to the screen displaying the daytime normal background image G102, and the middle effect symbol EZ2 is simulated continuously. The symbol GZ is stopped and displayed (FIG. 35(D)), and the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are again displayed in a variable manner. In this way, the pseudo-continuous effect is performed through the pseudo-continuous non-continuous effect of the mode of success.

On the other hand, in the case of the pseudo-coupling-failure rendering of the mode of failure, a scene in which the heroine has not been rescued and is grieving is displayed along with a character image G47 of "failure" on the display section 50a (FIG. 35(E)). When the image shown in FIG. 35(E) is hidden after being displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds), the screen returns to the screen displaying the daytime normal background image G102, and the middle effect symbol EZ2 is left effect. Numerical symbols different from the symbol EZ1 and the right performance symbol EZ3 are stop-displayed, and the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are definitely stop-displayed (FIG. 35(F)).

Next, "character display of 'continue' in SP reach" will be described. As shown in FIG. 31, when developing from N reach to SP reach (equivalent to "predetermined reach effect"), when SP reach indicates a jackpot winning, when a loss is indicated, and further directs to SPSP reach A case where a character image G48 of "development" suggesting the development of is displayed, and a pseudo-continuous effect (stop display of the pseudo-continuous symbol GZ and re-variation display of the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, EZ3) is performed. In some cases, a suggested character image G49 of "continue" is displayed. When the character image G48 of "development" is displayed, the SPSP ready-to-win, which has a higher expectation for the big win than the SP ready-to-win, is executed, and the SPSP ready-to-win wins or loses the big win. When the character image G49 of "Continue" is displayed in the SP reach, the intermediate effect symbol EZ2 is stopped and displayed as a pseudo continuous symbol, and the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2 and EZ3 are displayed again in a variable manner.

FIG. 36 is a diagram showing branching when an SP reach develops into an SPSP reach and when it leads to a pseudo-run. In this form, as SP reach, it is possible to execute battle reach in which a friend character and an enemy character battle. Also, as an SPSP reach, it is possible to execute a final battle reach in which a transformed ally character battles a boss enemy character. When developing from SP reach to SP reach, as shown in FIGS. 36A and 36B, after the battle between the ally character and the enemy character progresses to some extent, the ally transforms into a strong form wearing armor. The image of the character is displayed on the display section 50a, and the character image G48 of "development" is displayed on the display section 50a. This suggests to the player that the SP reach will develop into the SP reach. After that, the pachinko machine PY1 displays on the display unit 50a an SPSP reach image representing a battle between the transformed ally character and the boss enemy character (FIG. 36(C)). Although illustration is omitted, in SPSP Reach, after a battle scene between the transformed friendly character and the boss enemy character is displayed, if the jackpot is won, an image in which the transformed friendly character wins is displayed along with the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2 and EZ3 are stop-displayed with double rolls, and if the result is a loss, an image in which the transformed ally character is defeated is stopped and performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are stop-displayed with reach-loss.

In addition, when the SP reach leads to a pseudo-train, as shown in FIGS. ), a close-up image of the upper body of the ally character is displayed on the display section 50a, and a character image G49 of "Continue" is displayed on the display section 50a (FIG. 36(E)). This suggests to the player that a pseudo-run will be performed. After that, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 returns to the screen displaying the daytime normal background image G102, and displays a pseudo consecutive pattern with the medium effect symbol EZ2 as the pseudo consecutive symbol GZ (FIG. 36(F)). , the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are again changed and displayed. In this way, the pseudo-continuous effect is performed through the character display of "Continue" in the SP reach.

Here, when the character image G48 of "development" is displayed in the SP reach (Fig. 36 (B)), and when the character image G49 of "continue" is displayed in the SP reach (Fig. 36 (E)) , and the effect image (image of the scene of the battle between the ally character and the enemy character) before branching to these are common as shown in FIG. 36(A). In this embodiment, when the character image G48 of "Continue" is displayed in SP reach, a mini character image G50 (" 2nd suggestive image”) is displayed on the display unit 50a (FIG. 36(D)). In other words, a mini-character display effect is performed in the same manner as in the case of the above-described symbol sliding. In the mini-character display effect during the SP reach, the mini-character A is framed in the display section 50a and stopped by an ally character. In this embodiment, the mini-character image G40 displayed in the mini-character display effect that is performed before the execution of the symbol sliding, and the mini-character image G50 that is displayed in the mini-character display effect performed before the display of the character image G49 of "Continue" are different. It is the same image. As long as the two images represent the same object (in this embodiment, the mini character A), the two images may not be exactly the same image, such as different postures, facial expressions, movements, and the like.

As described above, in this embodiment, before the character image G49 of "Continue" or the like is displayed in the SP reach (that is, before the effect image shown in FIG. 36(E) is displayed), the mini character image G50 is displayed. A mini character display effect is performed (FIG. 36(D)), and when a character image G49 of "Continue" etc. is displayed, the pseudo continuous symbol GZ is stopped and the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are again changed and displayed ( FIG. 36(F)). Therefore, this mini-character display effect (display of the mini-character image G50) functions not only as an effect suggesting that the character image G49 of "Continue" is displayed, but also as an effect suggesting the execution of a pseudo-continuation. In addition, in this embodiment, the mini-character display effect of displaying the mini-character image G50 is started at a timing before the display of the character image G48 of "development" in the SP reach (Fig. 36(B)) (Fig. 36 ( A) (see D)). Therefore, it is possible to give a pleasant surprise to a player who thinks that pseudo-runs will not be played anymore because of the development of SP reach. In addition, the SP reach that finally displays the character image G48 of "development" is referred to as "development mode SP reach", and the SP reach that finally displays the character image G49 of "continuation" is referred to as "continuation shall be referred to as the SP reach of the aspect. "Development mode SP reach" corresponds to "non-specific mode production in predetermined reach production", and "continuous mode SP reach" corresponds to "specific mode production in prescribed reach production". .

In this embodiment, the mini-character image G40 displayed in the mini-character display effect that is performed before the execution of the symbol sliding, and the mini-character image G50 that is displayed in the mini-character display effect performed before the display of the character image G49 of "Continue". , are images representing the same object (miniature character A in this embodiment). Therefore, it is possible for the player to easily recognize that the mini-character A has a role of suggesting the execution of the pseudo-continuation in this form. In this mode, the mini-character A is not displayed except for "symbol slide" and "continuous mode SP reach".

Next, the variation pattern determination of the special figure 1 in the non-time saving state will be described. The game control microcomputer 101 determines the special figure 1 variation pattern using the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 37 to 39 in the non-time saving state. It should be noted that the effect is associated with the special figure variation pattern, and the effect control microcomputer 121 executes the effect based on the result of the special figure variation pattern determination using the determination table shown in FIGS. 37 to 39, A pseudo-continuous effect of each pattern described above is executed.

The game control microcomputer 101, in the special figure 1 variation pattern determination process when it is set to the non-time saving state, the result of the jackpot determination performed in the special figure 1 determination process, the reach determination result, and the special figure variation pattern random number Based on, determine the special figure 1 variation pattern. FIG. 37 is a special figure 1 variation pattern determination table when it is determined that the jackpot is won in the jackpot determination. As shown in FIG. 37, the game control microcomputer 101 can determine any one of "THP001" to "THP017" as the special figure 1 variation pattern when it is determined that the jackpot is won in the jackpot determination. be. Whether to determine which special figure 1 variation pattern is distributed by the special figure variation pattern random number. Distribution ratios are as shown in FIG. In addition, it is possible to appropriately change the distribution rate (selection rate) of the special figure variation pattern within a range in which the role of production can be maintained. This is the same for special figure variation patterns other than "THP001" to "THP017".

FIG. 38 is a special figure 1 variation pattern determination table when it is determined that there is a loss in the big hit determination and "with reach" in the reach determination. As shown in FIG. 38, the game control microcomputer 101, when it is determined to be a loss in the jackpot determination, and when it is determined to be "with reach" in the reach determination, "THP021" as a special figure 1 variation pattern. to "THP037".

FIG. 39 is a special figure 1 variation pattern determination table when it is determined that it is lost in the big hit determination and "no reach" is determined in the reach determination. As shown in FIG. 39, the game control microcomputer 101 is a case where it is determined to be a loss in the jackpot determination, and when it is determined as "no reach" in the reach determination, "THP031" as a special figure 1 variation pattern. to "THP034". Which of the four types of special figure 1 variation patterns is determined has a different distribution rate depending on the number of special figure 1 reservations. Specifically, when the number of special figures 1 pending is 3 to 4 (when the number of special figures 1 pending is relatively large), the special figure fluctuation pattern with a relatively short special figure fluctuation time (specifically fluctuation Toku-zu fluctuation pattern THP043) with a time of 5 seconds is easily determined, and when the number of Toku-zu 1 reservations is 0 to 2 (when the number of Toku-zu 1 reservations is relatively small), Toku-zu fluctuation time is relatively A long special figure variation pattern (specifically, a special figure variation pattern THP040, THP041, or THP042 with a variation time of 10 seconds or more) is easily determined.

Here, as shown in FIG. 37, the special figure variation patterns "THP001" to "THP004" develop into SPSP reach (final battle reach) through two pseudo-continuous effects, and a success effect (victory effect) is performed. It is a variation (pseudo 3SPSP jackpot variation). There are four types of "pseudo 3SPSP jackpot variation" with different pseudo-running patterns. Pseudo 3SPSP jackpot variation 1 (THP001) is the first pseudo-continuation of "successful pseudo-coupling failure performance (Fig. 35 (A) to (D))" or "continuation mode SP reach (Fig. 36 (A) ( D) (E) (F))” is performed, and as the second pseudo-run, “successful pseudo-coupling failure effect” or “continuation mode SP reach” is performed. In addition, in the pseudo 3 SP SP jackpot variation 2 (THP002), "successful pseudo-continuity effect" or "continuation mode SP reach" is performed as the first pseudo-continuation, and "successful pseudo-continuation" is performed as the second pseudo-continuation. It is a variation in which the fanning (FIGS. 32 (B) (E))” or “symbol sliding (FIGS. 33 (D) to (G))” is performed. In addition, the pseudo 3 SPSP jackpot variation 3 (THP003) is performed as the first pseudo-run, "successful pseudo-running" or "symbol sliding", and as the second pseudo-run, "successful pseudo-combination failure effect" or " It is a variation in which "SP Reach of the continuation aspect" is performed. In addition, the pseudo 3SPSP jackpot variation 4 (THP004) is performed as the first pseudo-run "successful pseudo-running" or "symbol sliding", and as the second pseudo-run, "successful pseudo-running" or " It is a variation in which "symbol sliding" is performed. Each distribution rate of pseudo 3SPSP jackpot variations 1 to 4 is 8%, and the total is 32%.

Note that the variation in which the “quasi-continuous” is performed is called “quasi-continuous variation”. A variation in which a pseudo-run is executed once is called a "pseudo-double variation", and a variation in which a pseudo-run is executed twice is called a "pseudo-three variation". That is, a pseudo-run is counted as "pseudo-2" when it is executed once, and is counted as "pseudo-3" when it is executed twice. The “pseudo-continuation fanning” and the “pseudo-continuation/non-continuation effect” function as effects that make people expect that the pseudo-continuation will be executed. In addition, the pseudo run of success, the symbol slide, the pseudo run of success, the failure of pseudo run, and the SP reach of the continuation mode function as effects suggesting that the run of the run is performed. In addition, the failure pseudo-continuation and the failure pseudo-continuation/failure effect function as an effect suggesting that the pseudo-continuation will not be executed, or as an effect indicating a failure.

Further, as shown in FIG. 37, the special figure variation patterns "THP005" to "THP008" develop into SP reach (battle reach) through two pseudo continuous effects, and a success effect (victory effect) is performed. (Pseudo 3SP jackpot variation). There are four types of "pseudo 3SP jackpot variation" with different pseudo-running patterns. Pseudo 3SP jackpot fluctuation 1 (THP005) is the first pseudo-continuation "successful pseudo-coupling failure effect (Fig. 35 (A) ~ (D))" or "continuation mode SP reach (Fig. 36 (A) ( D) (E) (F))” is performed, and as the second pseudo-run, “successful pseudo-coupling failure effect” or “continuation mode SP reach” is performed. In addition, in the pseudo 3 SP jackpot variation 2 (THP006), "successful pseudo-continuation failure effect" or "continuation mode SP reach" is performed as the first pseudo-continuation, and "successful pseudo-continuation" is performed as the second pseudo-continuation. It is a variation in which the fanning (FIGS. 32 (B) (E))” or “symbol sliding (FIGS. 33 (D) to (G))” is performed. In addition, the pseudo 3 SP big hit variation 3 (THP007) is performed as the first pseudo-ream, "successful pseudo-reaming" or "symbol sliding", and as the second pseudo-ream, "successful pseudo-representation" or " It is a variation in which "SP Reach of the continuation aspect" is performed. In addition, the pseudo 3SP jackpot variation 4 (THP008) is performed as the first pseudo-run, "successful pseudo-running" or "symbol sliding", and as the second pseudo-run, "successful pseudo-running" or " It is a variation in which "symbol sliding" is performed. Each distribution rate of the pseudo 3SP jackpot variations 1 to 4 is 3%, and the total is 12%.

Further, as shown in FIG. 37, the special figure variation patterns "THP009" to "THP010" develop into SPSP reach (final battle reach) through one pseudo-continuous effect, and a success effect (victory effect) is performed. Variation (pseudo 2SPSP jackpot variation). There are two types of "pseudo 2SPSP jackpot variation" with different pseudo-running patterns. Pseudo 2SPSP jackpot variation 1 (THP009) is a pseudo-continuation of "successful pseudo-coupling failure performance (FIGS. 35 (A) to (D))" or "continuation mode SP reach (FIGS. 36 (A) (D) ( E)(F))” is the variation that is performed. In addition, the pseudo 2SPSP jackpot variation 2 (THP010) is performed as a pseudo-successful pseudo-successful streak (FIGS. 32 (B) (E)) or “symbol sliding (FIGS. 33 (D) to (G))”. It is a change that occurs. Each distribution rate of pseudo 2SPSP jackpot variations 1 and 2 is 10%, and the total is 20%.

Further, as shown in FIG. 37, the special figure variation patterns "THP011" to "THP012" develop into SP reach (battle reach) through one pseudo-continuous effect, and a success effect (victory effect) is performed. (Pseudo 2SP jackpot variation). There are two types of "pseudo 2SP jackpot variation" with different pseudo-running patterns. Pseudo 2SP jackpot fluctuation 1 (THP011) is a pseudo-continuation of "successful pseudo-coupling failure performance (Figs. 35 (A) to (D))" or "SP reach of continuation mode (Figs. 36 (A) (D) ( E)(F))” is the variation that is performed. In addition, the pseudo 2SP jackpot fluctuation 2 (THP012) is performed as a pseudo-successful pseudo-successful streak (Fig. 32 (B) (E)) or “symbol sliding (Figs. 33 (D) to (G))”. It is a change that occurs. Each distribution rate of the pseudo 2SP jackpot fluctuations 1 and 2 is 5%, and the total is 10%.

Also, as shown in FIG. 37, the special figure variation patterns "THP013" to "THP014" are pseudo 2N jackpot variations in which N reach indicating jackpot winning is performed through one pseudo continuous effect. There are two types of "pseudo 2N jackpot variation" with different pseudo-running patterns. Pseudo 2N jackpot variation 1 (THP013) is a pseudo-continuation of "successful pseudo-coupling failure performance (FIGS. 35 (A) to (D))" or "continuation mode SP reach (FIGS. 36 (A) (D) ( E)(F))” is the variation that is performed. In addition, the pseudo 2N jackpot variation 2 (THP014) is performed as a pseudo-successful pseudo-successful streak (FIGS. 32 (B) (E)) or “symbol sliding (FIGS. 33 (D) to (G))”. It is a change that occurs. Each distribution rate of the pseudo 2N jackpot variations 1 and 2 is 3%, and the total is 6%.

Further, as shown in FIG. 37, the special figure variation pattern "THP015" develops into SPSP reach (final battle reach) without performing even one pseudo-continuous effect, and a success effect (victory effect) is performed. (SPSP jackpot variation). In addition, the special figure variation pattern "THP016" is a variation (SP big hit variation) in which a success presentation (winning presentation) is performed by developing into SP reach (battle reach) without performing even one pseudo-continuous presentation. Also, the special figure variation pattern "THP017" is N jackpot variation in which N reach indicating jackpot winning is performed without performing even one pseudo continuous effect. The distribution rate of the SP jackpot variation is 12%, the distribution rate of the SP jackpot variation is 7%, and the distribution rate of the N jackpot variation is 1%.

Further, as shown in FIG. 38, the special figure variation patterns "THP021" to "THP024" develop into SPSP reach (final battle reach) through two pseudo-continuous effects, and a failure effect (defeat effect) is performed. This is fluctuation (pseudo 3SPSP loss fluctuation). In the "pseudo 3SPSP losing variation", there are four types with different patterns of occurrence of pseudo-runs, similar to the "pseudo 3SPSP jackpot variation". Pseudo 3SPSP Loss Variation 1 (THP021) is the first pseudo-continuation of “successful pseudo-coupling failure performance (FIGS. 35 (A) to (D))” or “continuation mode SP reach (FIG. 36 (A) ( D) (E) (F))” is performed, and as the second pseudo-run, “successful pseudo-coupling failure effect” or “continuation mode SP reach” is performed. In addition, the pseudo 3 SPSP losing variation 2 (THP022) is performed as the first pseudo-continuation "successful pseudo-continuation failure effect" or "continuation mode SP reach", and as the second pseudo-continuation "successful pseudo-continuation It is a variation in which the fanning (FIGS. 32(B) and (E))” or the “symbol sliding (FIGS. 33(D) to (G))” is performed. In addition, the pseudo 3 SPSP losing variation 3 (THP023) is performed as the first pseudo run, "successful pseudo run" or "symbol sliding", and as the second pseudo run, "successful pseudo combination failure effect" or " Continuation mode SP Reach" is a variation that takes place. In addition, the pseudo 3 SPSP losing variation 4 (THP024) is performed as the first pseudo-run "successful pseudo-running" or "symbol sliding", and as the second pseudo-run, "successful pseudo-running" or " It is a variation in which "symbol sliding" is performed. Each distribution rate of the pseudo 3SPSP loss variations 1 to 4 is 1%, and the total is 4%.

In addition, the special figure fluctuation patterns "THP025" to "THP028" are fluctuations (pseudo 3 SP loss fluctuations) in which failure production (defeat production) develops into SP reach (battle reach) after two pseudo-continuous productions. be. In the "pseudo 3SP losing variation", there are four types with different patterns of occurrence of pseudo-runs, similar to the "pseudo 3SP big win variation". Pseudo 3 SP losing variation 1 (THP025) is the first pseudo-continuation "successful pseudo-coupling failure effect (Fig. 35 (A) ~ (D))" or "continuation mode SP reach (Fig. 36 (A) ( D) (E) (F))” is performed, and as the second pseudo-run, “successful pseudo-coupling failure effect” or “continuation mode SP reach” is performed. In addition, the pseudo 3 SP loss variation 2 (THP026) is performed as the first pseudo continuation "successful pseudo combination failure effect" or "continuation mode SP reach", and as the second pseudo continuation "successful pseudo continuation It is a variation in which the fanning (FIGS. 32 (B) (E))” or “symbol sliding (FIGS. 33 (D) to (G))” is performed. In addition, the pseudo 3 SP loss variation 3 (THP027) is performed as the first pseudo-run, "successful pseudo-running" or "symbol sliding", and as the second pseudo-run, "successful pseudo-combination failure effect" or " It is a variation in which "SP Reach of the continuation aspect" is performed. In addition, the pseudo 3 SP loss variation 4 (THP028) is performed as the first pseudo-run, "successful pseudo-running" or "symbol sliding", and as the second pseudo-run, "successful pseudo-running" or " It is a variation in which "symbol sliding" is performed. Each distribution rate of the pseudo 3SP loss fluctuations 1 to 4 is 2%, and the total is 8%.

In addition, the special figure fluctuation patterns "THP029" to "THP030" develop into SPSP reach (final battle reach) after one pseudo-continuous production, and a failure production (defeat production) is performed (pseudo 2 SPSP loss fluctuation) is. There are two types of “pseudo 2SPSP losing variation” with different patterns of occurrence of pseudo-runs. Pseudo 2SPSP loss variation 1 (THP029) is a pseudo-continuation of “successful pseudo-coupling failure performance (FIGS. 35 (A) to (D))” or “continuation mode SP reach (FIGS. 36 (A) (D) ( E)(F))” is the variation that is performed. In addition, the pseudo 2 SPSP loss variation 2 (THP030) is a pseudo run of “successful pseudo run (Fig. 32 (B) (E))” or “symbol slip (Fig. 33 (D) ~ (G))”. It is a change that occurs. Each distribution rate of the pseudo 2SPSP loss variations 1 and 2 is 3%, and the total is 6%.

In addition, the special figure fluctuation patterns "THP031" to "THP032" are fluctuations (pseudo 2 SP loss fluctuations) in which failure production (defeat production) develops into SP reach (battle reach) after one pseudo-continuous production. be. There are two types of “pseudo 2SP losing variation” with different patterns of occurrence of pseudo-runs. Pseudo 2 SP loss variation 1 (THP031) is a pseudo continuation of “successful quasi-coupling failure performance (FIGS. 35 (A) to (D))” or “continuation mode SP reach (FIGS. 36 (A) (D) ( E)(F))” is the variation that is performed. In addition, the pseudo 2 SP loss variation 2 (THP032) is a pseudo run of “successful pseudo run (Fig. 32 (B) (E))” or “symbol slip (Fig. 33 (D) ~ (G))”. It is a change that occurs. Each of the pseudo 2SP loss variations 1 and 2 has a distribution rate of 5%, and the total is 10%.

In addition, the special figure fluctuation patterns "THP033" to "THP034" are pseudo 2N loss fluctuations in which N reach indicating loss is performed through one pseudo continuous effect. There are two types of “pseudo 2N loss variation” with different patterns of occurrence of pseudo-runs. Pseudo 2N loss variation 1 (THP033) is a pseudo-continuation of “successful pseudo-coupling failure performance (FIGS. 35 (A) to (D))” or “continuation mode SP reach (FIGS. 36 (A) (D) ( E)(F))” is the variation that is performed. In addition, the pseudo 2N loss variation 2 (THP034) is a pseudo-run "successful pseudo-running (Fig. 32 (B) (E))" or "symbol slip (Fig. 33 (D) ~ (G))" is performed. It is a change that occurs. Each distribution rate of the pseudo 2N loss fluctuations 1 and 2 is 10%, and the total is 20%.

In addition, the special figure variation pattern "THP035" is a variation (SPSP loss variation) in which a failure performance (defeat performance) develops into SPSP reach (final battle reach) without performing a pseudo-continuous performance even once. . Further, the special figure variation pattern "THP036" is a variation (SP loss variation) in which a failure performance (defeat performance) is performed without performing a pseudo-continuous performance even once, developing into SP reach (battle reach). Also, the special figure variation pattern "THP037" is N loss variation in which N reach indicating loss is performed without performing even one pseudo continuous effect. The distribution rate of the SP loss variation is 8%, the distribution rate of the SP loss variation is 12%, and the distribution rate of the N loss variation is 32%.

Here, as shown in FIG. 40, the pseudo 3SPSP variation 1 (pseudo 3SPSP jackpot variation 1 (THP001), pseudo 3SPSP loss variation 1 (THP021)) is a variation with a special figure variation time of 90 seconds, and the production pattern EZ1, The performance time of the section from the start of the variable display of EZ2 and EZ3 to the first re-variable display (referred to as the first variable section, or the section to the end of the variation if the re-variable display is not performed) is set to 25 seconds, The section from the first re-fluctuation display to the second re-fluctuation display (referred to as the second fluctuation section, or the section to the end of the fluctuation if no re-fluctuation display is performed) is set to 25 seconds, and the second re-fluctuation display is performed. The production time of the section from the re-variation display to the end of the fluctuation production (referred to as the third fluctuation section) is set to 40 seconds. In addition, the pseudo 3SPSP variation 2 (pseudo 3SPSP jackpot variation 2 (THP002), pseudo 3SPSP loss variation 2 (THP022)) is a variation with a special figure variation time of 80 seconds, and the production time of the first variation section is 25 seconds. The presentation time of the second variation interval is set to 15 seconds, and the presentation time of the third variation interval is set to 40 seconds. In addition, the pseudo 3SPSP variation 3 (pseudo 3SPSP jackpot variation 3 (THP003), pseudo 3SPSP loss variation 3 (THP023)) is a variation with a special figure variation time of 80 seconds, and the production time of the first variation section is 15 seconds. , the presentation time of the second variation interval is set to 25 seconds, and the presentation time of the third variation interval is set to 40 seconds. In addition, the pseudo 3SPSP fluctuation 4 (pseudo 3SPSP jackpot fluctuation 4 (THP004), pseudo 3SPSP loss fluctuation 4 (THP024)) is a fluctuation with a special figure fluctuation time of 70 seconds, and the production time of the first fluctuation section is 15 seconds. The presentation time of the second variation interval is set to 15 seconds, and the presentation time of the third variation interval is set to 40 seconds.

Then, the pachinko game machine PY1 of this embodiment utilizes the fluctuation time of 25 seconds, and from the fluctuation display or re-variation display of the production patterns EZ1, EZ2, EZ3, "successful pseudo-combination failure production" or "continuation mode SP It is possible to execute an effect until the effect patterns EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are re-variably displayed through "reach". In addition, using the fluctuation time of 15 seconds, the production patterns EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are changed from the fluctuation display or the re-variation display to the "successful pseudo consecutive fanning" or "design slide", and the production patterns EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are re-started. It is possible to execute the effect until the variable display is performed. In addition, the pachinko game machine PY1 of the present embodiment can execute an effect from the variable display or re-variable display of the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 to the end of the SPSP reach using the 40-second variable time. This is the same even when selecting other special figure variation patterns. It should be noted that the pseudo-run pattern that performs "successful pseudo-continuous failure effect" and "continuation mode SP reach" has a higher pseudo-run pattern than the pseudo-run pattern that performs "successful pseudo-continuous fanning" and "symbol sliding" It can be said that it is a pattern in which the timing of stopping and displaying the continuous symbols GZ is late (a pattern from the variable display (including re-variable display) of the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 to the stop display of the pseudo continuous symbols GZ is long).

Also, as shown in FIG. 40, pseudo 3SP variation 1 (pseudo 3SP jackpot variation 1 (THP005), pseudo 3SP loss variation 1 (THP025)) is a variation with a special figure variation time of 75 seconds, the first variation section The presentation time is set to 25 seconds, the presentation time of the second variation section is set to 25 seconds, and the presentation time of the third variation section is set to 25 seconds. In addition, the pseudo 3SP variation 2 (pseudo 3SP jackpot variation 2 (THP006), pseudo 3SP loss variation 2 (THP026)) is a variation with a special figure variation time of 65 seconds, and the production time of the first variation section is 25 seconds. The effect time of the second variation interval is set to 15 seconds, and the effect time of the third variation interval is set to 25 seconds. In addition, the pseudo 3SP variation 3 (pseudo 3SP jackpot variation 3 (THP007), pseudo 3SP loss variation 3 (THP027)) is a variation with a special figure variation time of 65 seconds, and the production time of the first variation section is 15 seconds. , the presentation time of the second variation interval is set to 25 seconds, and the presentation time of the third variation interval is set to 25 seconds. In addition, the pseudo 3SP variation 4 (pseudo 3SP jackpot variation 4 (THP008), pseudo 3SP loss variation 4 (THP028)) is a variation with a special figure variation time of 55 seconds, and the production time of the first variation section is 15 seconds. The effect time of the second variation interval is set to 15 seconds, and the effect time of the third variation interval is set to 25 seconds.

The pachinko game machine PY1 of the present embodiment can execute the effect from the variable display or re-variable display of the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 to the end of the SP reach using the variable time of 25 seconds. This is the same even when selecting other special figure variation patterns.

Also, as shown in FIG. 40, the pseudo 2SPSP fluctuation 1 (pseudo 2SPSP jackpot fluctuation 1 (THP009), pseudo 2SPSP loss fluctuation 1 (THP029)) is a fluctuation with a special figure fluctuation time of 65 seconds, and the first fluctuation section The rendering time is set to 25 seconds, and the rendering time of the second variation section is set to 40 seconds. In addition, the pseudo 2SPSP variation 2 (pseudo 2SPSP jackpot variation 2 (THP010), pseudo 2SPSP loss variation 2 (THP030)) is a variation with a special figure variation time of 55 seconds, and the production time of the first variation section is 15 seconds. , and the rendering time of the second variation section is set to 40 seconds.

In addition, the pseudo 2SP variation 1 (pseudo 2SP jackpot variation 1 (THP011), pseudo 2SP loss variation 1 (THP031)) is a variation with a special figure variation time of 50 seconds, and the production time of the first variation section is 25 seconds. , and the presentation time of the second variation section is set to 25 seconds. In addition, the pseudo 2SP variation 2 (pseudo 2SP jackpot variation 2 (THP012), pseudo 2SP loss variation 2 (THP032)) is a variation with a special figure variation time of 40 seconds, and the production time of the first variation section is 15 seconds. , and the presentation time of the second variation section is set to 25 seconds.

In addition, the pseudo 2N variation 1 (pseudo 2N jackpot variation 1 (THP013), pseudo 2N loss variation 1 (THP033)) is a variation with a special figure variation time of 40 seconds, and the production time of the first variation section is 25 seconds. , and the performance time of the second variation section is set to 15 seconds. In addition, pseudo 2N variation 2 (pseudo 2N jackpot variation 2 (THP014), pseudo 2N loss variation 2 (THP034)) is a variation with a special figure variation time of 30 seconds, and the production time of the first variation section is 15 seconds. , and the performance time of the second variation section is set to 15 seconds.

The pachinko game machine PY1 of this embodiment can execute the effect from the variable display or re-variable display of the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 to the end of the N-reach, using the 15-second variation time. This is the same even when selecting other special figure variation patterns.

Also, as shown in FIG. 40, SPSP fluctuation (SPSP jackpot fluctuation (THP015), SPSP losing fluctuation (THP035)) is a fluctuation with a special figure fluctuation time of 40 seconds, and the production time of the first fluctuation section is 40 seconds. It is In addition, SP fluctuation (SP big hit fluctuation (THP016), SP losing fluctuation (THP036)) is a fluctuation with a special figure fluctuation time of 25 seconds, and the production time of the first fluctuation section is 25 seconds. In addition, N fluctuation (N jackpot fluctuation (THP017), N loss fluctuation (THP037)) is a fluctuation with a special figure fluctuation time of 15 seconds, and the production time of the first fluctuation section is 15 seconds.

Thus, in this embodiment, when the jackpot is won (see FIG. 37), the pseudo 3SPSP jackpot variation is selected at a rate of 32%, the pseudo 3SP jackpot variation is selected at a rate of 12%, and the pseudo 2SPSP jackpot variation is selected. is selected at a rate of 20%, pseudo 2SP jackpot fluctuation is selected at a rate of 10%, pseudo 2N jackpot fluctuation is selected at a rate of 6%, SPSP jackpot fluctuation is selected at a rate of 12%, SP jackpot fluctuation is selected at a rate of 7% and the N jackpot variation at a rate of 1%. That is, if you win the jackpot, the fluctuation that eventually develops to SPSP reach is more likely to be selected than the fluctuation that develops only to SP reach or the fluctuation that ends in N reach, and the fluctuation that develops only to SP reach is N More likely to be selected than variation ending in reach. Also, if a jackpot is won, if the type of the final ready-to-win effect in the variable effect is the same, the pseudo 3 variation is higher than the pseudo 2 variation and the pseudo-continuous non-variation (fluctuation in which the pseudo-continuous is not executed even once). are more likely to be selected, and the pseudo two-variation is more likely to be selected than the pseudo non-repeated variation. On the other hand, if it is a category of loss with reach (see FIG. 38), select pseudo 3SPSP loss fluctuation at a rate of 4%, select pseudo 3SP loss fluctuation at a rate of 8%, and pseudo 2SPSP loss fluctuation Select at a rate of 6%, select pseudo 2SP loss fluctuation at a rate of 10%, select pseudo 2N loss fluctuation at a rate of 20%, select SPSP loss fluctuation at a rate of 8%, SP loss fluctuation It is selected at a rate of 12%, and the N loss variation is selected at a rate of 32%. In other words, in the case of a loss, fluctuations that eventually develop to SPSP reach are less likely to be selected than fluctuations that develop only to SP reach and fluctuations that end in N reach, and fluctuations that develop only to SP reach are fluctuations that end in N reach. less likely to be selected. Also, in the case of a loss, if the type of the final ready-to-win effect in the variable effect is the same, the pseudo 3 variation is less likely to be selected than the pseudo 2 variation and the pseudo-continuous no-variation (variation in which the pseudo-continuous is not executed even once). , the pseudo two-variation is less likely to be selected than the pseudo non-run variation. Therefore, in this form, it can be said that the SP reach is an effect with a higher degree of expectation for a big hit than the SP reach and the N reach, and it can be said that the SP reach is an effect with a higher degree of expectation for a big hit than the N reach. In addition, if the type of the final ready-to-win effect in the variable effect is the same, the pseudo 3 variation is a variation with a higher expectation for the big win than the pseudo 2 variation and the pseudo continuous non-continuous variation (fluctuation in which the pseudo continuous is not executed even once). In other words, it can be said that the pseudo 2 fluctuation is a fluctuation with a higher expectation for a big hit than the pseudo non-continuous fluctuation. That is, in the present embodiment, it can be said that the greater the number of executions of the pseudo-continuous effect, the higher the degree of expectation for a big hit (the degree of expectation of being controlled in an advantageous state).

Also, as shown in FIG. 39, the special figure variation pattern "THP040" is a variation that develops into a pseudo-combination or failure effect through N reach in the variation display of the production patterns EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3, but ends in failure (pseudo-gase variation 1 ). Also, the special figure variation pattern "THP041" is a variation (pseudo fake variation 2) in which a pseudo-continuous fanning is performed without reaching reach in the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3, but ends in failure. In addition, the special figure variation pattern "THP042" is a variation (normal A loss variation) in which the variation performance is completed in 10 seconds without the production patterns EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 becoming ready and the pseudo-continuous fanning is not performed. In addition, the special figure variation pattern "THP043" is a variation (normal B loss variation) in which the variation performance is completed in 5 seconds without the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 becoming ready and the pseudo-continuous fanning is not performed. If the number of special figures 1 pending is 0 to 2 (in other words, if the number of special figures 1 pending is relatively small), pseudo gaseous fluctuation 1 (THP040) is selected at a rate of 25%, pseudo gasse fluctuation 2 (THP041) is selected at a rate of 15%, normal A loss variation (THP042) is selected at a rate of 55%, and normal B loss variation (THP043) is selected at a rate of 5%. On the other hand, if the special figure 1 pending number is 3 to 4 (in other words, if the special figure 1 pending number is relatively large), the pseudo gasse fluctuation 1 (THP040) is selected at a rate of 1%, pseudo gasse Variation 2 (THP041) is selected at a rate of 4%, normal A loss variation (THP042) is selected at a rate of 20%, and normal B loss variation (THP043) is selected at a rate of 75%. It should be noted that pseudo false change 1 is a variation in which N reach is performed, but since it is a variation that ends with a failure pseudo combination failure effect, it belongs to the category of no reach and loss in this embodiment for convenience.

Here, as shown in FIG. 40, the pseudo fake variation 1 (THP040) is a variation with a special figure variation time of 25 seconds, and the production time of the first variation section is 25 seconds. In addition, the pseudo Gusse variation 2 (THP041) is a variation with a special figure variation time of 15 seconds, and the production time of the first variation section is 15 seconds. In addition, the normal A loss variation (THP042) is a variation with a special figure variation time of 10 seconds, and the production time of the first variation section is 10 seconds. In addition, the normal B loss variation (THP043) is a variation with a special figure variation time of 5 seconds, and the production time of the first variation section is 5 seconds. In addition, the pachinko game machine PY1 of the present embodiment utilizes the variation time of 10 seconds or the variation time of 5 seconds to prevent the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 from becoming reachable and without performing pseudo-fighting. It is possible to execute a production that is stopped and displayed. Note that the normal B loss variation is also referred to as a shortened variation because it takes half the time of the normal A loss variation.

In this way, in this form, if the special figure 1 reservation number is 0 to 2 (in other words, if the special figure 1 reservation number is relatively small), if the special figure 1 reservation number is 3 to 4 (in other words If the special figure 1 pending number is relatively large), the special figure variation pattern (THP040, 041, 042) with a longer variation time is more likely to be selected, and the special figure variation pattern with a shorter variation time (THP043) is less likely to be selected. . Also, when the number of special figures 1 pending is 0 to 2, the fluctuation time of 10 seconds Dohazure fluctuation (THP042) is the most easily selected reference fluctuation pattern, but the fluctuation time is 15 seconds pseudo The distortion variation 2 (THP041) and the pseudo distortion variation 1 (THP040) with a variation time of 25 seconds are also selected to some extent. This is to allow the player to accumulate the special figure 1 suspension during the variation period of the 15 seconds of the pseudo guise variation 2 and the 25 seconds of the pseudo guise variation 1. In other words, it is to prevent as much as possible the situation where the special figure 1 reservation becomes 0 and no fluctuation effect occurs during the game. And especially in this form, when the number of special figures 1 pending is 0 to 2, the pseudo-gase fluctuation 1 (THP040) with a fluctuation time of 25 seconds is better, the pseudo-gase fluctuation 2 (THP041) with a fluctuation time of 15 seconds ) are more likely to be selected. Therefore, in this embodiment, it is possible to allow the player to accumulate the special figure 1 reserve by using a long fluctuation time until the pseudo combination failure effect is completed.

In the present embodiment, reach means a state in which only one of the plurality of performance symbols is displayed in a variable manner. It is a state (for example, "7↓7" state) of a combination of performance symbols indicating that the game state will be advantageous to the player (for example, the game state will be a jackpot game state).

In addition, the success presentation (victory presentation in which a ally character wins over an enemy character) in SPSP reach (final battle reach) or SP reach (battle reach) functions as a presentation to suggest to the player that he or she has won a jackpot. . In addition, failure effects (defeat effects in which a friend character is defeated by an enemy character) in SPSP reach (final battle reach) and SP reach (battle reach) function as effects suggesting that the player has not won the jackpot. .

In addition, the production control microcomputer 121 provides each production that constitutes the special figure fluctuation production (normal fluctuation, N reach, SP reach, SPSP reach, pseudo continuous fanning, pattern slip, pseudo combination failure production, continuous mode SP reach, etc. ), the effect image is displayed on the display unit 50a, and in accordance with the display of the effect image, a light emission effect using various lamps SL, a sound effect using the speaker 52, and the movable devices 55, 56, 58 are used. It is possible to execute a movable body effect, an operation effect using an input device (normal button 40, special button 41), and the like.

Next, lottery for pseudo-run patterns will be described. In the pachinko game machine PY1 of the present embodiment, when pseudo 3 variation or pseudo 2 variation is selected in the selection of the above-described special figure variation pattern, the first or second pseudo continuous effect is performed with any pseudo continuous pattern. is determined based on the table shown in FIG. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 41, the special figure variation pattern indicated by the special figure 1 variation start command received from the game control microcomputer 101 is "pseudo 3SPSP jackpot variation 1 (THP001)", "pseudo 3SPSP loss variation 1 (THP021)”, “Pseudo 3SP big hit variation 1 (THP005)”, or “Pseudo 3SP losing variation 1 (THP025)”, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines, as the first pseudo-continuation, whether or not the pseudo-continuation The effect is selected at a rate of 70%, the SP reach of the continuation mode is selected at a rate of 30%, and as the second pseudo-continuation, the pseudo-combination failure effect is selected at a rate of 30%, and the SP of the continuation mode is selected. Select reach at a rate of 70%.

In addition, the effect control microcomputer 121, the special figure fluctuation pattern indicated by the special figure 1 fluctuation start command received from the game control microcomputer 101 is "pseudo 3SPSP big hit fluctuation 2 (THP002)", "pseudo 3SPSP loss fluctuation 2 (THP022)". , “Pseudo 3SP big hit fluctuation 2 (THP006)”, “Pseudo 3SP loss fluctuation 2 (THP026)”, as the first pseudo-continuation, the pseudo-combination failure effect is selected at a rate of 70% and continued 30% of the SP reach is selected in the mode of (1), and as the second pseudo-run, pseudo-running is selected at a rate of 30%, and symbol sliding is selected at a rate of 70%.

In addition, the effect control microcomputer 121, the special figure fluctuation pattern indicated by the special figure 1 fluctuation start command received from the game control microcomputer 101 is "pseudo 3SPSP big hit fluctuation 3 (THP003)", "pseudo 3SPSP loss fluctuation 3 (THP023)". , "Pseudo 3 SP jackpot fluctuation 3 (THP007)", "Pseudo 3 SP loss fluctuation 3 (THP027)", as the first pseudo run, select the pseudo run at a rate of 70% and slide the symbol. is selected at a rate of 30%, and as the second pseudo-continuation, a pseudo-coupling failure effect is selected at a rate of 30%, and SP reach in the continuation mode is selected at a rate of 70%.

In addition, the effect control microcomputer 121, the special figure fluctuation pattern indicated by the special figure 1 fluctuation start command received from the game control microcomputer 101 is "pseudo 3SPSP big hit fluctuation 4 (THP004)", "pseudo 3SPSP loss fluctuation 4 (THP024)". , “Pseudo 3SP big hit fluctuation 4 (THP008)”, “Pseudo 3SP loss fluctuation 4 (THP028)”, as the first pseudo-run, select the pseudo-run swing at a rate of 70%, and the symbol slide is selected at a rate of 30%, and as the second pseudo-run, pseudo-running is selected at a rate of 30%, and symbol sliding is selected at a rate of 70%.

In addition, the effect control microcomputer 121, the special figure variation pattern indicated by the special figure 1 variation start command received from the game control microcomputer 101 is "pseudo 2SPSP jackpot variation 1 (THP009)", "pseudo 2SPSP loss variation 1 (THP029)". , "Pseudo 2SP jackpot fluctuation 1 (THP011)", "Pseudo 2SP loss fluctuation 1 (THP031)", "Pseudo 2N jackpot fluctuation 1 (THP013)", "Pseudo 2N loss fluctuation 1 (THP033)" , as the pseudo-continuation, the pseudo-coupling non-effect is selected at a rate of 70%, and the SP reach of the continuation mode is selected at a rate of 30%.

In addition, the effect control microcomputer 121 has a special figure variation pattern indicated by the special figure 1 variation start command received from the game control microcomputer 101 "Pseudo 2SPSP big hit variation 2 (THP010)", "Pseudo 2SPSP loss variation 2 (THP030)". , "Pseudo 2SP jackpot fluctuation 2 (THP012)", "Pseudo 2SP loss fluctuation 2 (THP032)", "Pseudo 2N jackpot fluctuation 2 (THP014)", "Pseudo 2N loss fluctuation 2 (THP034)" , As pseudo-runs, pseudo-running is selected at a rate of 70%, and symbol sliding is selected at a rate of 30%.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when either the pseudo combination failure effect or the continuation form of the SP reach is performed as the first pseudo run, the pseudo combination failure effect is executed more than the continuation form of the SP reach. is becoming easier. As a result, the opportunity for the player to see the simulated combination/non-continuation effect (dedicated development effect for indicating whether or not the simulated combination is to be performed) increases, so that the interest in the game can be expected to improve. In addition, since there are more opportunities to see the pseudo-combination-failure effect while expecting a successful result without knowing whether it will succeed or not, the fun of the pseudo-combination-failure effect can be easily exhibited. Further, in the present embodiment, when either the pseudo combination failure effect or the continuation mode SP reach is performed as the second pseudo-continuation, the continuation mode SP reach is more likely to be performed than the pseudo combination failure effect. It's becoming This enhances the unexpectedness when the second pseudo-continuation is performed. In other words, it is conceivable that the player is playing the game thinking that if the SP reach is performed after one pseudo-run, there will be no more pseudo-runs. (See FIGS. 36A, 36D, 36E, and 36F), and an improvement in the amusement of the game can be expected.

Further, in this embodiment, when either the pseudo-running or the symbol sliding is performed as the first pseudo-run, the pseudo-running is easier to execute than the symbol sliding. As a result, a scene in which a sloppy or pseudo-continuity is aroused is frequently executed, and an improvement in the amusement of the game can be expected. Further, in this embodiment, when either the pseudo-running or the symbol sliding is performed as the second pseudo-run, the symbol sliding is more likely to be executed than the pseudo-running. This enhances the unexpectedness when the second pseudo-continuation is performed. In other words, when a ready-to-win is formed through one pseudo-run, it is thought that the player is playing the game thinking that there will be no more pseudo-runs. More pleasant surprises can be given (see FIGS. 33B, 33D, 33E, 33F, 33G), and an improvement in the amusement of the game can be expected.

8. Effect of the Embodiment As described above in detail, according to the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the present embodiment, even if the ready-to-win state is reached without the pseudo consecutive fanning, the pseudo consecutive symbol GZ is displayed ( (See FIGS. 34(A) and 34(D)), so there are more opportunities to expect the re-variation display of the production symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3. Increased interest in gaming is expected.

Further, according to the pachinko game machine PY1 of this embodiment, the time from the start of the variable display of the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 to the failure of the pseudo-continuous fanning (that is, 15 seconds, which is the variation time of the pseudo-gase variation 2), The time until failure of the pseudo-coupled failure effect (that is, 25 seconds, which is the variation time of pseudo fake variation 1) is longer (see FIGS. 39 and 40). Therefore, by properly performing the pseudo-combination/non-performance, it can be expected that the performance execution period during the game will be extended, and the game interest can be improved compared with the game machine which tends to have a short performance execution period.

In addition, according to the pachinko game machine PY1 of the present embodiment, when the number of special figure reservations is relatively small (in the embodiment, when the number of special figure reservations 1 is 0 to 2), the pseudo-combination failure effect is easily performed. (See FIG. 39). Therefore, it is possible to allow the player to accumulate a sufficient number of pending games by using the execution period of the pseudo-combination-not effect.

Especially according to the pachinko game machine PY1 of the present embodiment, when the number of special figure reservations is relatively small (in the embodiment, the number of special figure 1 reservations is 0 to 2), the failure to be performed without reaching the reach state The failure pseudo-coupling/failure performance performed through the ready-to-win state is easier to execute than the pseudo-coupling failure effect (see FIG. 39). Therefore, it is possible to make the game machine easy for the player to sufficiently accumulate the special figure reservation by using the relatively long performance execution period of the pseudo-combination failure performance.

Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of this embodiment, the pattern in which the pseudo-continuous pattern GZ is stop-displayed is the reference pattern in which the pseudo-continuous pattern GZ is stop-displayed through the pseudo-continuous swing (FIGS. 32(B) and (E)). In addition, a first non-reference pattern with different execution timings (patterns in which pseudo-continuous symbols GZ are stopped and displayed after symbol sliding, see FIGS. 33(B), (D), (E), (F), and (G)) and There is a second non-reference pattern (a pattern in which a pseudo-continuous pattern GZ is stopped and displayed after the SP reach of the continuation mode, see FIGS. 36 (A) (D) (E) (F)). Even when the reference pattern is performed, the display of suggestive images (mini-character image G40, mini-character image G50) expressing the same target (specifically, mini-character A) can suggest that pseudo-continuation will be performed (see FIG. 33 ( D), see FIG. 36(D)). Therefore, regardless of which non-reference pattern the pseudo-continuous pattern GZ is stopped and displayed, it is possible to easily convey to the player that the pseudo-continuous pattern is to be performed by displaying the suggestive images (mini-character image G40, mini-character image G50). is. Note that when the reference pattern in which the pseudo-continuous pattern GZ is stopped and displayed through the pseudo-continuous fanning is executed, the suggestive image representing the mini-character A is not displayed.

Further, according to the pachinko game machine PY1 of this embodiment, even after the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are in the ready-to-win state, the pseudo-continuous symbol GZ may be displayed by changing to the non-reach state due to the symbol sliding. In this case, the mini-character image G40 (first suggestive image) can suggest the execution of the pseudo-series (see FIGS. 33(B), (D), (E), (F), and (G)). Therefore, it is possible to clearly inform a player who thinks that the pseudo-run will not be performed because of the reach state, that the pseudo-run will be performed.

In particular, according to the pachinko game machine PY1 of this embodiment, the mini character image G40 (first suggestive image) starts to be displayed before the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are in the reach state and the symbol slide starts ( See FIGS. 33(B) and 33(D)). Therefore, the display of the mini-character image G40 provides an unexpected suggestion of a pseudo-run to the player who thinks that the pseudo-run will not occur. Therefore, the player can be pleasantly surprised, and an improvement in the amusement of the game can be expected.

Further, according to the pachinko game machine PY1 of the present embodiment, even when the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 become ready-to-win states and develop into SP ready-to-win (battle ready-to-win), character images G49, etc. of "continue" are displayed in SP ready-to-win. In this case, the mini-character image G50 (second suggestive image) may suggest execution of the pseudo-run (FIGS. 36(A), (D), (E) ( F)). Therefore, it is possible to easily convey to a player who thinks that the pseudo-run will not be performed because it has developed into SP reach, that the pseudo-run will be performed.

In particular, according to the pachinko game machine PY1 of this embodiment, when it develops into SP reach, whether the SP reach further develops into SPSP reach (see FIGS. 36A to 36C), or whether a pseudo-run is performed (See FIGS. 36(A), 36(D), 36(E) and 36(F)), the mini-character image G50 (second suggested image) starts to be displayed (see FIGS. 36(A) and 36(D)). Therefore, the display of the mini-character image G50 provides an unexpected suggestion of a pseudo-run to the player who thinks that the pseudo-run will not occur. Therefore, the player can be pleasantly surprised, and an improvement in the amusement of the game can be expected.

9. Modified Example of First Embodiment Hereinafter, a modified example of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the first embodiment will be described. Of course, the configurations according to the modified examples may be combined as appropriate. Moreover, technical features in the above embodiments and modifications below can be deleted as appropriate unless they are described as essential in this specification.

In the above form, depending on whether the number of special figures pending is 3 or more, the table used for determining the special figure variation pattern is configured to be different (see FIG. 39), but it is different depending on whether it is 4 or more Or, the threshold value of the number of special figures pending, which makes it easier to select pseudo-guise fluctuation 1 or pseudo-guise fluctuation 2, such as changing depending on whether it is 2 or more, can be changed as appropriate. That is, in the above-described form, if the special figure reservation number is less than a predetermined threshold, in order to accumulate the special figure reservation, a special figure variation pattern with a relatively long variation time such as pseudo gase variation 1 and pseudo gase variation 2 is selected. However, if it is configured in this way, the threshold value of the number of special figures pending, which makes it easier to select pseudo-guise fluctuation, can be changed as appropriate.

In the above embodiment, the mini-character image G40 (first suggestive image) displayed before the execution of the symbol slide, and the mini-character image G50 (the The second suggestive image) is the same image (see FIGS. 33D and 36D). It may be a different image. Note that the targets represented by the first suggestive image and the second suggestive image can be changed as appropriate. Further, the timing for starting the display of the mini-character image G40 (first suggestive image) may be at the same time as the start of the symbol slide or during the execution of the symbol slide. Also, the timing for starting the display of the mini-character image G50 (second suggestive image) is the same as when the character image G49 of "Continue" or the like starts to be displayed in SP reach, or when the character image G49 or the like of "Continue" starts to be displayed. It may be during display.

Also, in the above form, when the number of special figures 1 reserved is relatively small (when the number of special figures 1 reserved is 0 to 2), the pseudo-coupling failure effect fails rather than the pseudo-gase variation 2 in which the fanning effect fails Although the pseudo skew fluctuation 1 is easier to execute, the pseudo skew fluctuation 2 may be easier to execute than the pseudo skew fluctuation 1. again. A configuration may be adopted in which pseudo false variation 2 and pseudo false variation 1 are executed with the same probability.

Also, in the above-described form, the pseudo-gase variation 2 in which the fanning effect fails is similar to the pseudo-gase variation 1 in which the pseudo-coupling failure effect fails. In the case of ), it was configured to be easier to execute than when there are more (when the number of special 1 reservations is 3 to 4), but the pseudo-gase fluctuation 2 in which the fanning production fails depends on the number of special 1 reservations. It may be configured such that it is always executed with a certain probability.

Further, in the above-described mode, the symbol slide is effected by vertically scrolling the right effect symbol EZ3 to change the stop-displayed number symbol to another number symbol. On the other hand, the symbol sliding may be an effect in which the effect symbol stopped and displayed as the right effect symbol EZ3 is scrolled to the left (moved to the left) to change to another effect symbol. In this case, as the right performance symbol EZ3, a performance symbol (specific symbol) suggesting the execution of a pseudo-run is stop-displayed, this is moved to the left, and is stop-displayed as a middle performance symbol EZ2, and the pseudo-running pattern is displayed. may be formed. As a matter of course, when the pseudo consecutive stitches are formed, the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are displayed again in a variable manner. The symbol slide that moves the specific symbols suggesting execution of such a pseudo-run to the left is called a specific symbol movement effect. The specific symbol movement effect may be performed during the fluctuation of the effect symbol (referred to as the middle effect symbol EZ2 and the last symbol in the embodiment) which is stopped and displayed last among the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3, or the last symbol. may be performed after the stop display of With such a configuration, it can be expected that the effect of moving (slipping) the effect pattern in a direction different from that expected surprises the player, and the enhancement of the game interest can be expected. Incidentally, the specific symbol moving effect may be executed instead of the symbol sliding in the first embodiment, or may be executed in addition to the symbol sliding in the first embodiment. When both the specific symbol movement effect and the symbol sliding in the first embodiment are configured to be executable, the execution probability of the specific symbol movement effect should be lower than the symbol sliding execution probability in the first embodiment. . This is because the execution of the specific symbol movement effect is rare, and the improvement of the game interest can be expected.

Further, in the above embodiment, the pseudo-run symbol GZ, which is different from the number symbols, is used as the effect symbol suggesting the execution of the pseudo-run, but the effect symbol suggesting the execution of the pseudo-run can be changed as appropriate. Specifically, for example, one of the 1st to 9th symbols (for example, 7 symbols) may be used as the performance symbol suggesting the execution of the pseudo-run. That is, when one number symbol set as a performance symbol suggesting the execution of a pseudo-run is stopped and displayed as a medium performance symbol EZ2, the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are displayed again with a change (pseudo-run). may be

In the above-described form, the pseudo-continuity/non-performance (specific development effect) is a two-choice effect of losing (whether a pseudo-continuation is not performed) or performing a pseudo-continuation (see FIG. 35), but SP reach and One result is selected from three or more options including another result, such as the effect result of developing into another effect such as SPSP reach, or the effect result of notifying the winning of a jackpot (stopping and displaying double numbers). It may be a production that

Further, in the above embodiment, the contents of various effects, the execution probability, the effect time, and the like can be appropriately changed within a range that does not hinder the functions of the various effects and does not interfere with the game. In addition, the upper limit memory number of special figure reservation can be appropriately changed within a range that does not interfere with the game.

Further, in the above embodiment, the pattern for stop-displaying the pseudo-continuous pattern GZ through the pseudo-continuous swing is defined as the "predetermined reference pattern", and the pattern for stop-displaying the pseudo-continuous pattern GZ through the symbol sliding is defined as the "first non-reference pattern". , and the pattern in which the pseudo-continuous pattern GZ is stopped and displayed after the SP reach of the continuation mode is referred to as the "second non-reference pattern", but the content of the predetermined reference pattern can be changed as appropriate, and the first non-reference pattern If the reference pattern is different from the predetermined reference pattern, the contents of the presentation can be appropriately changed, and if the second non-reference pattern is later than the first non-reference pattern, the timing at which the pseudo continuous pattern GZ is stopped and displayed is later. The content of the presentation can be changed as appropriate.

10. Inventions Shown in First Embodiment and Its Modifications The above-described first embodiment and its modifications show inventions of the following means. In the description of the means described below, the corresponding structural names and expressions in the above-described embodiments, etc., and the reference numerals used in the drawings are added in parentheses for reference. However, the constituent elements of each invention are not limited to this appendix. Note that means A is a general term for means A1 to A4 below. Means B is a general term for means B1 to B5 below.

Means A1:
After the production patterns (production patterns EZ1, EZ2, EZ3) are variably displayed, the variation is stop-displayed in a stop mode showing the result of determination (jackpot determination) as to whether an advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot game state) is set. It is possible to perform the production,
When the specific image (pseudo-continuous pattern GZ) is displayed in the variable effect, the temporarily stopped and displayed effect pattern is again displayed in a variable manner (see FIGS. 32(E) and (F)),
In the variable effect, when the effect pattern is not set to the ready state, and when the effect pattern is executed to stir up whether the specific image is displayed (pseudo continuous effect, see FIG. After setting the state, there is a time to develop a specific development effect (pseudo-coupling/non-coupling effect, see FIGS. 34A, 34D, and 35) indicating whether or not the specific image is displayed. game machine.

According to the gaming machine of this configuration, even if the ready-to-win state is reached without performing the fanning effect, the specific development effect indicating whether or not the specific image indicating that the re-variation display of the effect pattern is to be displayed is displayed. Since there is a possibility of development, there are more opportunities to expect the re-variation display of the production pattern, and improvement in the interest in the game can be expected.

Means A2:
The gaming machine according to means A1,
The variable display of the production pattern is longer than the time from the start of the variable display of the production pattern to the failure of the swaying production (pseudo swaying) (15 seconds, see the column of pseudo fake fluctuation 2 shown in FIG. 39) A gaming machine characterized in that a time (25 seconds, refer to column of pseudo-gase variation 1 shown in FIG. 39) from the start of the specified development effect (pseudo combination failure effect) to failure is longer.

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, since the time from the start of the variable display of the performance symbols to the failure of the fanning performance is longer than the time from the failure of the specific development performance, the specific development performance is appropriately performed, It can be expected that the period during which the performance is executed becomes longer, and the game amusement can be improved as compared with the game machine which tends to have a short performance execution time.

Means A3:
The gaming machine according to means A1 or means A2,
With a holding means (processing related to accumulating special figure holding by the game control microcomputer 101) that can hold the execution of the determination up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, "4"),
The production pattern in which the specific development production fails is more when the number of reservations by the reservation means is small (for example, when the number of special reservations is "0" to "2") (for example, when the number of special reservations is A game machine characterized in that it is easier to execute (see FIG. 39) than in the case of “3” to “4”).

According to the gaming machine of this configuration, when the number of pending games is small, the specific development performance is likely to be performed, so it is possible to allow the player to sufficiently accumulate pending performances by utilizing the execution period of this performance.

Means A4:
The gaming machine according to means A3,
When the number of reservations by the reservation means is small (for example, when the number of special reservations is "0" to "2"), the production pattern in which the specific development production fails rather than the production pattern in which the fanning production fails. (distribution rate of the former is 15%, distribution rate of the latter is 25%, see FIG. 39).

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, when the number of pending states is small, it is easier to execute the specific development effect performed through the ready-to-win state than the fanning effect performed without going through the ready-to-win state. , it is possible to make the game machine easy for the player to accumulate sufficient reserves by utilizing a relatively long performance execution period.

Means B1:
After the production patterns (production patterns EZ1, EZ2, EZ3) are variably displayed, the variation is stop-displayed in a stop mode showing the result of determination (jackpot determination) as to whether an advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot game state) is set. It is possible to perform the production,
When the specific image (pseudo-continuous pattern GZ) is displayed in the variable effect, the temporarily stopped and displayed effect pattern is again displayed in a variable manner (see FIGS. 32(E) and (F)),
The pattern for displaying the specific image in the variable effect includes a predetermined reference pattern (a pattern for displaying a pseudo-continuous pattern GZ through a pseudo-continuous swing without bringing the effect patterns EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 into a ready-to-win state, FIG. 32 (B) ) (E)), and a first non-reference pattern different from the reference pattern (effect patterns EZ1, EZ2, EZ3 are changed to a non-reach state after the reach state is simulated through a pattern slide. 33(B), (D), (E), (F), and (G)), and a second pattern in which the specific image is displayed later than the first non-reference pattern. Non-reference pattern (a pattern that displays a pseudo-continuous pattern GZ after displaying a character image G49 etc. of "continuation" in SP reach that develops from N reach, FIGS. 33 (B) (C), FIG. 34 (A) ~ ( C), see FIGS. 36 (A) (D) to (F)),
When displaying the specific image with the first non-reference pattern, it is possible to display a first suggestive image (mini-character image G40, see FIG. 33(D)) suggesting that the re-variation display will be performed,
When the specific image is displayed with the second non-reference pattern, a second suggestive image (mini-character image G50, FIG. 36 ( D) A game machine characterized by being able to display ).

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, the pattern for displaying the specific image indicating that the re-variation display of the performance symbols is to be performed includes the first non-reference pattern whose execution timing is different from each other, in addition to the predetermined reference pattern. Although there is a second non-reference pattern, in whichever non-reference pattern is performed, the display of the suggestive image representing the same object may suggest that the re-variation display is to be performed. Therefore, regardless of which non-reference pattern the specific image is displayed, it is possible to easily inform the player by displaying the suggestive image that the re-variation display of the effect symbols will be performed.

Means B2:
The gaming machine according to means B1,
The predetermined reference pattern is a pattern for displaying the specific image (pseudo continuous symbol GZ) without bringing the effect symbol into a ready-to-win state (see FIGS. 32(B) and 32(E)),
The first non-reference pattern is a pattern in which the specific image is displayed by performing a pattern change effect (symbol sliding) that changes the ready-to-win state to a non-reach state after the effect pattern is set to the ready-to-win state (Fig. 33 (B) (D) (E) (F) (G)).

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, even after the effect pattern is in the ready-to-win state, the specific image may be displayed by changing to the non-read-to-win state. Since it can be suggested, it is possible to easily inform the player who thinks that the re-fluctuation display will not be performed because of the ready-to-reach state, that the re-fluctuation display will be performed.

Means B3:
The gaming machine according to means B2,
A gaming machine characterized in that the first suggestive image starts to be displayed when the performance symbol is in a ready-to-win state (see FIGS. 33(B) and 33(D)).

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, since the first suggestive image starts to be displayed when the production pattern is in the ready-to-win state, the re-display may be unexpected for the player who thinks that the re-fluctuation display will not be performed. This is a suggestion of variable display. Therefore, the player can be pleasantly surprised, and an improvement in the amusement of the game can be expected.

Means B4:
The gaming machine according to means B2 or means B3,
The second non-reference pattern is developed into a predetermined ready-to-win effect (battle ready-to-win that is SP ready-to-win) without displaying the specific image (pseudo continuous pattern GZ) after the effect pattern is in the ready-to-win state (Fig. 33 (B) (C), see FIGS. 34 (A) to (C)), as the predetermined ready-to-win effect, a specific mode effect indicating that the specific image is displayed (“Continue” character image G49, etc.) A game machine characterized by a pattern for executing a mode of displaying (see FIG. 36(E)).

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, even when the performance pattern is in the ready-to-win state and a predetermined ready-to-win effect is performed, the specific image may be displayed in the ready-to-win effect. Since the re-fluctuation display can be suggested by the image, it is possible to easily convey to the player who thinks that the re-fluctuation display will not be performed because it has developed into a ready-to-win effect, that the re-fluctuation display will be performed. is.

Means B5:
The gaming machine according to means B4,
As the predetermined ready-to-win effect, there is a case where a non-specific mode of effect indicating further development of the effect (a mode of displaying a character image G48 of "development", etc., see FIG. 36(B)) is executed,
The second suggestive image starts to be displayed during the execution of an effect (the effect shown in FIG. 36(A)) common to the non-specific mode effect and the specific mode effect (see FIGS. 36(A) and 36(D)). ) See)).

According to the game machine with this configuration, when it is not yet clear whether the predetermined ready-to-win effect is a non-specific mode effect or a specific mode effect, the second suggestive image starts to be displayed, so it is thought that the re-fluctuation display will not be performed. For the player who is in the situation, it is a suggestion of unexpected re-variation display. Therefore, the player can be pleasantly surprised, and an improvement in the amusement of the game can be expected.

By the way, conventionally, as a pachinko game machine, which is an example of a game machine, for example, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2020-32212, it is possible to perform re-variation display of production symbols in fluctuation production (so-called pseudo-continuous production). Gaming machines are known. Since the pseudo-continuous effect is an effect with a higher degree of expectation for a big win as the number of times of execution increases, the player expects that the pseudo-continuous effect will be performed many times when the pseudo-continuous effect is executed. By the way, as in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2020-32212, there is room for improvement in the pattern in which the performance symbols are re-varied and displayed for the gaming machine that performs the re-variation display of the performance symbols. . In other words, there is still room for improvement in the gaming machine that performs re-variation display of the effect symbols in order to improve the game interest.

The above-described means A is for the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2020-32212, "When a specific image is displayed in the variable effect, the temporarily stopped and displayed effect pattern is re-variably displayed. Yes, in the variable production, when the production pattern is not in the ready state, when executing the fan production to incite whether the specific image is displayed, and after the production pattern is in the ready state, whether the specific image is displayed It is different in that there is a time to develop into a specific development production shown. In addition, the above-described means B provides the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2020-32212 with "when a specific image is displayed in a variable effect, the temporarily stopped and displayed effect symbol is re-variably displayed. The pattern for displaying the specific image in the variable effect includes a predetermined reference pattern, a first non-reference pattern different from the reference pattern, and timing at which the specific image is displayed rather than the first non-reference pattern. When there is a second non-reference pattern with a slow delay, and the specific image is displayed with the first non-reference pattern, it is possible to display the first suggestive image suggesting that the re-variation display will be performed, and the second non-reference pattern. When displaying a specific image with a non-reference pattern, it is possible to display a second suggestive image expressing the same object as the first suggestive image." As a result, the inventions of the means A and B can solve the problem of "improving the interest of the game" (provide action and effect).

11. Second Embodiment A pachinko game machine according to a second embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS. 42 to 47. FIG. In the explanation of the pachinko game machine of the second embodiment, the same reference numerals are given to the same configurations as those of the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment, and the explanation thereof is omitted. The pachinko game machine of the second embodiment differs from the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment in the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table in the non-time saving state. Therefore, the performance executed by the performance control microcomputer 121 is different based on the special figure variation pattern indicated by the special figure 1 variation start command received from the game control microcomputer 101 . Specifically, the pachinko game machine of the second embodiment is configured to be able to execute a characteristic effect called a drive chance (corresponding to a specific effect). The drive chance will be described in detail later, but the drive chance is an effect to show which one of the 1st to 9th number symbols will achieve a ready-to-win (see FIGS. 46 and 47).

<Determination of Tokuzu variation pattern>
First, the determination of the special figure variation pattern in the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment will be described. In the pachinko game machine of the second embodiment, the game control microcomputer 101 determines the special figure 1 variation pattern using the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 42 in the non-time saving state. As shown in FIG. 42, when the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the jackpot pattern 1 (probability variable jackpot) is won in the special figure 1 determination process, "THP101" to "THP104" as the special figure 1 variation pattern. It is possible to determine either In addition, the game control microcomputer 101 determines any one of "THP111" to "THP114" as the special figure 1 variation pattern when it is determined that the jackpot pattern 2 (normal jackpot) is won in the special figure 1 determination process. Is possible. In addition, the game control microcomputer 101, when it is determined to be a loss in the special figure 1 determination process, and when it is determined as "with reach" in the reach determination, as a special figure 1 variation pattern, "THP121" to "THP124 ' can be determined. In addition, the game control microcomputer 101, when it is determined to be a loss in the special figure 1 determination process, and when it is determined as "no reach" in the reach determination, as a special figure 1 variation pattern, "THP141" to "THP142 ' can be determined. Which of these two types of special figure 1 variation patterns is determined has a different distribution rate depending on the number of special figure 1 reservations. Specifically, when the number of special figures 1 pending is 3 to 4 (when the number of special figures 1 pending is relatively large), the special figure fluctuation pattern with a relatively short special figure fluctuation time (specifically fluctuation Toku-zu fluctuation pattern THP142) with a time of 5 seconds is easy to determine, and if the number of toku-zu 1 reservations is 0 to 2 (if the toku-zu 1 reservation number is relatively small), Toku-zu fluctuation time is relatively A long special figure fluctuation pattern (specifically, a special figure fluctuation pattern THP141 with a fluctuation time of 10 seconds) is easily determined.

Here, the special figure variation patterns "THP101" and "THP111" are variations (Drive 2 Times SP jackpot fluctuation). In addition, the special figure variation patterns "THP102" and "THP112" are variations in which a drive chance is performed only once, then becomes reach and develops to SP reach, and a successful effect is performed (drive 1 time SP big hit variation). "Drive 2 times SP jackpot variation" and "Drive 1 time SP jackpot variation" are collectively referred to as "Drive SP jackpot variation". In addition, special figure fluctuation patterns "THP103" and "THP113" are fluctuations (SP jackpot fluctuations) in which a drive chance becomes reach without being performed even once and develops to SP reach and a successful effect is performed. In addition, the special figure fluctuation patterns "THP104" and "THP114" are fluctuations (N jackpot fluctuations) in which a drive chance becomes a reach without being performed even once, and a jackpot winning is indicated at N reach (N jackpot fluctuation).

In addition, the special figure variation pattern "THP121" becomes a reach after the drive chance is repeated twice, and develops to an SP reach (battle reach), and a failure effect (defeat effect) is performed (drive twice SP loss variation). is. In addition, the special figure variation pattern "THP122" is a variation in which after the drive chance is performed only once, it becomes a reach and develops to an SP reach and a failure effect is performed (drive 1 time SP loss variation). When collectively referring to “2nd drive SP loss variation” and “1st drive SP loss variation”, it is called “drive SP loss variation”, and when “drive SP loss variation” and “drive SP jackpot variation” are collectively referred to , "drive SP variation". In addition, the special figure variation pattern "THP123" is a variation (SP loss variation) in which a drive chance becomes a reach without being performed even once and develops to an SP reach and a failure effect is performed. In addition, the special figure fluctuation pattern "THP124" is a fluctuation (N loss fluctuation) in which the drive chance becomes a reach without being performed even once, and a loss is indicated in the N reach. In addition, SP reach is an example of "predetermined reach effect."

In addition, the special figure fluctuation pattern "THP141" is a fluctuation (normal A loss fluctuation) in which the fluctuation production ends in 10 seconds without the production patterns EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 becoming reach. In addition, the special figure fluctuation pattern "THP142" is a fluctuation (normal B loss fluctuation) in which the fluctuation production ends in 5 seconds without the production patterns EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 becoming reach.

Thus, in this embodiment, when the result of the jackpot determination is jackpot winning (that is, when jackpot pattern 1 or jackpot pattern 2 is won), the game control microcomputer 101 controls the drive SP jackpot variation (drive 2-time SP jackpot variation, Drive 1-time SP jackpot variation) is selected at a rate of 60%, SP jackpot variation is selected at a rate of 25%, and N jackpot variation is selected at a rate of 15%. That is, when the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot winning, the drive SP jackpot variation is more likely to be selected than the SP jackpot variation and the N jackpot variation, and the SP jackpot variation is more likely to be selected than the N jackpot variation. In addition, the selection ratio of the drive 2-time SP big hit variation and the selection ratio of the drive 1-time SP big hit variation are both the same at 30%.

In addition, in this embodiment, if the result of the jackpot determination is a loss, if the result of the reach determination is "with reach", the game control microcomputer 101 controls the drive SP loss variation (drive twice SP loss variation, drive once SP loss variation) is selected at a rate of 10%, SP loss variation is selected at a rate of 20%, and N loss variation is selected at a rate of 70%. That is, when the result of the big hit determination is a loss, the drive SP losing variation is less likely to be selected than the SP losing variation and the N losing variation, and the SP losing variation is less likely to be selected than the N losing variation. It should be noted that the selection ratio of the drive 2-time SP loss variation and the selection ratio of the drive 1-time SP loss variation are both the same at 5%.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the drive SP fluctuation is divided into SP fluctuation (fluctuation that develops to SP reach without a single drive chance) and N fluctuation (fluctuation that ends with N reach without a drive chance). ), and the SP fluctuation is a fluctuation with a higher jackpot expectation than the N fluctuation. In addition, the drive chance functions as an effect suggesting that the degree of expectation for a big hit is high.

<Types of production patterns>
Next, the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 in the pachinko game machine of the second embodiment will be described. When the effect control microcomputer 121 receives a special figure variation start command (special figure 1 variation start command or special figure 2 variation start command) from the game control microcomputer 101, the variation effect is started. In the variable performance, three performance symbols EZ1, EZ2 and EZ3 are variably displayed. Specifically, the left performance symbol area 50b1 variably displays the left performance symbol EZ1, the medium performance symbol area 50b2 variably displays the medium performance symbol EZ2, and the right performance symbol area 50b3 variably displays the right performance symbol EZ3. (See FIG. 19). Then, according to the stop display of the special symbols, the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are definitely stopped and displayed in a stop mode showing the result of the special symbol determination processing. In principle, the order of the temporary stop display in the variable effect is the order of left effect symbol EZ1→right effect symbol EZ3→middle effect symbol EZ2.

The left production pattern EZ1, the middle production pattern EZ2, and the right production pattern EZ3 each include nine number patterns from "1" to "9". A stop mode (rolling number) in which all of the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are composed of the same number symbols is a jackpot stop mode (double eyes) indicating the winning of the jackpot, and the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are all the same. A stop mode that is not composed of numerical symbols is a losing stop mode (losing eye) indicating a loss. In the losing stop mode, only the middle effect pattern EZ2 is composed of different number patterns from the left effect pattern EZ1 and the right effect pattern EZ3, and the left effect pattern EZ1 and the right effect pattern EZ3 are composed of different number patterns. There is a non-reach losing eye. It should be noted that the stop mode of the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 for indicating the result of the special figure determination process can be changed as appropriate.

As shown in FIG. 43, five odd numbered patterns of "1", "3", "5", "7" and "9" among the numbered patterns of "1" to "9" are the first effect. It belongs to the pattern group (corresponding to the "first type of production pattern"), and the four even-numbered patterns "2", "4", "6", and "8" belong to the second production pattern group ("second (equivalent to the type of production design)). Double eyes ("1 1 1" "3 3 3" "5 5 5" "7 7 7" "9 9.9”) may be stop-displayed only when winning a variable probability jackpot (jackpot pattern 1 or jackpot pattern 3, see FIG. 30). That is, the display of doubles of the performance symbols belonging to the first performance symbol group functions as a suggestion that the probability variable jackpot is won. On the other hand, double eyes ("2 2 2" "4 4 4" "6 6 6" "8 8・8”) is stopped and displayed even when the normal jackpot (jackpot pattern 2 or jackpot pattern 4, see Fig. 30) is won, or when the probability variable jackpot (jackpot pattern 1 or jackpot pattern 3) is won. There is something. In other words, the double display of the performance symbols belonging to the second performance symbol group usually functions as a suggestion that there is a possibility of winning the jackpot.

In addition, if the reach mode for each number pattern is shown in the form of "left production pattern EZ1, middle production pattern EZ2, right production pattern EZ3", the reach form using "1" is "1 ↓ 1" ”(“↓” indicates that it is fluctuating), the reach mode using “3” is “3 ↓ 3”, and the reach mode using “5” is “5 ↓ 5 ”, the reach mode using “7” is “7 ↓ 7”, the reach mode using “9” is “9 ↓ 9”, and using “2” The reach mode is "2 ↓ 2", the reach mode using "4" is "4 ↓ 4", and the reach mode using "6" is "6 ↓ 6" ”, and the form of reach using “8” is “8 ↓ 8”.

<Lottery to determine production pattern>
Next, the lottery for determining the performance symbol in the case of establishing a ready-to-win in the variable performance will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 44 is a production symbol determination table relating to the special figure 1 when reach is established in the variable production in a non-time-saving state. As shown in FIG. 44, in the non-time saving state, the effect control microcomputer 121 is, if the special figure fluctuation pattern indicated by the special figure 1 fluctuation start command received from the game control microcomputer 101 is any one of THP101 to THP104, That is, if it is a jackpot change based on the probability variable jackpot winning, select "7" at a rate of 60%, and odd patterns ("1", "3", "5", "9") excluding "7" are 8% each , and even numbers (“2”, “4”, “6”, “8”) are selected at a rate of 2% each. It should be noted that the ready-to-win is formed using the performance symbols selected in the lottery for determining the performance symbols.

Also, in the non-time saving state, the special figure fluctuation pattern indicated by the special figure 1 fluctuation start command received from the game control microcomputer 101 is any one of THP111 to THP114, that is, the normal jackpot winning If it is a big hit variation based on, select even symbols (“2”, “4”, “6”, “8”) at a rate of 25% each.

In addition, in the non-time saving state, the effect control microcomputer 121, if the special figure fluctuation pattern indicated by the special figure fluctuation start command received from the game control microcomputer 101 is any one of THP121 to THP124, that is, the loss with reach If it is a fluctuation, select "7" at a rate of 0.8%, and select odd patterns ("1", "3", "5", "9") excluding "7" at a rate of 4.8% each Then, the even numbered symbols (“2”, “4”, “6”, “8”) are selected at a rate of 20% each.

In this way, in this form, the selection ratio of each production pattern in the case of "probability variation jackpot" in the non-time saving state is "7"> "1", "3", "5", "9"> "2", There is a relationship of "4", "6", and "8". Moreover, the selection ratio of each production design in the case of "normal jackpot" in a non-time-saving state has a relationship of "2"="4"="6"="8". In addition, the selection ratio of each production pattern in the case of "losing with reach" in the non-time saving state is "2", "4", "6", "8"> "1", "3", "5", There is a relationship of "9">"7". That is, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 45, the degree of expectation for the jackpot of each production pattern in the non-working time saving state is "7">"1", "3", "5", "9">"2", " There is a relationship of 4", "6", and "8". In other words, in this form, if the production pattern that has become a reach is an odd number pattern (7, 1, 3, 5, 9), it will reach with an even number pattern (2, 4, 6, 8) regardless of which production pattern. The expectation of the jackpot is higher than when it becomes. In addition, when the odd-numbered symbols indicate the winning of the jackpot, the probability variable jackpot is determined. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when odd-numbered symbols result in a ready-to-win state, it is possible to make the player strongly expect to win a jackpot.

In addition, in this embodiment, the reach of 7 symbols among the odd symbols is very rarely displayed based on the variation of losing, and is most likely to be displayed in the variation based on the probability variable jackpot (see FIG. 44). Therefore, the reach with 7 symbols functions as an effect with a very high expectation for a big hit compared to the reach with other odd-numbered symbols (1, 3, 5, 9). The 7 symbols are examples of high-expectation symbols. It should be noted that the degree of expectation for a big hit according to the type of the production pattern (ready-to-win pattern) that has become a ready-to-win can be appropriately changed within a range that does not interfere with the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, even if the probability variable jackpot is won, even numbered symbols are selected with a small probability (see FIG. 44). As a result, even when even-numbered symbols are ready-to-win, or even-numbered symbols are stopped and displayed, it is possible to expect to be controlled to a high-probability state. In this case, the notification of the probability variation jackpot (probability variation promotion effect) may be performed during the fluctuation time of the special figure, may be performed during the stop time, or may be performed during the jackpot game. Alternatively, it may be executed during the high probability state after the end of the jackpot game.

<Drive Chance>
Next, drive chances that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 46 and 47. FIG. The effect control microcomputer 121 has a special figure variation pattern indicated by the special figure 1 variation start command received from the game control microcomputer 101 is "drive SP variation (THP101, THP102, THP111, THP112, THP121, or THP122)". In this case, after the normal fluctuation is started, a drive chance is performed, and a reach performance (N reach, SP reach) is performed (see FIG. 42). The drive chance is an effect that indicates which of the number symbols "1" to "9" will establish a reach.

Specifically, when performing a drive chance, the effect control microcomputer 121 starts the variable display of the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 as shown in FIGS. 46(A) and 46(B). A character image G60 is displayed on the display section 50a. This makes it possible for the player to recognize the start of the drive chance.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 121 displays the effect image shown in FIG. 46(C) on the display section 50a. The effect image shown in FIG. 46(C) includes an image representing a vehicle (moving object image G61), an image representing a road on which the vehicle can travel (road image G62), and an image on the left side of the traveling direction of the vehicle along the road. Various numerical patterns (left numerical pattern LS) arranged in numerical order and various numerical patterns (right numerical pattern RS) arranged in numerical order on the right side of the traveling direction of the car along the road are included. The left numeral pattern LS and the right numeral pattern RS are arranged so that the same numerals face each other across the road. That is, the "1" of the left number pattern LS and the "1" of the right number pattern RS are arranged facing each other across the road, and the "2" of the left number pattern LS and the "2" of the right number pattern RS are arranged. Various left numeral patterns LS and various right numeral patterns RS are arranged facing each other across the road, and so on.

In other words, in Drive Chance, various numerical patterns are arranged side by side on a first line L1 along the left side of the vehicle traveling direction (one end side of the road), and the line is parallel to the first line L1. Various number patterns are also arranged side by side on the second line L2 along the right side of the traveling direction of the car (the other end side of the road). The same number patterns are arranged across the road from the various number patterns arranged on the line L2. In the drive chance, a moving image of a car traveling on a road sandwiched between left and right numbers is displayed on the display section 50a (FIG. 46(C)). In other words, this production is a production in which the moving object image G61 moves along a path formed by a plurality of numerical patterns arranged in numerical order in two rows (a pattern row on the first line L1 and a pattern row on the second line L1). It can be said that this is an effect in which the moving object image G61 moves between the symbol rows on L2. In the present embodiment, the range of the left number pattern LS and the right number pattern RS displayed on the display unit 50a in the drive chance is not the entire range from 1 pattern to 9 patterns (see FIG. 46(C)). The entire range from the pattern to the 9 patterns may be displayed.

After the image shown in FIG. 46(C) is displayed, the effect control microcomputer 121 stops the movement of the moving object image G61 at a position sandwiched between certain number patterns (four patterns in this example) (FIG. 46(D)). ). If the moving object image G61 is not moving, the moving object image G61 may be displayed in a state in which it is not completely stopped, such as a small vibration on the spot (a state expressing that the engine of the car is running). Then, as shown in FIG. 46(E), the effect control microcomputer 121 moves the number pattern (4 patterns) positioned on the left side of the moving object image G61 in the direction of movement to the upper left part of the display unit 50a and displays the left effect. A large swinging pattern is displayed as the pattern EZ1, and the number pattern (4 patterns) positioned on the right side of the moving object image G61 in the traveling direction moves to the upper right part of the display section 50a and swings greatly as the right effect pattern EZ3. display the state of the Along with this, the effect control microcomputer 121 displays a close-up scene in which the driver looks out of the window of the stopped car. That is, the image shown in FIG. 46(E) includes an image of a car including the driver whose face is out of the window. In this embodiment, the image of the car including the driver whose face is out of the window is also one aspect of the moving object image G61. In other words, it is assumed that the moving object image G61 includes the passenger. Note that the moving object image G61 is an example of a “predetermined index image”.

If the drive chance being executed is based on "one drive SP big win variation (THP102, THP112)" or "one drive SP loss variation (THP122)", following the scene shown in FIG. The scene shown in FIG. 46(F) is displayed. In the scene shown in FIG. 46(F), the production control microcomputer 121 changes the expression of the driver to a motivated one, and also expresses the driver's line (first line) of "It's time to win". Display the image G64. In accordance with this, the performance control microcomputer 121 also adjusts the swing width of the left performance symbol EZ1, which greatly sways in the upper left part of the display unit 50a, and the right performance symbol EZ3, which greatly sways in the upper right part of the display unit 50a. It is made smaller, and both production patterns EZ1 and EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 46(G), the effect control microcomputer 121 returns to the screen displaying the daytime normal background image G102, and displays the number patterns that had been displayed in the upper left and upper right portions of the display unit 50a until then. Effect symbols EZ1, EZ2 and EZ3 are displayed in a ready-to-win state with 4 symbols in this example as ready-to-win symbols. After that, the production control microcomputer 121 performs SP reach through N reach. Note that the image of a car including a driver with a motivated expression shown in FIG. 46(F) is an example of the first mode of the moving object image G61 (predetermined index image). Also, as shown in FIG. 46(F), "moving object image G61", "left effect pattern EZ1" (here, 4 patterns), and "right effect pattern EZ3" (here, 4 patterns) are displayed in combination. The display mode is an example of a specific mode.

In this way, the drive chance is such that various number patterns (1 to 9 patterns) are arranged on the first line L1 and the second line L2 so that the same number patterns correspond to each other, and the moving body image is displayed between them. G61 is moved (see FIG. 46(C)), and when the movement of the moving body image G61 is stopped, the number patterns (for example, 4 patterns) on the left side of the moving body image G61 in the moving direction and the number patterns on the right side in the moving direction (For example, 4 symbols) are used, and the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are in the reach state (see FIGS. 46(D) to (G)).

The example of the effect described above is an example of the effect when the drive chance is given only once. When the drive chance is given twice, the presentation proceeds as follows. In other words, if the drive chance being executed is based on "2nd drive SP big hit variation (THP101, THP111)" or "2nd drive SP loss variation (THP121)", the scene shown in FIG. to display the scene shown in FIG. In the scene shown in FIG. 47(A), the effect control microcomputer 121 changes the driver's facial expression to a smile, and also creates a dialogue image representing the driver's dialogue (second dialogue) saying, "I'll do one more lap." Display G66. Along with this, the effect control microcomputer 121 again variably displays the left effect symbol EZ1 which is largely shaking in the upper left part of the display section 50a and the right effect symbol EZ3 which is largely shaking in the upper right part of the display section 50a. Let Note that the image of the car including the smiling driver shown in FIG. 47A is an example of the second mode of the moving object image G61 (predetermined index image).

Following the effect of FIG. 47(A), the effect control microcomputer 121, as shown in FIG. is displayed on the display unit 50a. This allows the player to recognize that the second drive chance will be given (that the drive chance will be repeated).

After that, as in the case of the first drive chance, the performance is performed according to the flow shown in FIGS. 47(C) to (G). That is, the effect control microcomputer 121 displays a moving object image G61, a road image G62, a left numeral pattern LS, and a right numeral pattern RS, and moves and displays the moving object image G61 (FIG. 47(C)). Here, in the second drive chance, the number patterns may be displayed in a range different from that in the first drive chance (see FIGS. 46(C) and 47(C)). Then, the effect control microcomputer 121 stops the movement of the moving body image G61 at a position sandwiched between certain symbols (7 symbols in this example) (Fig. 47(D)). If the moving object image G61 is not moving, the moving object image G61 may be displayed in a state in which it is not completely stopped, such as a small vibration on the spot (a state expressing that the engine of the car is running). As shown in FIGS. 47(C) and 47(D), in the second drive chance, at a position sandwiched between different number patterns (production patterns with higher expectations for big hits when ready-to-win is established) different from the first drive chance. , the moving object image G61 may stop.

Thereafter, the effect control microcomputer 121 causes the number patterns (seven patterns included in the left number pattern LS) on one side of the moving object image G61 to move to the upper left part of the display section 50a in the scene shown in FIG. 47(D). 47(D), the number patterns on the other side of the moving object image G61 (seven patterns included in the right number pattern RS) are displayed on the display unit. It moves to the upper right part of 50a and displays a state of swinging greatly as a right effect symbol EZ3 (FIG. 47(E)). Along with this, a scene in which the driver appears from the window of the car is displayed.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 121 changes the driver's facial expression to one full of motivation, and displays a dialogue image G64 representing the driver's dialogue (first dialogue) saying "It's time to play" (FIG. 47). (F)). In addition, along with this, the swinging width of the left effect pattern EZ1 which is greatly fluctuating in the upper left part of the display part 50a and the right effect pattern EZ3 which is largely fluctuating in the upper right part of the display part 50a is reduced, and both the effect pattern EZ1 is reduced. , EZ3 are temporarily stopped. Then, as shown in FIG. 47(G), the effect control microcomputer 121 returns to the screen displaying the normal daytime background image G102, and displays the number patterns that had been displayed in the upper left and upper right portions of the display unit 50a until then. Effect symbols EZ1, EZ2 and EZ3 are displayed in a ready-to-win state with 7 symbols in this example as ready-to-win symbols. After that, the production control microcomputer 121 performs SP reach through N reach. It should be noted that, as shown in FIG. 47(F), a display mode in which "moving object image G61", "left effect pattern EZ1" (here, 7 patterns), and "right effect pattern EZ3" (here, 7 patterns) are combined. is an example of a specific embodiment.

In this way, in the second drive chance, a pattern (for example, 7 symbols) is shown as a ready-to-win symbol candidate (see FIGS. 47(D) and (E)), and the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 may reach the ready-to-win state with those symbols (FIGS. 47(F) and (G). reference). Therefore, when the second drive chance is executed, the player will be able to form a ready-to-win with a pattern (high-expectation pattern) with a higher expectation for a big win than the pattern indicated by the first drive chance. It can be expected, and the improvement of amusement interest can be expected. The effects shown in FIGS. 46(D) and (E) and the effects shown in FIGS. 47(D) and (E) in the drive chance can be said to be effects showing candidates for ready-to-win symbols, and ready-to-win is formed by these candidate symbols. It can be said that it is a performance that incites Ruka. 46(F) and FIG. 47(F) in the drive chance, and the effects shown in FIG. 46(G) and FIG. 47(G) after the drive chance are ready-to-win patterns. can be said to be a state in which is established, and it can also be said to be a state in which reach is formed.

Here, in this embodiment, as shown in the remarks column of FIG. 44, 7 as a reach pattern based on the drive 2-time SP jackpot variation (THP101) or drive 2-time SP loss variation (THP121) when winning the probability variable jackpot. When a pattern is selected, the moving body image G61 is stopped at a position sandwiched between patterns other than the seven patterns at the first drive chance, and the moving body image G61 is stopped at a position sandwiched between the seven patterns at the second drive chance. configured to stop. Therefore, in such a case, the effect control microcomputer 121 executes the effect according to the flow shown in FIGS. 46(A) to (E) and FIGS. 47(A) to (G).

On the other hand, when a pattern other than 7 patterns is selected as a reach pattern based on the 2nd drive SP jackpot fluctuation (THP101) or the 2nd drive SP loss fluctuation (THP121) when winning the probability variable jackpot, the first drive chance In both the second drive chance and the second drive chance, the effect control microcomputer 121 stops the moving body image G61 at a position sandwiched between the selected symbols. In addition, when the drive chance is performed based on the double drive SP jackpot variation (THP111) when the normal jackpot is won, both the first drive chance and the second drive chance are controlled by the production control microcomputer 121. The moving object image G61 is stopped at a position sandwiched between the selected patterns. Therefore, in these cases, even if the second drive chance is performed, the ready-to-win is not formed with the symbols having a higher expectation for the big win than the symbols indicated as candidates for the ready-to-win symbols in the first drive chance. .

In addition, when the drive chance is performed based on the one-time drive SP big hit variation (THP102, THP112) or the one-time drive SP loss variation (THP122), at the first drive chance, the effect control microcomputer 121 selects The moving object image G61 is stopped at a position sandwiched between the symbols.

In addition, when the drive chance is performed twice, a pattern is provided in which even numbered symbols are indicated as ready-to-win symbol candidates in the first drive chance, and odd-numbered symbols other than 7 symbols are indicated as ready-to-win symbol candidates in the second drive chance. may

<Action and effect of the second embodiment>
As described above, according to the pachinko game machine of the second embodiment, a plurality of types of performance symbols arranged on the first line L1 and a plurality of types of correspondingly arranged on the second line L2 The moving object image G61 moves between the production symbols of , and uses both production symbols on one side (left side in the traveling direction of the car) and the other side (right side in the traveling direction of the car) where it stops. It is possible to improve the amusement of the game by a novel effect (see FIGS. 46 and 47) of showing that the game will reach reach.

Further, according to the pachinko game machine of the second embodiment, when the movement of the moving body image G61 stops, the moving body image G61 is displayed in the first mode shown in FIG. 47(A), or the second mode (a mode representing a car with a smiling driver sticking out of the window) shown in FIG. 47(A). It is designed to branch to whether or not it will be a reach (whether another drive chance will be performed). Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the effect when the movement of the moving object image G61 stops, and it is expected that the game interest will be improved.

Further, according to the pachinko game machine of the second embodiment, in the case of ready-to-win, the moving body image G61 and each of the performance symbols (for example, 4 symbols, see FIG. 46(D)) on both sides are combined. (Refer to FIGS. 46(D) to (F)) are performed, so it can be expected that the excitement of the presentation will increase, and the improvement of the amusement of the game can be expected.

Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment, depending on whether the ready-to-win state is formed by odd-numbered symbols or the ready-to-win state is formed by even-numbered symbols, the degree of expectation for a big hit changes (see FIG. 45), Interest in where the moving object image G61 stops in the drive chance is heightened, and the amusement of the game is improved.

Further, according to the pachinko game machine of the second embodiment, after the moving object image G61 stops at the first drive chance and the ready-to-win state is formed with predetermined effect symbols (for example, 4 symbols) ( (See FIGS. 46(D) and (E)), the second drive chance is performed, and in the second drive chance, a high-expectation symbol (for example, 7 symbols) with a higher expectation than the predetermined effect symbol (4 symbols) ), the moving body image G61 may stop at the position of ) and a ready-to-win state may be formed with high-expectation symbols (7 symbols) (see FIG. 47). Therefore, the game interest is improved.

<Modified example of the second embodiment>
A modification of the second embodiment will be described below. In addition, in the description of the modified example of the second embodiment, the same reference numerals are given to the same configurations as those of the pachinko game machine of the second embodiment, and the description thereof is omitted. Of course, configurations according to modifications of the second embodiment may be combined as appropriate. Moreover, technical features in the second embodiment and its modifications can be deleted as appropriate unless they are described as essential in this specification. Further, the configurations included in the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the first embodiment and its modifications can be adopted in the gaming machines understood from the second embodiment and its modifications as long as they do not interfere with the game. can be done.

In the second embodiment, when a variable effect is performed in which the drive chance is repeated twice, the type of reach pattern (tenpai pattern) may change to a higher expected jackpot (Fig. 44), the type of ready-to-win symbols may not change even if the drive chance is repeated multiple times.

In addition, in the second embodiment, the variable jackpot expectation level in which the drive chance is repeated twice and the variable jackpot expectation level in which the drive chance is performed only once are set to be the same (see FIG. 42), but there are two drive chances. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the variation that is repeated multiple times has a higher degree of expectation for a big win than the variation in which the drive chance is performed only once. In such a configuration, the expectation of a big hit is higher when the reach of 7 symbols is established in the second drive chance than when the reach of 7 symbols is established in the first drive chance. As a result, an improvement in amusement in games can be expected. In addition, it may be configured such that the drive chance is more likely to be executed when winning the variable probability jackpot than when winning the normal jackpot. In addition, when the probability variable jackpot is won, the variation in which the drive chance is repeated twice is easier to execute than the variation in which the drive chance is performed only once, and when the normal jackpot is won, the variation is more likely to be executed. , a configuration may be adopted in which a change in which only one drive chance is performed is more likely to be executed than a change in which drive chance is repeated twice. With such a configuration, the variation in which the drive chance is repeated twice functions as an effect suggesting that there is a high possibility of winning the variable probability jackpot.

In addition, in the second embodiment, as a result of the drive chance (specific effect), it is configured to indicate that a reach (for example, "4↓4") is formed with a certain pattern (for example, 4 patterns). As a result, it may be configured to indicate that a chance number (for example, "135") is formed. In this case, the predetermined index image may be a symbol (for example, 3 symbols) that the middle effect symbol EZ2 carries in the chance eye.

Further, in the second embodiment, the predetermined advantageous development suggested by the drive chance (specific effect) is to develop into a ready-to-win effect (SP reach), and in the specific effect, it is determined which of the effect patterns will result in a ready-to-win effect. It was configured as shown. On the other hand, the predetermined advantageous development suggested by the specific effect may be a jackpot game state, and the specific effect may indicate a jackpot winning. In this case, the predetermined index image that moves in the specific effect may be the effect symbol. Specifically, for example, the middle effect symbol EZ2 may be used as a predetermined index image. It should be noted that, in the specific production, if the production pattern of the same kind as one of the production patterns being displayed is stopped as the middle production pattern EZ2, it will be notified of the jackpot winning, and the production pattern that is different from any production pattern being displayed is the middle production pattern EZ2. If it is configured to be a loss notification if it is stopped as a result, the display mode in which the production patterns EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 constituting the double eyes are enlarged and displayed (the middle production pattern EZ2 is also enlarged and displayed) in response to the notification of the jackpot winning. ) corresponds to the first mode of a predetermined index image, and in response to the notification of a loss, the display mode in which the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 constituting the reach-losing are displayed in normal size (the middle performance symbol EZ2 is also normal ) corresponds to the second aspect of the predetermined index image. In addition, the Corolla order corresponds to a specific embodiment.

Further, in the second embodiment, the movement of the moving object image G61 (predetermined index image) in the drive chance (specific effect) can be changed as appropriate. For example, the movement of the moving object image G61 (predetermined index image) may include a mode of vibrating violently on the spot (large vibration) and a mode of vibrating slightly on the spot (small vibration). In this case, a large vibration may be included in the movement of the predetermined index image, and a small vibration may be included in the stopping of the predetermined index image.

Further, in the second embodiment, the moving object image G61 is configured so as not to overlap the left number pattern LS arranged on the first line L1 and the right number pattern RS arranged on the second line L2. A body image G61 (predetermined index image) is displayed in a moving manner so as to be superimposed on the production pattern (left number pattern LS) arranged on the first line L1 and the production pattern (right number pattern RS) arranged on the second line L2. It may be done. Even such a configuration is included in "moving a predetermined index image between the first line and the second line."

In addition, in the second embodiment, a plurality of performance patterns (number patterns) are arranged in order of number (in increasing order in the traveling direction of the car) in the drive chance (specific performance), but the performance patterns facing each other across the road are arranged. If they are of the same type (for example, 7 patterns and 7 patterns), the order of the production patterns arranged on the first line L1 and the second line L2 is, for example, 3, 5, 2, 8, 7, etc. , may be in random order instead of numerical order.

Further, in the second embodiment, in the drive chance, the left figure symbol LS and the right figure symbol RS are configured to display an image in which the moving object image G61 is moving, but the moving object image G61 is displayed on the spot. It is also possible to display an image in which the left figure pattern LS and the right figure pattern RS are moving. That is, the movement of the moving object image G61 (predetermined index image) may be relative movement.

Further, in the second embodiment, the content of various images such as the index image (moving object image G61) displayed in the specific effect (drive chance) can be changed as appropriate within a range that does not hinder the function of the effect and does not interfere with the game. It is possible. Note that the first mode and the second mode of the index image can be appropriately changed according to the content of the index image displayed in the specific effect.

In addition, in the second embodiment, the drive chance (specific effect) is configured to be repeated multiple times in succession, but it may be configured not to be repeated multiple times in succession. In addition, in the second embodiment, when the drive chance (specific effect) is performed, it is configured so that the reach is always established. It is good also as a structure with a certain case. In this case, for example, following the effect shown in FIG. 46(E), the right effect pattern EZ3 changes to a different type of pattern (for example, 5 patterns) from the left effect pattern EZ1, and the head appears out of the car window. The driver may change to a disappointing expression to indicate that the reach is not established. Such an effect is an example of the second mode. In addition, in the second embodiment, the drive chance (specific effect) is an effect including the effect shown in FIGS. 46(B) to (F). 46(E) and (F) may not be included.

Further, in the second embodiment, when the movement of the moving body image G61 is stopped in the drive chance (specific effect), each of the performance symbols (for example, the left number symbol 46(C)) and the moving object image G61 are displayed in a specific mode as shown in FIG. It is configured to suggest that the ready-to-win performance is performed with each of the performance symbols (4 symbols) positioned on the left side and the right side in the moving direction of G61 as ready-to-win symbols. However, the specific mode using the moving body image G61 and the effect symbols positioned on the left side and right side of the moving body image G61 in the moving direction can be changed as appropriate. Specifically, for example, an image representing the front of the car may be displayed as the moving object image G61, and the specific mode may be a mode in which each effect pattern is displayed in a superimposed manner at the positions of the left and right headlights of the car.

<Invention shown in the second embodiment>
The above-described second embodiment and its modifications show inventions of the following means. In the description of the means described below, the corresponding structural names and expressions in the above-described embodiments, etc., and the reference numerals used in the drawings are added in parentheses for reference. However, the constituent elements of each invention are not limited to this appendix. Note that means C is a general term for means C1 to C5 below.

Means C1:
A plurality of types of production patterns (left number patterns LS) are arranged on the first line (L1) (see FIG. 46(C)),
The same type of production pattern (right number pattern RS) as the plurality of types of production patterns is arranged on the second line (L2) corresponding to each production pattern arranged on the first line,
moving a predetermined index image (moving object image G61) between the first line and the second line;
When the movement of the predetermined index image is stopped, the performance symbols (four symbols in FIG. A specific effect (drive A gaming machine characterized by being able to execute a chance).

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, a predetermined index is provided between the plurality of types of performance symbols arranged on the first line and the plurality of types of performance symbols arranged on the second line corresponding thereto. The game interest can be improved by a novel performance of showing an advantageous development by using both performance patterns on one side and the other side where the image is moved and stopped.

Means C2:
The gaming machine according to means C1,
After stopping the movement of the predetermined index image (moving object image G61), the predetermined index image is displayed in the first mode (mode shown in FIG. 46(F)) suggesting that the predetermined advantageous development will occur. and a second mode (mode shown in FIG. 47(A)) suggesting that the predetermined advantageous development will not occur.

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, when the movement of the predetermined index image stops, the predetermined index image is in the first state and advantageous development occurs, or in the second state and the advantageous development is not. Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the performance when the movement of the predetermined index image stops, and it is expected that the amusement of the game will be improved.

Means C3:
The gaming machine according to means C1 or means C2,
When suggesting that the specific effect will result in the predetermined advantageous development, the predetermined index image (moving object image G61) and the effect pattern ( 46(D), 4 patterns) and the effect pattern (the pattern in FIG. 46(D)) on the other side (the right side in the traveling direction of the car) are displayed in a specific mode (the mode shown in FIG. 46(F)). A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, when an advantageous development occurs, an effect is performed in which the predetermined index image and each of the effect patterns on both sides of the index image are combined, so that the excitement of the effect can be expected to increase. , It is expected that the interest in gaming will increase.

Means C4:
The gaming machine according to any one of means C1 to means C3,
The predetermined advantageous development is to develop into a predetermined reach effect (SP reach),
In the specific effect, when a reach state is formed with a first type of effect pattern (odd number pattern) among the plurality of types of effect patterns, and a second type of effect pattern different from the first type ( A gaming machine characterized in that the degree of expectation of an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to a player is different from when a ready-to-win state is formed with even symbols (see FIG. 45).

According to the gaming machine of this configuration, an advantageous state advantageous to the player is obtained depending on whether the ready-to-win state is formed by the first kind of performance symbols or the ready-to-win state is formed by the second kind of performance symbols. Since the degree of expectation changes, the interest in where the predetermined index image stops is heightened, and the amusement of the game is improved.

Means C5:
The gaming machine according to means C4,
In the specific effect (first drive chance), a ready-to-reach state is formed with a predetermined pattern (for example, 4 patterns) or agitated (see FIG. 46 (E)), again the specific effect (second drive Chance) is performed, and a ready-to-win state may be formed with high-expectation-degree symbols (for example, 7 symbols) having a higher expectation than the predetermined production symbols (FIGS. 46A to 46E, FIG. 47 (A) to (G)).

According to the gaming machine of this configuration, after the predetermined index image is stopped in the previous specific performance and the ready-to-win state is formed with the predetermined performance pattern, the specific performance is performed again, and the specific performance is performed. In the game machine, since a predetermined index image may be stopped at the position of a high-expectation pattern having a higher degree of expectation than a predetermined performance pattern, and a ready-to-win state may be formed in the high-expectation pattern, the amusement of the game is improved.

By the way, conventionally, as a pachinko game machine, which is an example of a game machine, for example, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2019-205704, after stopping and displaying the left production pattern with a certain number pattern in the variable production, the right production pattern is stopped with the same number pattern as the left effect pattern (that is, whether it becomes a reach), and when the reach is established, a battle reach is performed and the result of the lottery is shown. By the way, like the game machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2019-205704, for a game machine that suggests the development of the production using the production pattern, such as making the production pattern reachable in the variable production, the use of the production pattern There was room for improvement. In other words, there is still room for improvement in gaming machines that suggest the development of effects using the effect symbols, in order to increase the interest in games.

The above-described means C provides the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2019-205704, "A plurality of types of performance symbols arranged on the first line and the same kind of performance symbols are arranged on the first line. When a predetermined index image arranged on the second line corresponding to each of the effect symbols is moved between the first line and the second line, and the movement of the predetermined index image is stopped. , suggesting a predetermined advantageous development advantageous to the player by using the performance symbols on one side of the predetermined index image and the performance symbols on the other side.” As a result, the invention of means C can solve the problem of "improving the amusement of the game" (provides a working effect).

12. Third Embodiment Hereinafter, a pachinko game machine of a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 48 to 63. FIG. In the description of the pachinko game machine of the third embodiment, the same reference numerals are given to the same configurations as those of the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted. The pachinko game machine of the third embodiment has a 7-segment display device 300 in the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment, which is capable of displaying a so-called normal base, and is equipped with an over-prize preventing function.

It should be noted that the pachinko game machine of the third embodiment is a so-called V-Ken ST machine. In the pachinko game machine of the third embodiment, it is possible to execute a jackpot game including a round game that opens the second big prize hole 15, and in a round game that opens the second big prize hole 15, V passes (to the specific area 16 If there is a passage), turn on the probability variation flag (flag indicating high probability state) and time saving flag (flag indicating time saving state) at the end of the jackpot game (to high probability high base state ) along with the probability variation counter (a counter that counts the upper limit number of special figure fluctuations in a high probability state) and a short time counter (a counter that counts the upper limit number of special figure fluctuations in a short time state) are both set to "160", If there is no V passage during the jackpot game, only the time-saving flag is turned ON at the end of the jackpot game (to a low-probability-high base state), and the time-saving counter is set to "160".

<Display on 7-segment display>
First, the display on the 7-segment display 300 (see FIG. 9) in the pachinko gaming machine of the third embodiment will be described. In the 7-segment display 300, the normal base, which is the ratio of the normal total prize balls won by the player in the normal game state and the normal shot balls fired by the player in the normal game state, is expressed as a percentage (%) value. Is displayed. In the 7-segment display 300, a base other than the normal base (time-saving base, which is the ratio of the total number of time-saving prize balls acquired by the player in the time-saving state and the number of time-saving balls fired by the player in the time-saving state, jackpot game The jackpot base, which is the ratio of the total number of jackpot prize balls won by the player in the jackpot state and the number of jackpot shot balls fired by the player in the jackpot gaming state, is not displayed.

Here, the game control microcomputer 101 always counts the number of normal shot balls, the total number of normal prize balls, and the total number of shot balls. The total number of shot balls is the number of shot balls shot by the player in all game states (normal game state, jackpot game state, high probability base state, low probability height base state, etc.). The total number of shot balls is calculated by counting the detection of the outlet sensor by the game control microcomputer 101 . The normal number of shot balls is calculated by the game control microcomputer 101 counting the detection of the discharge port sensor only in the normal game state. The normal total number of prize balls is calculated by counting the number of prize balls paid out in the normal game state by the game control microcomputer 101 .

The information on the number of normal shot balls counted for display on the 7-segment display 300, the information on the total number of normal prize balls, and the information on the total number of shot balls are stored in the non-erasable storage section 107 (see FIG. 6) of the game RAM 104. reference) in a specific storage area (not shown). Therefore, even if the RAM is cleared, the information on the number of normal shot balls, the information on the total number of normal winning balls, and the information on the total number of shot balls are maintained (not erased). Thus, even if the RAM is cleared, the game control microcomputer 101 can calculate the normal base by using the normal number of shot balls when the power is cut off and the normal total number of prize balls when the power is cut off. Then, the game control microcomputer 101, regardless of the game state (normal game state, jackpot game state, high probability base state, low probability base state, etc.) It is displayed in the right two digits (the third display area 330 and the fourth display area 340 (see FIG. 9)).

Here, the normal base is calculated by dividing the total number of shot balls every 60000 shots. In other words, the normal base calculated from when the power is turned on for the first time after shipment from the factory until the total number of balls shot reaches 60,000 is the first normal base. After that, when the total number of balls shot exceeds 60,001, the initial normal base value is stored as the previous normal base value. The normal base calculated from 60,001 to 120,000 shots is the current normal base. After that, when the total number of shots exceeds 120,001, the normal base value of the previous round is stored as the normal base value of the previous round, and the current normal base value is stored as the normal base of the previous round. be. Then, the normal base calculated from 120,001 to 180,000 total shot balls becomes the current normal base.

After that, when the total number of shots exceeds 180,001, the value of the normal base 2 times before is stored as the normal base value 3 times before, and the value of the normal base value 1 time before is used as the normal base value 2 times before. stored, and the value that was the current normal base is stored as the previous normal base. Then, the normal base calculated when the total number of shot balls increased from 180,001 to 240,000 becomes the current normal base. After that, when the total number of shots exceeds 240,001, the value that was the normal base 3 times before is erased, the value that was the normal base 2 times before is stored as the normal base 3 times before, and the value that was the normal base 3 times before The value that was the normal base is stored as the normal base two times ago, and the value that was the current normal base is stored as the normal base one time ago. Then, the normal base calculated from 240,001 to 300,000 total shot balls becomes the current normal base. Thereafter, similarly, the normal base is calculated every 60,000 total shots, and the values of the normal base up to three times before are stored.

In this way, the game control microcomputer 101 stores the current normal base, the previous normal base, the two previous normal base, and the three previous normal base at the maximum in the non-erasing storage unit 107 of the game RAM 104. I can let you. In this case, the game control microcomputer 101, on the 7-segment display 300, the current normal base ⇒ 1st previous normal base ⇒ 2nd previous normal base, ⇒ 3rd previous normal base ⇒ current normal base 5 The display is switched every second.

Specifically, in the 7-segment display 300, when "bL" is displayed in the left two digits (the first display area 310 and the second display area 320 (see FIG. 9)), the right two digits (the third display area 330 and a fourth display area 340) display the current normal base. Therefore, a person who sees "bL" in the left two digits can understand that the value (normal base) shown in the right two digits is the current normal base.

Then, when 5 seconds have passed since the display of the current normal base started, the 7-segment display 300 displays "b1" in the left two digits and displays the previous normal base in the right two digits. be done. Therefore, a person who sees "b1" in the left two digits can understand that the value (normal base) indicated in the right two digits is the normal base one time before.

Then, when five seconds have passed since the display of the previous normal base started, the 7-segment display 300 shows "b2" in the left two digits and the two previous normal base in the right two digits. is displayed. Therefore, a person who sees "b2" in the left two digits can understand that the value (normal base) indicated in the right two digits is the normal base two times before.

Then, when 5 seconds have passed since the display of the normal base two times before was started, the 7-segment display 300 shows "b3" in the left two digits and the normal base three times ago in the right two digits. is displayed. Therefore, a person who sees "b3" in the left two digits can understand that the value (normal base) indicated in the right two digits is the normal base three times before.

Then, when 5 seconds have passed since the display of the normal base three times before was started, as described above, the 7-segment display 300 displays "bL" in the left two digits and the current display in the right two digits. is displayed and so on.

Also, on the 7-segment display 300, if the total number of shot balls has been 300 or less since the power was turned on for the first time after shipment from the factory, "--" is displayed in the right two digits. That is, when the total number of shot balls is 300 or less, the normal base value is not displayed, and when the total number of shot balls exceeds 300, the normal base value is displayed. In this way, when the total number of shot balls is 300 or less, the value of the normal base denominator (the number of normal shot balls) is too small to avoid displaying the unreliable normal base value. there is Even if the total number of shot balls is 300 or less, the left two digits of the 7-segment display 300 repeat the display of "bL" ⇒ "b1" ⇒ "b2" ⇒ "b3" every 5 seconds. .

Also, in the 7-segment display 300, when the number of normal shots has been 6000 or less since the power was turned on for the first time after shipment from the factory, the left two digits indicate "bL", "b1", "b2", and "b3". ” flashes. After that, when the number of normal shot balls exceeds 6000 after the power is turned on for the first time after shipment from the factory, "bL", "b1", "b2", and "b3" indicated by the left two digits are lit. In this way, when the person who confirms the normal base on the 7-segment display 300 is shown the blinking mode of the left two digits, the normal base value indicated by the right two digits has not yet sufficiently converged. It is possible to have the user grasp that the value is not a value. In other words, when the lighting mode is shown in the left two digits to a person who checks the normal base, the value of the normal base shown in the right two digits is a value that converges to some extent. It is possible to

Also, in the 7-segment display 300, when the setting mode is entered after the power is turned on, the setting value (“1”) is displayed in the fourth display area 340. FIG. After that, when the setting key cylinder 180 is rotated from the rotating position to the standby position, the setting mode is terminated and the setting value (“1”) is no longer displayed in the fourth display area 340 . Thus, the setting value is displayed in the fourth display area 340 of the 7-segment display 300 only while the setting mode is set.

Also, in the 7-segment display 300, an initial display is performed after the power is turned on until the display of the normal base is started. As described above, when the setting mode is entered after the power is turned on, the initial display is performed after the setting mode ends. In the initial display on the 7-segment display 300, all the lighting portions LB1 to LB32 (see FIG. 9) included in the first display area 310 to the fourth display area 340 are lit. That is, the 7-segment display 300 indicates "8.8.8.8.". In this way, the 7-segment display 300 performs an initial display immediately after the power is turned on, indicating that the 7-segment display 300 operates normally.

<Over-prizing prevention function>
Next, the over-prize prevention function in the pachinko game machine of the third embodiment will be described. In the pachinko game machine of the third embodiment, the game control microcomputer 101 can activate the over-prize preventing function so as not to award excessive prize balls to the player. Specifically, the over-prized ball prevention function is a function that makes the game unexecutable on the condition that the difference number of balls is 80000 (reference number) or more. Here, the difference number of balls (specific count number) is the difference between the total number of prize balls and the total number of shot balls. The total number of prize balls is the number of prize balls that the player acquires (pays out to the player) in all game states (normal game state, jackpot game state, high probability high base state, low probability high base state, etc.) is. The total number of prize balls means the total number of prize balls that the game control microcomputer 101 plans to put out to the player, but it means the total number of prize balls actually paid out to the player. can be The total number of shot balls is the number of shot balls shot by the player in all game states, as described above.

The game control microcomputer 101 counts the total number of prize balls at any time after the power is turned on, and the information on the counted total number of prize balls is provided in the non-erasing storage section 107 of the game RAM 104. It is stored in the total prize number storage unit 107a (see FIG. 6). In addition, the game control microcomputer 101 counts the total number of shot balls at any time after the power is turned on, and the information on the counted total number of shot balls is stored in the non-erasing storage section 107 of the game RAM 104. is stored in the total shot ball number storage unit 107b (see FIG. 6). Then, the game control microcomputer 101 subtracts the total number of fired balls from the total number of prize balls at any time after the power is turned on to calculate the difference number of balls, and the information on the calculated difference number of balls is It is stored in the difference number storage section 107c (see FIG. 6) provided in the non-erase storage section 107 of the RAM 104 for use.

Therefore, even if the RAM is cleared, the game control microcomputer 101 does not erase the information on the total number of winning balls, the information on the total number of shot balls, and the information on the number of difference balls stored in the non-erasing storage unit 107. . In this way, the game control microcomputer 101 can calculate the number of difference balls across dates using the total number of prize balls at the time of power cutoff and the total number of shot balls at the time of power cutoff. The game control microcomputer 101 treats the difference number of balls as a negative value when the value of the total number of shot balls is larger than the value of the total number of prize balls.

In this embodiment, when the over-prize ball prevention function is activated, the game control microcomputer 101 not only stops the game control process (the process of steps S102 to S108 described later, see FIG. 54), but also shoots a game ball. The firing control process (process of step S109 to be described later, see FIG. 54) is also stopped. Therefore, the player can immediately notice that the game cannot be played because the game ball is not shot even if the handle 72k is rotated. In addition, when the over-prize preventing function is activated, the game control microcomputer 101 stops the game control processing, and stops receiving signals corresponding to the detection contents from the various sensors MS, and displays 8 and 7 segments. The display control of the indicator 300 is no longer executed, the various actuators MA are no longer operated, and the outer end signal is no longer output to the external terminal plate 160 via the payout control board 170 .

After the over-prize preventing function is activated, the state in which the game cannot be played continues until the power is cut off. In this embodiment, the over-prize prevention function is canceled on condition that the RAM is cleared. In other words, after the over-prize prevention function is activated, the employee of the game parlor cuts off the power by turning off the power switch 193 . The employee of the game arcade presses the RAM clear switch 191 when turning on the power switch 193 to turn on the power. As a result, the game control microcomputer 101 can execute the game control process and the launch control process related to the game by executing the RAM clear. Thus, in this embodiment, after the over-prize preventing function is activated, the game cannot be restarted only by turning the power OFF and ON (returning on), and the game can be restarted by executing the RAM clear. can.

Next, the timing at which the over-prized ball prevention function operates will be described with reference to FIG. The over-prized ball prevention function is activated when the advantageous game state advantageous to the player is shifted to the normal game state on condition that the number of difference balls is 80000 or more. In other words, at the timing when the difference number of balls reaches 80000, the over-prized ball prevention function does not necessarily operate. In this form, the advantageous gaming state is a high-probability base state after a big win game or a low-probability base state after a big win game.

For example, it is assumed that the difference ball number reaches 70000 in the middle of the jackpot gaming state shown in FIG. 48(A). Of course, at this time, the over-prize preventing function does not operate. Next, it is assumed that the difference ball number reaches 80000 in the middle of the jackpot gaming state shown in FIG. 48(B). At this time, the over-prize preventing function does not operate. Subsequently, even at the timing of shifting from the big winning game state to the high-probability/high-base state, the over-prize preventing function does not operate. After that, as shown in FIG. 48(C), when it comes to the timing of shifting from the high-probability-high base state to the normal game state, the over-prize preventing function is activated. In this way, in this form, the game does not stop in the middle of the jackpot game state or the middle of the high-probability-high base state, and the game can be ended at a good timing for the player to end the advantageous game state. It is possible.

In this embodiment, information on the number of difference balls is stored in the number of difference number storage unit 107c of the non-erasing storage unit 107, and the number of difference number is not reset (cleared) by turning the power OFF and ON. As described above, even if the RAM is cleared when the power is turned on, the number of difference balls is not reset. This is based on the following reasons.

In the pachinko machine of the third embodiment, there are situations where the power is turned off and on (reconnected) or the RAM is cleared due to a bug, failure, serious fraud, or the like, even during business hours. In such a situation, if the number of difference balls is reset by turning on the power again or clearing the RAM, the provision of the over-prize preventing function would be meaningless. In other words, if a bug, malfunction, or serious fraud occurs, the player who restarts the game after that may receive an unfair advantage that the over-prized balls prevention function will not operate easily. Therefore, in this embodiment, in order to prevent the player from receiving the above-described unfair advantage, turning on the power again or clearing the RAM does not reset the difference ball number.

Next, conditions for resetting the number of difference balls will be described with reference to FIG. In this form, there are two reset conditions for resetting the number of difference balls. The first reset condition is that the special reset switch 181 is pushed down as shown in FIG. 49(A). That is, when the game control microcomputer 101 receives a signal based on pressing operation of the special reset switch 181, it clears the difference number information stored in the difference number storage section 107c of the non-erasing storage section 107. do. In addition, when the information on the number of difference balls stored in the number of difference balls storage unit 107c is reset (cleared), the information on the number of total prize balls and the total number of prize balls stored in the total number of prize balls storage unit 107a The information on the total number of shot balls stored in the number-of-shot-balls storage unit 107b is also reset, but hereinafter, this is simply referred to as "resetting (clearing) the number of difference balls". In addition, in FIG. 49(A), when the special reset switch 181 is pressed down in the customer waiting state, the number of difference balls is reset. However, when the special reset switch 181 is pressed, the difference ball number is reset.

The second reset condition is that the customer waiting state continues for one hour (predetermined time), as shown in FIG. 49(A). That is, if the game is not played for one hour after shifting to the customer waiting state, the game control microcomputer 101 deletes the information on the difference number of balls stored in the difference number of balls storage section 107c of the non-erasing storage section 107. clear. The customer waiting state is a game state in which the game is not executed and the special symbols are stopped and displayed.

The above two reset conditions are provided for the following reasons. For example, as shown in FIGS. 49(A) and 49(B), it is assumed that the difference ball number reaches 70000 in the jackpot game state by a certain player's game. After that, when a certain player shifts from the jackpot game state to the normal game state through the high probability/high base state, the game is finished. In this case, if the number of remaining balls increases slightly (within 10000), the over-prize preventing function can be activated for the player who starts the next game, which is very disadvantageous.

Therefore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 49A, pressing the special reset switch 181 resets the difference ball number. As a result, the employee of the game hall can press the special reset switch 181 at an arbitrary timing after finishing the game of a certain player to reset the number of difference balls. Also, as shown in FIG. 49(B), if the customer waiting state continues for one hour, it is determined that the player has finished the game, and the difference number of balls is automatically reset. As a result, it is possible to reset the difference number of balls without imposing an operation burden for the reset on the employee of the game arcade. Thus, by providing the above two reset conditions, it is possible to prevent the player who starts the next game from being extremely disadvantageous because the over-prize prevention function is activated immediately after starting the game. It is possible.

Next, an effect mode when the over-prized ball prevention function operates will be described with reference to FIG. 50(A). When the over-prize prevention function operates, as shown in FIG. 50(A), the red background image RE is displayed on the display unit 50a, and "Error X, over-prize error, please clear the RAM." is displayed. Also, a game stop sound is output from the speaker 52 . Further, all the frame lamps 53 are lit in white, and all the board lamps 54 are extinguished. Thus, the effect mode shown in FIG. 50(A) enables the player to immediately recognize the situation in which the game cannot be executed. Note that the presentation mode shown in FIG. 50(A) continues until the power is cut off. The presentation mode shown in FIG. 50(A) is canceled when the RAM is cleared, but is continued as it is only by turning on the power again.

Here, in the pachinko game machine of the third embodiment, the case when illegal magnetism is detected will be described. When the magnetic sensor detects illegal magnetism, the magnetic sensor outputs a signal corresponding to the magnetic detection to the main control board 100 . As a result, the game control microcomputer 101 stops the game control process and the shooting control process related to the game, in the same way as when activating the over-prize preventing function. In this way, the state in which the game cannot be played due to the magnetism detection continues until the power is cut off. However, in this case, unlike the case where the over-prize preventing function is activated, the game control microcomputer 101 executes the game control process and the launch control process related to the game by turning the power OFF and ON (turning on the power again). can do.

Next, an effect mode when illegal magnetism is detected will be described with reference to FIG. 50(B). When the magnetic sensor detects an illegal magnetism, as shown in FIG. 50(B), the display unit 50a displays a red background image RE and "Error 1: Abnormal magnetism detection. Turn on the power again. please” is displayed. Also, a game stop sound is output from the speaker 52 . Further, all the frame lamps 53 are lit in white, and all the board lamps 54 are extinguished. In this way, when the performance mode when the over-prize ball prevention function is activated (see FIG. 50(A)) and the performance mode when illegal magnetism is detected (see FIG. 50(B)), the cancellation method Other than the images, they are the same. Therefore, the employee or the player of the game hall is made to recognize that the game cannot be executed both when the illegal magnetism is detected and when the over-prize preventing function is activated. can be made easier.

Next, an effect mode when the difference ball number reaches 70000 will be described with reference to FIG. 51(A). As a precondition, it is assumed that the difference ball number reaches 70000 at the timing shown in FIG. 48(A). First, as shown in FIG. 51(A), a round image G109 and a number-of-balls image G110 are displayed on the display section 50a. Then, when the number of difference balls reaches 70000, a purple edge image EFa is displayed at the edge of the display section 50a, and an overpayment indicating "abnormal overpayment with 10000 remaining shots" at the bottom of the display section 50a. A ball notice image KY is displayed. By displaying the purple edge image EFa and the over-prize notice image KY, it is possible for the player to grasp the situation in which the over-prize prevention function is about to be activated. The display of the purple edge image EFa is continued even after the jackpot game state is over, but the display of the over-prize ball foretelling image KY is finished when the jackpot game state is finished. It should be noted that the over-prize ball preview image KY may continue to be displayed even after the jackpot gaming state ends.

Next, an effect mode when the difference ball number reaches 80000 will be described with reference to FIG. 51(B). As a precondition, it is assumed that the difference ball number reaches 80000 at the timing shown in FIG. 48(B). As shown in FIG. 51(B), the display section 50a displays a round image G109 and a number-of-balls image G110. Then, when the number of difference balls reaches 80000, a red edge image EFb is displayed at the edge of the display section 50a, and a game stop notice image KH indicating "stop the game at the end of the rush" at the bottom of the display section 50a. is displayed. By displaying the red edge image EFb and the game stop notice image KH, it is possible for the player to know when the game is about to stop and when the game will be stopped. The display of the red edge image EFb is continued even after the jackpot game state ends, but the display of the game stop notice image KH is finished when the jackpot game state ends. It should be noted that the game stop notice image KH may be kept displayed even after the jackpot game state ends.

Here, after the number of difference balls reaches 70000 at the timing shown in FIG. 48(A), the effect mode in the high probability/high base state is as shown in FIG. 52(A). That is, as shown in FIG. 52(A), the probability variation background image G105 is displayed on the display section 50a, and the effect symbol EZ is variably displayed. A purple edge image EFa is displayed at the edge of the display section 50a. This purple-rimmed image EFa allows the player to play while understanding that the number of difference balls has reached 70,000.

Also, after the difference ball number reaches 80000 at the timing shown in FIG. 48(B), the effect mode in the high probability/high base state is as shown in FIG. 52(B). That is, as shown in FIG. 52(B), the probability variation background image G105 is displayed on the display section 50a, and the effect symbol EZ is variably displayed. A red edge image EFb is displayed at the edge of the display section 50a. This red edge image EFb allows the player to play while understanding that the number of difference balls has reached 80,000.

Next, as shown in FIG. 49(A), a description will be given of an effect mode when the difference ball number is reset by pressing the special reset switch 181. FIG. In this case, an employee of the game arcade opens the front door 23 with respect to the outer frame 22 and presses down the special reset switch 181 . Therefore, the front door open sensor detects the opening of the front door 23, and the error canceling method image ER2 indicating "Error 2, please close the front door" is displayed on the display unit 50a as shown in FIG. 53(A). is displayed. At this time, a difference ball number reset notification image CLS indicating "the difference ball number has been reset" is displayed in the lower part of the display section 50a. As a result, it is possible for the employee of the game hall to understand that the difference number of balls has been reset.

Next, as shown in FIG. 49(B), a description will be given of an effect mode when the customer waiting state continues for one hour. In this case, the customer waiting demonstration video G100 is displayed on the display section 50a. At this time, a difference ball number reset notification image CLS indicating "the difference ball number has been reset" is displayed in the lower part of the display section 50a. As a result, it is possible for the employee of the game hall to understand that the number of difference balls has been reset.

<Operation of the game control microcomputer in the third embodiment>
Next, the operation of the game control microcomputer 101 in the third embodiment will be described. In the third embodiment, the game control microcomputer 101 executes what is shown in FIG. 54 as main side timer interrupt processing (S005).

[Main Side Timer Interrupt Processing] The main side timer interrupt processing (S005) in the third embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 54, in the main timer interrupt process (S005), it is first determined whether or not the game stop flag is ON (S101). The game stop flag is turned on when the over-prize preventing function is activated. If the game stop flag is ON (YES in S101), the processing of steps S102 to S113 is passed. This makes the game unexecutable. On the other hand, if the game stop flag is OFF (NO in S101), the processing of steps S102 to S113 is executed. That is, it is in a playable state.

In addition, in the power-on process (S001) of the main control main process (FIG. 25), the game stop flag is switched to OFF when the RAM clear is executed in the ON state. On the other hand, the game stop flag remains ON unless the RAM clear is executed while it is ON. That is, the state of the game stop flag does not change only by turning on the power again. In this way, whether or not the game is restarted is determined depending on whether or not the RAM clear is executed after the game stop flag is turned ON by the operation of the over-prize preventing function.

When the game stop flag is OFF in step S101, an input process (S102) to be described later is executed. Then, after performing the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S103), the sensor detection process (S104), and the normal operation process (S105), the later-described difference ball number measurement process (S106), the later-described special operation process ( S107) is executed. Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 executes a distribution device control process (S108), and executes a launch control process (S109) for controlling launch of game balls. By executing the shooting control process (S109), the player can shoot the game ball by rotating the handle 72k. On the other hand, if the shooting control process (S109) is not executed, the game ball cannot be shot even if the player rotates the handle 72k.

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 executes a 7-segment display control process (S110) for controlling the display of the 7-segment display device 300. FIG. Next, an error process (S111) is executed to determine an error (illegal) due to magnetic detection, an error due to opening of the front door 23 or the front frame 23m, and the like. In the error processing (S111), it is determined whether or not the magnetic sensor has detected incorrect magnetism. Then, a magnetic sensor command is generated according to the result of the processing. Further, in the error processing (S111), it is determined whether or not the front door 23 or the front frame 23m is opened by the front door open sensor or the front frame sensor. Then, a frame opening command is generated according to the result of the processing.

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 performs output processing (S112), which will be described later, and executes other processing (S113). Then, the game control microcomputer 101 executes a power interruption monitoring process (S114) when the power supply is cut off, and ends this process. In the power failure monitoring process (S114), when the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the power supply is cut off due to the drop in the monitoring voltage, the game information, the information on the total number of winning balls, the information on the total number of shot balls, the number of difference balls, etc. information, game stop flag information, and the like are stored in a predetermined storage area of the game RAM 104 . After that, prohibition of access to the game RAM 104 is set.

[Input Processing] As shown in FIG. 55, in the input processing (S102), first, it is determined whether or not the special reset switch 181 is ON, that is, whether or not a signal based on the depression of the special reset switch 181 is received. (S201). If not ON (NO in S201), proceed to step S204. On the other hand, if it is ON (YES in S201), non-erase clear processing is executed (S202). In the non-erasing clear process (S202), the information on the total number of prize balls stored in the total number of prize balls storage unit 107a, the information on the total number of shot balls stored in the total number of shot balls storage unit 107b, and the number of difference balls The information on the difference number of balls stored in the storage unit 107c is cleared. Note that even if the non-erase clearing process (S202) is executed, the information on the total number of shot balls stored in the specific storage area (not shown) of the non-erase storage unit 107 is not cleared. This is because the information on the total number of shot balls is used for display on the 7-segment display 300 as described above.

Following step S202, a non-erase clear command is set in the output buffer of game RAM 104 (S203), and the process proceeds to step S204. In this way, when the non-erase clear command is transmitted to the sub-control board 120, as shown in FIG. In step S204, other processes are executed and the process ends. In other processing (S204), the game control microcomputer 101 takes in, for example, a detection signal from the lower tray full switch for detecting the fullness of the lower tray 35, and stores it in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 as lower tray full data. .

[Difference Number of Balls Counting Process] As shown in FIG. 56, in the difference number of balls measurement process (S106), first, the total number of prize balls count process for counting the total number of prize balls to be paid out to the player is executed (S301). Information on the counted total number of prize balls is stored in the total number of prize balls storage unit 107a (see FIG. 6). Next, based on the detection by the outlet sensor, the total number of shot balls is counted (S302). Information on the counted total number of shot balls is stored in the total number of shot balls storage section 107b (see FIG. 6). Then, the total number of shot balls is subtracted from the total number of prize balls, and the number of difference balls is calculated (S303). Information on the calculated number of difference balls is stored in the number of difference number storage unit 107c (see FIG. 6).

Subsequently, in step S304, it is determined whether or not the over-prize ball notice flag is OFF. The over-prize notice flag indicates that the number of difference balls is 70000 or more. If it is ON (NO in S304), proceed to step S308. On the other hand, if it is OFF (YES in S304), it is determined whether or not the difference number is 70000 or more (S305). If it is less than 70000 (NO in S305), proceed to step S308. On the other hand, if it is 70000 or more (YES in S305), the over-prize ball notice flag is turned ON (S306), and the over-prize ball notice command is set in the output buffer of the game RAM104. As a result, when the over-prize ball notification command is transmitted to the sub-control board 120, as shown in FIG. .

Subsequently, in step S308, it is determined whether or not the over-prize flag is OFF. The over-prize flag indicates that the number of difference balls is 80000 or more. If it is ON (NO in S308), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is OFF (YES in S308), it is determined whether or not the difference number is 80000 or more (S309). If the number is less than 80000 (NO in S309), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is 80000 or more (YES in S309), the over-prize flag is turned ON (S310). Then, the over-prize ball notification command is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 (S312), and this process is finished. As a result, when the over-prized ball notification command is transmitted to the sub-control board 120, the red edge image EFb and the game stop notice image KH are displayed on the display section 50a as shown in FIG. 51(B).

[Special Action Processing] As shown in FIG. 57, in the special action processing (S107), the processing relating to the special figure display 81 and the big winning device (first big winning device 14D, second big winning device 15D) is divided into four stages. and assigns "special action status 1, 2, 3, 4" to each of those stages. Then, when the "special action status" is "1" (YES in S1301), the game control microcomputer 101 makes a special symbol standby including processing such as performing a jackpot determination and starting variable display of special symbols. Processing (S1302) is performed, and when the "special action status" is "2" (NO in S1301, YES in S1303), special design fluctuation processing including processing such as stopping display of special design (S1304) If the "special action status" is "3" (NO in both S1301 and S1303, YES in S1305), a special symbol determination process (S1306) including processing such as shifting the game state is performed, If the "special action status" is "4" (S1301, S1303, S1305 are all NO), special electric accessary product processing (S1307) including processing such as opening the big winning opening is performed. Note that the special operation status is "1" by default.

[Special Symbol Standby Processing] As shown in FIG. 58, in the special symbol standby processing (S1302), first, whether or not the number of reserved balls of the second starting port 12 (that is, the number of special figure 2 reserved balls) is "0". is determined (S1401). If the special figure 2 reserved ball number is "0" (YES in S1401), that is, if there is no memory of the random number counter value group acquired due to the winning of the second start port 12, the first start It is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls of mouth 11 (that is, the number of reserved balls of special figure 1) is "0" (S1407). And, if the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is also "0" (YES in S1407), that is, if there is no memory of the random number counter value group acquired due to the winning of the first start port 11, the customer It is determined whether or not the wait flag is ON (S1416). The customer waiting flag indicates that the customer is waiting. If it is ON (YES in S1416), a customer waiting measurement process, which will be described later, is executed (S1419), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is OFF (NO at S1416), the customer waiting command is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 (S1417), the customer waiting flag is turned ON (S1418), and this processing ends.

In step S1401, if the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is not "0" (NO in S1401), that is, the storage of the random number counter value group acquired due to the winning of the second start port 12 (special figure 2 reservation information ), if there is one or more, special figure 2 jackpot determination processing (S1402) and special figure 2 variation pattern selection processing (S1403) are performed. After that, the game control microcomputer 101 decrements the number of special figure 2 reserved balls by 1 (S1404). Then, the storage location (storage area) of the various counter values in the special figure 2 reservation storage unit 105b is shifted by one to the side to be read from the current position, and the special figure 2 reservation storage unit 105b corresponds to the first reservation Clear the storage area to be used (S1405). Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 executes special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (S1406), and proceeds to step S1413. In the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S1406), while setting the special operation status to "2", the fluctuation start command is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104, and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is started. In addition, the variation start command (also called the special figure 2 variation start command) set in the special figure 2 variation start process (S1406) includes the special figure stop design data set in the special figure 2 jackpot determination process (S1402) Information and information of the variation pattern set in the special figure 2 variation pattern selection process (S1403) (information including information on variation time) is included.

Also, if the number of special 2 reserved balls is "0" but the number of special 1 reserved balls is not "0" (YES in S1401 and NO in S1407), that is, there is no reservation information of special 2, If there is one or more memories of the random number counter value group acquired due to the winning of the 1 start port 11 (reservation information of special figure 1), special figure 1 jackpot determination processing (S1408) and special figure 1 fluctuation Pattern selection processing (S1409) is performed. After that, the game control microcomputer 101 decrements the number of special figure 1 reserved balls by 1 (S1410). Then, the storage location (storage area) of various counter values in the special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a is shifted by one to the side read from the current position, and the special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a corresponds to the fourth reservation Clear the storage area (storage area farthest from the read side) (S1411). In this way, the first special figure reservation is digested in the order in which it was reserved. Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 executes special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (S1412), and proceeds to step S1413. In the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S1412), while setting the special operation status to "2", the fluctuation start command is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104, and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is started. In addition, the variation start command (also called the special figure 1 variation start command) set in the special figure 1 variation start process (S1412) is the special figure stop pattern data set in the special figure 1 jackpot determination process (S1408) Information and information (information including information on fluctuation time) of the fluctuation pattern set in the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection process (S1409) is included.

When proceeding to step S1413, it is determined whether or not the customer waiting flag is ON, and if it is ON, the customer waiting flag is turned OFF (S1414). Then, a customer waiting counter clearing process for clearing (resetting) the value of the customer waiting counter to "0" is executed (S1415), and this process ends. The customer waiting counter is provided in the game RAM 104 and is used to measure the duration of the customer waiting state. It should be noted that the value of the customer waiting counter is cleared when the power is turned on again regardless of whether or not the RAM clear is executed.

[Customer Waiting Measuring Process] As shown in FIG. 59, in the customer waiting measuring process (S1419), first, a customer waiting counter increasing process for increasing the value of the customer waiting counter is executed (S1420). As a result, the game control microcomputer 101 can grasp the duration of the customer waiting state based on the value of the customer waiting counter. Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the customer waiting state has continued for one hour or more. If it is determined not to continue (NO in S1421), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it continues (YES in S1421), the non-erase clear process is executed (S1422) as in the process of step S202 described above (see FIG. 55). As a result, the information on the total number of prize balls stored in the total number of prize balls storage unit 107a, the information on the total number of shot balls stored in the total number of shot balls storage unit 107b, and the information on the total number of shot balls stored in the difference number storage unit 107c are stored. Information on the number of difference balls is cleared.

Subsequently, a non-erasing clear command is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 (S1423), and this process is finished. Thus, when the non-erase clear command is transmitted to the sub-control board 120, as shown in FIG. 53(B), the difference ball number reset notification image CLS is displayed in the lower part of the display section 50a.

[Special symbol determination process] As shown in FIG. 60, in the special symbol determination process (S1306), first, the special symbol stop time (stop time determined according to the special symbol variation pattern selected in step S1403 or S1409) has elapsed. It is determined whether or not (S1901). If it has not passed (NO in S1901), this process is terminated immediately. As a result, the stop display of the special symbols is continued. On the other hand, if the stop time has elapsed (YES in S1901), a game state management process, which will be described later, is performed (S1902).

Next, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (S1903). If the jackpot flag is ON (YES in S1903), an opening pattern corresponding to the type of jackpot won is set (S1904). At this time, the value of a round counter that counts the number of unit open games (round games) executed during the jackpot game is set to the number of rounds corresponding to the type of jackpot won. Note that the setting of the release pattern (the set of data corresponding to the release pattern) may be performed for each round.

After step S1904, the game control microcomputer 101 performs game state reset processing (S1905). In the game state reset process (S1905), if the probability variation flag is ON, the probability variation flag is turned OFF, and if the time saving flag is ON, it is turned OFF. In other words, during execution of the jackpot game, it is controlled to the normal probability state and non-time saving state. After that, in order to start the jackpot game, a jackpot opening command is set (S1906), and the opening of the jackpot game is started (S1907). Then, the special action status is set to "4" (S1908), and this processing ends.

Also, if the jackpot flag is not ON in step S1903 (NO in S1903), the jackpot game is not started, so the special action status is set to "1" (S1909), and this process ends.

[Playing State Management Processing] As shown in FIG. 61, in the playing state management processing (S1902), first, it is determined whether or not the variable probability flag is ON (S2001). If it is ON (YES in S2001), the value of the probability variation counter that counts the number of variations of the special symbols executed during the high probability state is decreased by 1 (S2002), and whether the value of the probability variation counter is "0" Judge (S2003). If it is "0" (YES in S2003), the variable probability flag is turned OFF (S2004), and the process proceeds to step S2005. If the determination result of step S2001 or S2003 is NO, the process immediately proceeds to step S2005.

In step S2005, it is determined whether or not the time saving flag is ON. If it is ON (YES in S2005), the value of the time saving counter that counts the number of variations of the special symbols executed during the time saving state is decreased by 1 (S2006), and it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter is "0". (S2007). If it is "0" (YES in S2007), turn off the time saving flag (S2008) and proceed to step S2009. If the determination result of step S2005 or S2007 is NO, the process proceeds to step S2012.

In step S2009, it is determined whether or not the over-prize flag is ON. That is, it is determined whether or not the difference ball number is 80000 or more. If the over prize ball flag is not ON (NO in S2009), the process proceeds to step S2012. On the other hand, if the over prize ball flag is ON (YES in S2009), the game stop flag is turned ON (S2010), and the process proceeds to step S2011. In this way, when the difference ball number is 80000 or more and the high-probability high base state or the low-probability low base state ends, the game becomes unexecutable.

In step S2011, the game stop notification command is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104, and the process proceeds to step S2012. As a result, when the game stop notification command is transmitted to the sub-control board 120, the red background image RE and the error cancellation method image ERX are displayed on the display section 50a as shown in FIG. 50(A). Also, a game stop sound is output from the speaker 52 . Further, all the frame lamps 53 are lit in white, and all the board lamps 54 are extinguished.

In step S2012, the game state specifying command including information on the current game state (information on whether the variable probability flag and the time saving flag are ON or OFF), information on the value of the variable probability counter and the value of the time saving counter, etc. The data is set in the output buffer of the RAM 104, and this processing ends.

[Output Processing] As shown in FIG. 62, in the output processing (S112), outer end signal output processing, which will be described later, is executed (S3001). Subsequently, as other output processing (S3002), commands set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 in each processing described above are output to the sub control board 120 and the payout control board 170, and this processing ends.

[Outer End Signal Output Processing] As shown in FIG. 63, in the outer end signal output processing (S3001), it is determined whether or not the over-prize notice flag is ON (S3101). That is, it is determined whether or not the number of difference balls has reached 70,000. If the over-prize ball notice flag is not ON (NO in S3101), the process proceeds to step S3103. On the other hand, if the over-prize ball notice flag is ON (YES in S3101), the outer end signal output process for over-prize ball notice is executed (S3102), and the process proceeds to step S3102. In the outer end signal output process for overly prized ball notice (S3102), the main control board 100 outputs an outer end signal indicating that the number of difference balls has reached 70000 (hereinafter referred to as "outer end signal for overly awarded ball notice"). , is transmitted to the external terminal board 160 via the payout control board 170 . As a result, the external terminal plate 160 transmits the over-prize-notice outer end signal to the external unit GU (data counter, hall computer, etc.) by parallel communication. As a result, an employee of the game parlor who is monitoring the hall computer is informed of a situation in which the over-prize prevention function can be activated when the number of remaining balls increases slightly (within 10000) in the pachinko machine of the third embodiment. It is possible to comprehend.

In step S3103, it is determined whether or not the over-prize flag is ON. That is, it is determined whether or not the number of difference balls has reached 80,000. If the over prize ball flag is not ON (NO in S3103), the process proceeds to step S3105. On the other hand, if the over-prize ball flag is ON (YES in S3103), an over-prize ball outer end signal output process is executed (S3104), and the process proceeds to step S3105. In the over-prize ball outer end signal output process (S3104), an outer end signal (hereinafter referred to as "over-prize ball outer end signal") indicating that the number of difference balls has reached 80000 is paid out from the main control board 100. It is transmitted to the external terminal board 160 via the control board 170 . As a result, the external terminal plate 160 transmits the over-prize-ball announcement outer end signal to the external unit GU by parallel communication. As a result, an employee of the game parlor who is monitoring the hall computer is told that the number of difference balls has reached 80000 in the pachinko game machine of the third embodiment and that the high-probability-high base state or the low-probability-low base state ends. It is possible to make the player grasp the situation in which the game becomes unexecutable.

In step S3105, it is determined whether or not the game stop flag is ON. In other words, it is determined whether or not the game is in an unexecutable state. If the game stop flag is not ON (NO in S3107), the process proceeds to step S3107. On the other hand, if the game stop flag is ON (YES in S3105), an outer end signal output process for game stop is executed (S3106), and the process proceeds to step S3107. In the game stop outer end signal output process (S3106), the outer end signal (hereinafter referred to as "game stop outer end signal") indicating that the game has become unexecutable due to the operation of the over-prize preventing function is mainly It is transmitted from the control board 100 to the external terminal board 160 via the payout control board 170 . Thereby, the external terminal board 160 transmits the game stop outer end signal to the external unit GU by parallel communication. As a result, it is possible for the employee of the game parlor who is monitoring the hall computer to grasp the situation in which the pachinko game machine of the third embodiment has become unexecutable due to the operation of the over-prize preventing function. .

In step S3107, it is determined whether or not the non-erase clear processing shown in step S203 or the non-erase clear processing shown in step S1422 has been executed. That is, the information on the total number of prize balls stored in the total number of prize balls storage unit 107a, the information on the total number of shot balls stored in the total number of shot balls storage unit 107b, and the information stored in the difference storage unit 107c It is determined whether or not the information on the difference number of balls has been cleared. If the non-erase clear process has not been executed (NO in S3107), the process proceeds to step S3109. On the other hand, if the non-erase clear process has been executed (YES in S3107), the reset outer end signal output process is executed (S3108), and the process proceeds to step S3109. In the reset outer end signal output process (S3108), an outer end signal indicating that the number of difference balls has been reset (hereinafter referred to as "reset outer end signal") is sent from the main control board 100 via the payout control board 170. is transmitted to the external terminal board 160. Thereby, the external terminal board 160 transmits the resetting outer end signal to the external unit GU by parallel communication. As a result, it is possible for the employee of the game parlor who is monitoring the hall computer to grasp the situation in which the number of difference balls has been reset in the pachinko gaming machine of the third embodiment. A dedicated signal line is connected to the main control board 100, and through this dedicated signal line, an over-prize ball notice outer end signal, an over-prize ball outer end signal, and a game stop outer end signal , a reset outer end signal is transmitted from the main control board 100 to the external terminal board 160 via the payout control board 170 .

<Action and effect of the third embodiment>
As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine of the third embodiment, when the difference ball number is 80000 or more and the high-probability-high base state or the low-probability-low base state ends, the game becomes unexecutable. Therefore, for the player, the game is not suddenly stopped in the middle of the jackpot game state, or in the middle of the high-probability-high base state or the low-probability-high base state, and there is no particular big disadvantage. In this way, it is possible to provide the pachinko gaming machine of the third embodiment that does not award excessive prize balls while allowing the player to stop the game at a time when it is easy for the player to stop playing.

Further, according to the pachinko game machine of the third embodiment, when the difference ball number is 80000 or more and the high base state (high probability base state, low probability height base state) ends, the game becomes unexecutable. Therefore, it is possible for the player to stop the game after the end of the high base state and before the number of balls in his possession decreases. In other words, after the transition from the high base state to the normal game state, the total number of shot balls increases, and a situation can be assumed in which the difference number of balls becomes less than 80,000. Therefore, it is possible to stop the game at the timing when the high base state ends so that the above situation does not occur.

By the way, if a certain player stops playing before the number of difference balls reaches 80,000, and the number of difference balls becomes 80,000 or more immediately after the player who plays later starts playing, it will be a terrible situation. situation. Therefore, according to the pachinko gaming machine of the third embodiment, the measured number of difference balls is reset based on the establishment of the reset condition not triggered by turning on the power. Specifically, when the special reset switch 181 is pressed down, or when the customer waiting state continues for one hour, the difference number of balls is reset. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game from being stopped immediately after starting the game for the player who has played the game later, thereby preventing a serious situation from occurring.

Further, according to the pachinko game machine of the third embodiment, when the employee of the game hall presses down the RAM clear switch 191 when the power is turned on, game information (for example, game state information such as high probability state, special figure pending information such as the number of wins and the judgment result of the jackpot) is erased, but the information of the number of difference balls stored in the difference number storage unit 107c is not erased. Therefore, even if the game information must be deleted due to a problem or the like during business hours, it is possible not to delete the calculated difference number of balls.

Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine of the third embodiment, as described above, even if the RAM clear is executed, the measured difference ball number is not erased. However, when an employee of the game arcade presses the special reset switch 181, the measured difference ball number can be deleted. In this way, the employee of the game hall can delete the measured number of difference balls at any timing.

<Modified example of the third embodiment>
A modification of the third embodiment will be described below. In addition, in the description of the modified example of the third embodiment, the same reference numerals are given to the same configurations as those of the pachinko game machine of the third embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted. Of course, configurations according to modifications of the third embodiment may be combined as appropriate. Also, technical features in the third embodiment and its modifications can be deleted as appropriate unless they are described as essential in this specification. Further, the pachinko game machine PY1 of the first embodiment and its modifications, and the configuration included in the second embodiment and its modifications are the same as those of the third embodiment and its modifications to the extent that they do not interfere with the game. It can be adopted in a game machine grasped from the example.

In the third embodiment, it is configured as a so-called V certain machine (a gaming machine controlled to a high probability state based on the passage of the game ball to the specific area 16 (V area)), but based on the type of the winning jackpot symbol It may be configured as a gaming machine in which the transition to the high probability state is determined by In the third embodiment, the so-called ST machine (a game machine in which the high probability state ends according to the number of times the special symbol changes) is configured, but once controlled to the high probability state, the high probability state is reached until the next jackpot game starts. It may be configured as a game machine in which control to the probability state continues (so-called variable probability loop type machine) or a falling machine (a game machine in which the high probability state ends depending on the lottery result). Further, it may be configured as a game machine in which a small winning game is executed in which the big winning opening is opened for 1.8 seconds at maximum when a small winning is won in a lottery of special symbols. In this case, the gaming machine may be configured such that a big winning game (second type big winning game) is executed when a game ball entering the big winning opening by executing the small winning game passes through a specific area in the big winning opening. . A jackpot game (type 1 jackpot game) is executed when a jackpot is won in a special pattern lottery, and a jackpot game (type 2 jackpot game) is executed when a game ball passes through a specific area in the big winning opening. It may be configured as a two-type jackpot game.

In the third embodiment, the number of difference balls is 80000 or more, and when transitioning from the high-probability base state (advantageous game state) to the normal game state (see FIG. 48), or the low-probability base state (advantageous game state ) to the normal game state, the over-prize preventing function is activated. However, the over-prize prevention function may be activated not only when the advantageous game state shifts to the normal game state, but simply when the advantageous game state ends. For example, when moving from a high-probability base state (advantageous playing state) to a low-probability-high base state, or when shifting from a high-probability-high base state to a high-probability-low base state, the over-prize ball prevention function is activated. You can do it.

Also, for example, as shown in FIG. 64, it is assumed that there were 4 (predetermined number), which is the maximum number of special figures 2 reserved, when shifting from the high probability high base state to the normal game state. The lottery of the special figure 2 is executed with priority over the lottery of the special figure 1, and is set more advantageous to the player than the lottery of the special figure 1. - 特許庁In this case, when the high probability/high base state shifts to the normal game state, the lottery of the special figure 2 will be executed four times, and it can be said that the player is still in an advantageous state. Therefore, in this case, it is assumed that the game is in an advantageous game state until all the special figure 2 reserves (special figure 2 remaining reserves) remaining when shifting to the normal game state are consumed. Then, when the special figure 2 remaining reservation is all digested (when all the fluctuation display and stop display of the second special symbol based on the special figure 2 remaining reservation are completed), the over prize ball prevention function operates (game may be disabled) (see FIG. 64). In addition, the special figure 1 lottery is preferentially executed over the special figure 2 lottery, and the order in which the game ball wins the first start opening 11 or the second start opening 12 A lottery or a lottery of the special figure 2 may be executed.

In particular, it is a 1 type 2 type mixing machine, and when a small win is won in the lottery of special figure 2, a 2 type big win game is practically always executed (a game ball can pass through a specific area). 64, it is preferable that the over-prize ball prevention function operates when the special figure 2 remaining reservation is all digested in the normal game state, as shown in FIG. Even if it shifts from a high base state (time saving state) to a normal game state, it is because 2 types of jackpot games are very easy to be performed until all special figure 2 remaining reservation is digested. That is, if the game becomes unexecutable due to the actuation of the over-prize preventing function at the timing when the high base state ends, the chance of winning the second kind of jackpot game is lost, which makes it difficult for the player. It should be noted that the upper limit number of special figure 2 pending is not limited to four, for example, may be one, it can be changed as appropriate.

In the third embodiment, the timing at which the over-prize ball prevention function operates is when the high-probability-high base state ends or when the low-probability-high base state ends. However, the over-prize prevention function may be activated only when the high-probability/high-base state ends. In this case, it is possible to stop the game only when the so-called "rush state (continuous period)" ends. Also, for example, when the number of difference balls is 80,000 or more and the state shifts to the customer waiting state, or when the customer waiting state continues for a certain period of time, the over-prize preventing function may be activated. Further, for example, the number of extra balls may be 80000 or more, and the over-prize preventing function may be activated at the timing when the jackpot gaming state is finished. Further, for example, at the timing when the difference number of balls becomes 80000 or more, the over-prized ball prevention function may be activated.

In the third embodiment, the first reset condition (see FIG. 49A) that the special reset switch 181 (special operation means) is pressed down, or the second reset condition that the customer waiting state continues for one hour (predetermined time). When the second reset condition (see FIG. 49(B)) is established, the difference number of balls is reset (erased). However, the reset conditions are not limited to those described above, and can be changed as appropriate. For example, as described above, at the timing when the jackpot gaming state ends or when the number of difference balls reaches 80000 or more, when the over-prize prevention function is activated, as shown in FIG. When shifting from the guaranteed high base state (advantageous game state) to the normal game state, the difference ball number may be reset. In this case, the number of difference balls is reset when the so-called "rush state (continuous period)" ends, so only when the number of difference balls reaches 80000 (reference number) during the rush state in one time , it is possible to activate the over-prize ball prevention function. In addition to the high-probability-high base state and low-probability-high base state, when shifting from an advantageous game state such as a jackpot game state or a high-probability-low base state to a normal game state, the number of difference balls may be reset. . Further, the difference number may be reset by pressing the RAM clear switch 191 or rotating the setting key cylinder 180 .

Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 65(B), when the normal game state continues for a specific time (for example, 1 hour), the difference ball number may be reset. In this case, if the specific time (for example, one hour) continues in the normal game state, the situation advantageous to the player has not continued for a while. Therefore, in this case, by resetting the number of difference balls, it is possible to prevent the number of difference balls from reaching 80000 or more for a while. Note that the specific time described above is not limited to one hour, and can be changed as appropriate. Also, for example, when the number of variations of the special symbol reaches a specific number in the normal game state, the difference ball number may be reset. Further, for example, the difference ball number may be reset by turning the power OFF and ON (turning on the power again).

Further, for example, when the game control microcomputer 101 determines that it is a predetermined reference time (for example, 9:00 am), the number of difference balls may be reset. In this case, it is possible to automatically eliminate the difference number of balls without forcing the staff of the game hall to perform any operation. Note that the reference time described above is not limited to 9:00 am, and can be changed as appropriate.

In the third embodiment, a special reset switch 181 (special operating means) for resetting the number of difference balls is arranged on the main control board 100 (see FIG. 8). However, if a signal based on the operation of the special operation means is input to the game control microcomputer 101, the location of the special operation means for resetting the difference ball number can be changed as appropriate. Therefore, the special operation means may be arranged, for example, on the payout control board 170 or may be arranged on a dedicated board.

In the third embodiment, the measured difference number of balls was not displayed by the display means. However, the measured difference number of balls may be displayed by the display means. For example, the game control microcomputer 101 may display the measured difference ball number on the display device 8 (see FIG. 4) or the 7-segment display device 300 (see FIG. 9). In this case, for example, when the number of difference balls is 0 to 50000 (first range), the first mode is displayed on the display device 8 or 7 segment display 300, and the number of difference balls is 50001 to 70000. If it is (second range), display the second mode on the display device 8 or 7-segment display 300, and if the number of difference balls is 70001 to 80000 (third range), display The third mode may be displayed on the device 8 or 7 segment display 300 . Further, for example, the game control microcomputer 101 transmits information on the number of difference balls (or information on the number of total winning balls, information on the total number of shot balls) to the sub-control board 120, and the microcomputer 121 for effect control performs image display. A display means such as the device 50 may display the number of difference balls. Also, for example, the game control microcomputer 101 transmits to the sub-control board 120 information on the number of awarded balls paid out (or the number of awarded balls to be paid out) and information on detection of the outlet sensor. Then, the effect control microcomputer 121 may calculate the number of difference balls based on these pieces of information, and display the number of difference balls on display means such as the image display device 50 or the like.

Also, the game control microcomputer 101 may display the difference ball number on the 7-segment display 300 as in the modification shown in FIG. That is, in this modification, information on the number of difference balls is divided into four sections (predetermined sections) and stored in four storage areas of the number of difference number storage section 107c of the non-erased storage section 107, respectively. . In the first storage area, the number of difference balls up to the present time since the power was turned on this time is stored. In the second storage area, the difference number of balls from when the power was turned on last time (one time before) to when the power was cut off last time is stored. In the third storage area, the difference number of balls from when the power was turned on two times before (two times before) to when the power was cut off two times before is stored. In the 4th (N) storage area, the difference number of balls from when the power was turned on two last times (3 times before) to when the power was cut off two times before last is stored. In this way, each time the power is turned off and on, the measured ball difference number is shifted and stored, and the difference ball number stored in the fourth storage area is erased. It should be noted that the information on the difference number of balls stored in the first to fourth storage areas is not erased even if the RAM clear is executed.

Then, in this modification, the number of difference balls stored in the first storage area, the number of difference balls stored in the second storage area, the number of difference balls stored in the third storage area, 4 The number of difference balls stored in the th storage area is displayed in the right two digits (the third display area 330 and the fourth display area 340) of the 7-segment display 300 by switching in order in units of 1,000 balls. be. Specifically, the 7-segment display 300 displays, for example, "bL36" for 5 seconds as shown in FIG. 66(A). This indicates that the current normal base is 36%. Next, as shown in FIG. 66B, for example, "b134" is displayed for 5 seconds. This indicates that the normal base one time ago was 36%. Next, as shown in FIG. 66(C), for example, "b238" is displayed for 5 seconds. This indicates that the normal base two times ago was 38%. Next, as shown in FIG. 66(D), for example, "b235" is displayed for 5 seconds. This indicates that the normal base 3 times ago is 38%.

Subsequently, the 7-segment display 300 displays, for example, "cL20" for 5 seconds as shown in FIG. 66(E). As a result, it is indicated that the difference number of balls from the time when the power is turned on to the present time is 20000. Next, as shown in FIG. 66(F), for example, "c100" is displayed for 5 seconds. This indicates that the number of difference balls from the last time (one time before) when the power was turned on until the last time when the power was cut off is "0". When the number of difference balls is smaller than "0" because the total number of shot balls is larger than the total number of prize balls, "0" is displayed. Next, as shown in FIG. 66(G), for example, "c265" is displayed for 5 seconds. This indicates that the number of difference balls from the time the power was turned on the second time (two times before) until the power was cut off the time before last is 65,000. Next, as shown in FIG. 66(H), for example, "c348" is displayed for 5 seconds. This indicates that the number of difference balls from the time when the power was turned on two times before last (three times before) to when the power was turned off two times before last is 48,000. After that, FIGS. 66A to 66H are repeatedly displayed every 5 seconds.

In the modified example described above, each time the power is turned off and on (returned on), the measured number of difference balls is shifted and stored, and the number of difference balls stored in the 4th (N) storage area. is erased. However, each time the RAM is cleared, the measured ball difference number is shifted and stored, and the difference ball number stored in the 4th (N) storage area may be erased. . Alternatively, when the game control microcomputer determines that it is a predetermined specified time (for example, 9:00 am), the measured difference ball number is shifted and stored, and stored in the 4th (N) storage area. The difference number of balls that has been played may be deleted. It should be noted that N described above can be appropriately changed as long as it is a natural number of 2 or more.

In the modified example described above, as shown in FIG. 66, the 7-segment display 300 automatically switches the display of the difference ball number every 5 seconds. However, the display of the difference number may be switched by operating a predetermined operating means such as pressing the RAM clear switch 191 or rotating the setting key cylinder 180 . Further, the display of the normal base and the display of the number of difference balls may be switched by operating a predetermined operation means.

In the third embodiment, when the number of difference balls reaches 70000 (predetermined number), the performance mode shown in FIG. However, the effect mode indicating that the over-prized ball prevention function is approaching the operation is not limited to the effect mode shown in FIG. 51(A), and can be changed as appropriate. For example, a special sound from the speaker 52 (for example, "The number of balls is 70000") or a special light emission mode of the light emitting means such as the board lamp 54 and the frame lamp 53 are approaching the operation of the over-prize prevention function. may be shown. Further, as the number of difference balls increases, it may be indicated that the over-prize prevention function is approaching the operation by means of an effect mode that changes in multiple stages.

In the third embodiment, when the difference ball number reaches 80000 (reference number), the game can be stopped by the effect mode shown in FIG. 51(B). However, the presentation mode indicating a situation in which the game may be stopped is not limited to the presentation mode shown in FIG. 51(B), and can be changed as appropriate. For example, a special voice from the speaker 52 (for example, "The number of balls is 80,000") or a special light emitting mode of the board lamp 54, the frame lamp 53, or the like may be used to indicate a situation in which the game may be stopped. good.

In the third embodiment, when the over-prized ball prevention function is activated, the game cannot be executed due to the effect mode shown in FIG. 50(A). However, the effect mode indicating the state in which the game cannot be executed is not limited to the effect mode shown in FIG. 50(A), and can be changed as appropriate. For example, an image indicating "game cannot be executed" may be displayed on the display unit 50a, or a special sound (for example, "game cannot be executed") may be output from the speaker 52. FIG.

In the third embodiment, even if the RAM is cleared, the information on the number of difference balls stored in the number of difference number storage unit 107c is not erased. However, even if the information on the number of difference balls is stored in a predetermined storage area (erasing storage section) of the game RAM 104 and the information on the number of difference balls is cleared when the RAM is cleared. good. That is, the conditions for resetting the number of difference balls include the execution of RAM clearing, or the reset condition for resetting the number of difference balls is limited to the execution of RAM clearing. Also good.

In the third embodiment, when the over-prize ball prevention function is activated, the game control microcomputer 101 not only stops the game control processing related to the game (processing of steps S102 to S108, see FIG. 54), but also shoots the game ball. The firing control process (the process of step S109, see FIG. 54) for making it stop was also stopped. However, when the over-prize prevention function operates, the game control microcomputer 101 may stop the game control process, but may not stop the shooting control process. However, in this case, the game ball flows down the game area 6 by the player's rotating operation to the handle 72k even if the over-prize ball prevention function is activated. Therefore, there is a problem that it is difficult to immediately grasp the situation in which the game cannot be executed. Therefore, by stopping both the game control process and the launch control process, it is possible for the player to immediately grasp the situation in which the game cannot be executed. Further, for example, when the over-prize preventing function is activated, the game control microcomputer 101 stops the firing control process, but may not stop the game control process. However, in this case, the game ball may still flow down the game area 6 at the timing when the over-prize ball prevention function is activated, and the game ball may enter various prize-winning holes and give the player a prize. There is a problem that spheres can be given. Therefore, by stopping both the game control process and the launch control process, it is possible to ensure that no prize balls are awarded to the player after the over-prize prevention function is activated.

In the third embodiment, the game control microcomputer 101 counted the total number of shot balls based on the detection of the outlet sensor. However, based on the detection of the sensors (first starting hole sensor, second starting hole sensor, general winning hole sensor, first big winning hole sensor, second big winning hole sensor 15a) that detect winning to various winning holes , the total number of shot balls may be counted. Alternatively, if a return ball prevention portion is provided at the upper end portion of the inner wall portion 1B, and a sensor capable of detecting game balls is provided in this return ball prevention portion, based on the detection of this sensor, the total The number of shot balls may be counted.

In the third embodiment, when the number of difference balls reaches 70000, the over-price announcement image KY is displayed as shown in FIG. 51(A). However, regardless of the number of difference balls, the game cannot be executed on the condition that the number of difference balls is 80000 or more in the customer waiting effect, the effect during the jackpot game (for example, the ending effect), the notice effect accompanying the variable effect, etc. A presentation explaining what will happen may be executed. This is because such an effect makes it possible to inform the players and employees of the game parlors in advance that the pachinko game machine has a function of preventing over-prized balls.

In the third embodiment, the information on the total number of winning balls, the information on the total number of shot balls, and the information on the number of difference balls are stored in the non-erase storage section 107 of the game RAM 104, so that even if the RAM is cleared, The information on the total number of prize balls, the information on the total number of shot balls, and the information on the number of difference balls are not deleted. However, by storing the information on the total number of winning balls, the information on the total number of shot balls, and the information on the number of difference balls in a non-volatile storage means (for example, FRAM (registered trademark)) provided separately from the game RAM 104, Even if the RAM is cleared, the information on the total number of winning balls, the information on the total number of shot balls, and the information on the number of difference balls may not be erased.

In the third embodiment, the difference ball number is counted at any time after the power is turned on. However, the start timing of counting the number of difference balls may be from the so-called first win (winning the jackpot in the normal game state). In this case, the minus amount of the number of difference balls (that is, the total number of shot balls) from when the power is turned on until the first hit is not counted. Therefore, it is possible to make the difference number of balls, which triggers the operation of the over-prize prevention function, the same as the number of balls held after the first hit.

In the third embodiment, the game control microcomputer 101 counts the total number of prize balls and the total number of shot balls separately, and subtracts the total number of shot balls from the total number of prize balls to calculate the number of difference balls. . However, the difference ball number may be measured (counted) using only the difference ball counter for counting the difference ball number. That is, every time there is a prize ball, the value of the prize ball is added to the difference ball counter. Also, every time a game ball is shot (every time the discharge port sensor detects it), the value of the difference ball counter is decremented. In this way, the number of difference balls may be measured without separately counting the total number of prize balls and the total number of shot balls. In this case, the value of the differential ball counter may be set to always be "0" or more so as not to become negative. Then, as described above, it is possible to make the difference number of balls, which triggers the operation of the over-prize prevention function, substantially the same as the number of balls held after the first hit.

In the third embodiment, the over-prize preventing function is activated under the condition that the number of difference balls (specific count number) is 80000 (reference number) or more. However, the number of difference balls (reference number), which is the reference for activating the over-prize prevention function, is not limited to 80000, and may be 50000, 100000, or 120000, and can be changed as appropriate.

In the third embodiment, the specific measurement number that triggers the operation of the over-prize preventing function is the number of difference balls, which is the difference between the total number of prize balls and the total number of shot balls. However, the specific count number can be changed as appropriate if it is based on the number of prize balls awarded to the player from the viewpoint of not giving excessive prize balls. For example, the specific measurement number may be a game state such as a jackpot game state, or a difference ball count limited to a certain period such as a consecutive game period. Also, for example, the specific measurement number is the total number of prize balls in all game states, the total number of prize balls limited to a certain game state such as a jackpot game state, or the total number of prize balls limited to a certain period such as a consecutive period. It can be. Also, for example, the specific count may be based on all gaming states, limited to a certain gaming state such as a jackpot gaming state, or limited to a certain period of time such as a consecutive game period.

In the third embodiment, the pachinko game machine is configured as a non-enclosed pachinko machine in which the game balls housed inside flow down the game area 6 and then are discharged to the outside of the pachinko game machine. However, the pachinko gaming machine may be configured as an enclosed pachinko machine that can circulate and enter the game area again after the game balls housed inside flow down the game area. In this case, a frame control board corresponding to the payout control board 170 is provided with a 7-segment display. Therefore, the 7-segment display may display the number of difference balls (specific count number). In addition, a 6-digit 7-segment display that displays the number of balls held is placed at the bottom of the front door. Therefore, the 6-digit 7-segment display may display the difference ball number (specific count number). It should be noted that "measurement" in this embodiment has the same meaning as counting.

<Invention shown in the third embodiment>
Inventions of the following means are shown in the above-described third embodiment and its modifications. In the description of the means described below, the corresponding structural names and expressions in the above-described embodiments, etc., and the reference numerals used in the drawings are added in parentheses for reference. However, the constituent elements of each invention are not limited to this appendix.

<Means X>
The invention according to means X1 is
In a game machine (pachinko game machine of the third embodiment) having a game control means (game control microcomputer 101) capable of controlling a game,
The game control means is
It is possible to measure a specific count number (number of difference balls) based on the number of prize balls given to the player,
When the specific count number is equal to or greater than a predetermined reference number (80000) and the advantageous game state (high-probability-high base state, low-probability-high base state) that is advantageous for the player ends (see FIG. 48), the game is disabled (stops game control processing and launch control processing).

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, when the specific count number based on the number of prize balls is equal to or greater than the reference number and the advantageous game state ends, the game becomes unexecutable. Therefore, the game is not suddenly stopped in the middle of the advantageous game state for the player, and there is no particular big disadvantage for the player. Thus, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not award excessive prize balls.

The invention according to means X2 is
In the gaming machine described in means X1,
The game control means is
When the specific count number is equal to or greater than the reference number and the advantageous game state (high-probability-high base state, low-probability-high base state) shifts to a normal game state, the game is controlled to be unexecutable. It is a game machine.

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, when the specific count number based on the number of winning balls is equal to or greater than the reference number and the advantageous game state is shifted to the normal game state, the game becomes unexecutable. Therefore, it is possible to stop the game at a timing when it is easy for the player to stop the game.

The invention according to means X3 is
In the gaming machine described in means X1,
The game control means is
When it is determined to be a hit by the hit determination process, a winning game (jackpot game) can be executed,
The specific count number is equal to or greater than the reference number, and the hit determination process that has been suspended by a predetermined number (for example, four) when the advantageous game state is shifted to the normal game state is completed in the normal game state. This gaming machine is characterized by controlling the game to be unexecutable (see FIG. 64) when the game is executed.

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, when the specific count number is equal to or greater than the reference number, and the advantageous game state is shifted to the normal game state, the hit determination process may be suspended for a predetermined number. In this case, it is regarded as a substantially advantageous game state until the hit determination processing that has been suspended for a predetermined number is completed in the normal game state, and the game is stopped when the substantially advantageous game state ends. Is possible.

The invention according to means X4 is
In the gaming machine described in means X1,
Equipped with an entrance (second starting port 12),
The game control means is capable of controlling a ball-entering easy state (high base state) in which a game ball is more likely to enter the ball-entering opening than in a normal game state,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the advantageous gaming state is the easy ball-entering state.

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, when the specific count number is equal to or greater than the reference number and the easy-to-enter state in which the game ball enters the ball-entering opening more easily than in the normal game state ends, the game becomes unexecutable. . Therefore, it is possible for the player to stop the game after the easy-ball-entering state ends and before the number of balls in his possession decreases.

By the way, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-209170, the player may acquire excessive prize balls by continuing the game. In this case, the game machine does not prevent the player from receiving excessive prize balls. Therefore, the invention according to the means X1 to X4 is a gaming machine described in JP-A-2017-209170, wherein the game control means can measure a specific count number based on the number of prize balls given to the player. 2, when the specific count number is equal to or greater than a predetermined reference number and the advantageous game state advantageous to the player ends, the game is controlled to be unexecutable. As a result, it is possible to solve the problem of providing a gaming machine that does not award excessive prize balls to the player (to produce an effect).

<Means Y>
The invention according to means Y1 is
In a game machine (pachinko game machine of the third embodiment) having a game control means (game control microcomputer 101) capable of controlling a game,
The game control means is
It is possible to measure a specific count number (number of difference balls) based on the number of prize balls given to the player,
Based on the specific count becomes a predetermined reference number (80000) or more, the game may be controlled to be unexecutable (game control processing and launch control processing are stopped) (see FIG. 48),
Based on the establishment of the reset conditions not triggered by power-on (the first reset condition that the special reset switch 181 is pressed and the second reset condition that the customer waiting state continues for one hour), the specific measurement number measured This gaming machine is characterized by erasing (see FIGS. 49A and 49B).

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, the game becomes unexecutable when the specific count number based on the number of prize balls becomes equal to or greater than the reference number. As a result, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not award excessive prize balls. However, if a certain player stops playing the game before the specific count reaches the reference number, and the player who plays the game later starts playing, the specific count becomes equal to or greater than the reference number. It becomes a terrible situation. Therefore, the measured specific number of measurements is erased based on the establishment of a reset condition not triggered by power-on. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game from being stopped immediately after starting the game for the player who has played the game later, thereby preventing a serious situation from occurring.

The invention according to means Y2 is
Equipped with operable special operation means (special reset switch 181),
The game machine is characterized in that the reset condition is that the special operation means is operated (see FIG. 49(A)).

According to the gaming machine of this configuration, for example, after a certain player has finished playing, the employee of the gaming parlor operates the special operation means, and the measured specific count number is erased. As a result, it is possible for a player who plays the game later to prevent the game from being stopped immediately after starting the game.

The invention according to means Y3 is
In the gaming machine according to means Y1,
The game control means can be controlled to a customer waiting state after stopping and displaying an identification pattern (special pattern) indicating the result of the hit determination process,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the reset condition is that the customer waiting state continues for a predetermined time (for example, one hour) (see FIG. 49(B)).

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, when the customer waiting state continues for a predetermined period of time, assuming that the player has changed, the measured specific count number is erased. As a result, it is possible for a player who plays the game later to prevent the game from being stopped immediately after starting the game.

The invention according to means Y4 is
In the gaming machine according to means Y1,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the reset condition is to shift from an advantageous game state (high probability/high base state) advantageous to the player to a normal game state (see FIG. 65(A)).

According to the gaming machine of this configuration, when the advantageous game state that is advantageous for the player shifts to the normal game state, the measured specific counting number is erased. In this way, once the situation in which the advantageous game state continues is over, it is possible to prevent the specific count number from exceeding the reference number for a while.

The invention according to means Y5 is
In the gaming machine according to means Y1,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the reset condition is that a specific time (for example, one hour) continues in the normal game state (see FIG. 65(B)).

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, if the specific time continues in the normal game state, the situation advantageous to the player does not last for a while. Therefore, in this case, it is possible to prevent the specific number of measurements from exceeding the reference number for a while by deleting the specific number of measurements.

By the way, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-209170, the player may acquire excessive prize balls by continuing the game. In this case, the game machine does not prevent the player from receiving excessive prize balls. Therefore, the invention according to the means Y1 to Y5 is a gaming machine described in JP-A-2017-209170. , the game may be controlled to be unexecutable based on the number of specific measurements exceeding a predetermined reference number, and the specific measurement measured based on the establishment of a reset condition not triggered by turning on the power. The difference is that the number is erased. As a result, it is possible to solve the problem of providing a gaming machine that does not award excessive prize balls to the player (to produce an effect).

<Means Z>
The invention according to means Z1 is
A game control means (game control microcomputer 101) capable of controlling a game;
In a game machine (pachinko game machine of the third embodiment) comprising an operable specific operation means (RAM clear switch 191),
The game control means is
It is possible to measure a specific count number (number of difference balls) based on the number of prize balls given to the player,
The game may be controlled to be unexecutable (game control processing and launch control processing are stopped) based on the specific count number becoming a predetermined reference number (80000) or more,
A game characterized by erasing game information related to the game (RAM clearing is executed) based on the operation of the specific operation means when the power is turned on, but not erasing the specific measurement number that has been measured. machine.

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, the game becomes unexecutable when the specific count number based on the number of prize balls becomes equal to or greater than the reference number. As a result, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not award an excessive number of prize balls. Here, when the employee of the game parlor operates the specific operation means when the power is turned on, although the game information related to the game is erased, the measured specific measurement number is not erased. Therefore, even in a situation where the game state related to the game must be erased due to a malfunction or the like during business hours, it is possible not to erase the measured specific measurement number.

The invention according to means Z2 is
In the gaming machine according to means Z1,
Equipped with operable special operation means (special reset switch 181),
The game control means is
The gaming machine is characterized in that the measured specific count can be erased (see FIG. 49(A)) based on the operation of the special operation means.

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, the measured specific measurement number is erased by the employee of the gaming facility operating the special operation means. As a result, even if the game state related to the game is not erased, the employee of the game hall can erase the measured specific measurement number at an arbitrary timing.

The invention according to means Z3 is
In the gaming machine according to means Z1 or means Z2,
The game control means is
The game machine is characterized in that when it is determined that it is a predetermined reference time (for example, 9:00 am), the measured specific count can be erased.

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, when the predetermined reference time comes, the measured specific count is erased. Therefore, it is possible to automatically erase the measured specific number of measurements without having the employee of the game arcade perform any operation.

The invention according to means Z4 is
In the gaming machine according to means Z1 to means Z4,
The game control means is
The specific number of measurements is stored in order by being classified for each predetermined period (period from power-on to power-off) from 1st to N (4)th,
Along with erasing the specific number of measurements for the Nth predetermined period, the specific number of measurements for the first to (N-1)th predetermined period is erased, and the specific number of measurements for the second to Nth predetermined period is erased. , and the measurement of the specific number of times in the first predetermined period is started.

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, it is possible to store the specific counts for each predetermined period from the 1st to the Nth. On top of that, as the number of specific measurements in the N-th predetermined period is erased, the number of specific measurements in the first to (N-1)th predetermined periods is the number of specific measurements in the second to N-th predetermined periods Shifted as counts. Then, the measurement of the specific number of measurements for the first predetermined period is started. In this way, it is possible to automatically update the number of specific measurements for each predetermined period from the 1st to the Nth without having the staff of the game arcade operate it.

By the way, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-209170, the player may acquire excessive prize balls by continuing the game. In this case, the game machine does not prevent the player from receiving excessive prize balls. Therefore, the invention according to the means Z1 to Z4 is capable of measuring a specific count number based on the number of prize balls given to the player for the game machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-209170. , the game may be controlled to be unexecutable based on the specific count number being equal to or greater than a predetermined reference number, and the game information related to the game may be controlled based on the specific operation means being operated when the power is turned on. is erased, but the specific number of measurements that have been made is not erased. As a result, it is possible to solve the problem of providing a gaming machine that does not award excessive prize balls to the player (to produce an effect).

13. Fourth Embodiment Hereinafter, a pachinko game machine of a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 to 75. FIG. In the explanation of the pachinko game machine of the fourth embodiment, the same components as those of the pachinko game machine PY1 of the first embodiment and the pachinko game machine of the third embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and explanations thereof are omitted. The pachinko game machine of the fourth embodiment is equipped with a function (referred to as an advantageous setting function) that allows the game parlor (hall) side to intentionally set a game state advantageous to the player.

It should be noted that the pachinko game machine of the fourth embodiment is a so-called one-kind-two-kind machine. In the pachinko game machine of the fourth embodiment, when a small win is won in the lottery of special figure 2 (lottery related to the second start port 12), a small win game for opening the second big winning port 15 is executed, and a small win When the game ball passes through the specific area 16 in the second big winning hole 15 during the game (when there is a so-called V passage), a jackpot game including a round game for opening the first big winning hole 14 is executed a plurality of times. .

<Types of stop symbols>
First, the types of stop symbols in the fourth embodiment will be described. The pachinko game machine of the fourth embodiment determines the special symbol random number acquired based on the winning to the first start port 11 or the second start port 12 according to the jackpot determination table shown in FIG. It determines whether it is a big hit or not, and whether it is a small hit or not. As shown in FIG. 67(A), in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) based on the winning of the first starting port 11, the jackpot (so-called 1 type jackpot) is won with a predetermined probability, but the small You don't get elected. On the other hand, in the lottery of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) based on the winning to the second starting port 12, the small hit is always won. That is, in the lottery of the special figure 2, the jackpot (so-called 1 type jackpot) is not elected, and there is no loss.

In the pachinko gaming machine of the fourth embodiment, when it is determined that the jackpot is won, the pattern type random number (jackpot pattern type random number) is determined according to the jackpot pattern type determination table shown in FIG. to decide. In the lottery of special figure 1, "special figure 1_jackpot design S" is determined at a rate of 50%, and "special figure 1_jackpot pattern T" is determined at a rate of 50%. In addition, the result of the lottery of the special figure 2 does not include the jackpot (1 type jackpot). If the type of the winning jackpot pattern is different, the opening pattern of the jackpot opening in the first jackpot game and the setting regarding the game state after the jackpot game are different (see FIG. 68). This point will be described later.

In addition, the pachinko gaming machine of the fourth embodiment determines the type of small winning symbol by determining the symbol type random number according to the small winning symbol type determination table shown in FIG. do. Specifically, in the lottery of special figure 2, at a rate of 80%, "special figure 2_small winning pattern s" is determined, and at a rate of 20%, "special figure 2_small winning pattern t" is determined. If the type of the winning small winning pattern is different, the opening pattern of the big winning opening in the small winning game or the two-kind big winning game and the setting regarding the game state after the big winning game are different (see FIG. 68). This point will be described later.

In addition, when the pachinko gaming machine of the fourth embodiment determines that neither the jackpot nor the small win has been won (that is, when it determines that it is lost), the symbol type random number is changed to the losing symbol type shown in FIG. 67 (D). By judging according to the judgment table, the type of the missing symbol is determined. In the lottery of special figure 1, at a rate of 80%, "special figure 1 _ lost pattern S" is decided, at a rate of 10%, "special figure 1 _ lost pattern T" is decided, at a rate of 10%, " Special Figure 1_Losing Design U” is determined. In addition, loss is not included in the result of the lottery of special figure 2. The difference in the types of the losing symbols affects the setting regarding the game state after the stopping symbols are displayed (see FIG. 69). This point will be described later.

In addition, the pachinko game machine of the fourth embodiment determines the reach random number according to the reach determination table shown in FIG. It is possible to decide whether to The probability that it is determined that there is a reach differs depending on whether or not the gaming state is a normal time-saving state, which will be described later. When it is not in the normal working hours state, the probability of being determined to be reachable is higher than when it is in the normal working hours state.

Next, types of big wins, types of small wins, and types of losses will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 68 and 69. FIG. As described above, the results of the special symbol lottery (the lottery of the special figure 1 and the lottery of the special figure 2) include "big hit", "small hit", and "loss". At the time of the "big win", the special figure display 81 stops displaying the "big win pattern". The jackpot patterns include "special figure 1_jackpot pattern S" and "special figure 1_jackpot pattern T". Also, at the time of "small win", the "small win symbol" is stop-displayed on the special figure display 81. - 特許庁The small winning design includes "special figure 2_small winning design s" and "special figure 2_small winning design t". At the time of "missing", the special symbol display 81 stops displaying the "losing symbol". There are “special figure 1_losing pattern S”, “special figure 1_losing pattern T”, and “special figure 1_losing pattern U” as the losing pattern.

When a special symbol lottery wins a big win, a "big win game" is executed to open the first big win port 14 in an opening pattern corresponding to the type of the stopped and displayed big win symbol. When a small win is won, a "small win game" is executed to open the second big winning hole 15 in an opening pattern corresponding to the type of the stopped and displayed small win symbols. Then, when the game ball enters the specific area 16 in the second big winning hole 15 during execution of the small winning game, the first big winning hole 14 is opened in an opening pattern corresponding to the type of the winning small winning pattern. A "jackpot game" to be opened is executed. A jackpot game executed based on the fact that the result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot winning is called a first-class jackpot game, and a jackpot game executed based on passing through the specific area 16 is called a second-class jackpot game.

In this form, the jackpot game includes multiple round games (unit open games), the opening (also referred to as OP) before the first round game starts, and the ending after the final round game ends. (also referred to as ED). Each round game starts with the end of the OP or the end of the previous round game and ends with the start of the next round game or the start of the ED. The closing time (interval time) of the big winning hole between round games is included in the open round game before closing.

In addition, in this form, the small winning game is a small winning opening game that opens the second big winning opening 15, the opening (interval before opening) before the small winning opening game is started, and the small winning opening game is completed. Later ending (post-closure interval).

As a result of the special symbol lottery, when a jackpot is won (that is, when a type 1 jackpot is won), a jackpot game (type 1 jackpot game) for opening the first jackpot 14 is executed. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 68, there are two types of jackpot symbols (jackpot symbols stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display 81a) that can be won in the first special symbol (special figure 1) lottery. Specifically, in the special figure 1 lottery, there is a possibility of winning "special figure 1_jackpot pattern S" and "special figure 1_jackpot pattern T".

As shown in FIG. 68, "special figure 1_jackpot pattern S" and "special figure 1_jackpot pattern T" are 4R (round) jackpots, and the number of openings of the first big prize opening 14 per 1R is one. Yes, and its maximum open time is 29.5 seconds. The game state after the end of the jackpot game differs depending on the game state at the time of winning.

Here, the game state of this embodiment will be briefly described. The pachinko game machine of the fourth embodiment can be controlled to a non-time-saving state and a time-saving state in which the settings related to the ease of entering the second start port 12 are different from the non-time-saving state as the game state. In the time-saving state, the normal time-saving state in which the game ball is easy to enter the second start port 12, and the slight time-saving state in which the game ball is less likely to enter the second start port 12 than in the normal time-saving state (non- normal working hours). The ease of entering the second starting port 12 in the slightly reduced working hours state is not much different from the non-working reduced state. That is, in this form, the normal time-saving state is a high-base state in which a large number of balls can be expected to enter the second starting port 12, and the slight time-saving state and the non-time-saving state are unlikely to enter the second starting port 12. Low base state. Details of the game state will be described later.

The game state after the jackpot game when the ``jackpot pattern S'' is won is a non-time-saving state if the game state at the time of winning is a non-time-saving state or a normal time-saving state, but the game state at the time of winning is a slight time-saving state. If so, it's a very short time. The number of times of time saving in the slightly time saving state is set to 800 times. Time saving number of times is the upper limit execution number of special figure fluctuations in the time saving state. When the number of executions of the special figure variation in the minute time saving state reaches 800 times, the minute time saving state ends. In this case, it is set to a non-time saving state.

On the other hand, the time saving state after the jackpot game when winning the "jackpot pattern T" is a non-time saving state, regardless of whether the game state at the time of winning is a non-time saving state, a slight time saving state, or a normal time saving state. state.

Further, when a small win is won as a result of the special symbol lottery, a small win game is executed in which the second big prize winning port 15 is opened once. When the game ball enters the second big winning port 15 opened by the small winning game, and the game ball passes through the specific area 16 in the second big winning device 15D, the big winning is won, and the first prize is won. A jackpot game (two types of jackpot game) for opening the big winning hole 14 is executed. When this jackpot game (jackpot game triggered by passing through the specific area 16) is executed, the opening of the second big prize opening 15 as a small jackpot game corresponds to the first R. In addition, if there is no passage of the game ball to the specific area 16 in the small winning game, the big winning game is not executed. A jackpot game or a small hit game may be called a special game. In addition, in the special game, there may be a round in which the big winning opening is opened multiple times during one round.

In this form, as shown in FIG. 68, there are two types of small winning patterns that can be won in the special figure 2 lottery (small winning symbols stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display device 81b). Specifically, in the lottery of special figure 2, there is a possibility of winning "special figure 2_small winning pattern s" and "special figure 2_small winning pattern t".

The “small winning symbol s” and the “small winning symbol t” are small winnings that can always pass through the specific area 16 (also referred to as V passing) as long as the game is played correctly. That is, in this form, the small hit election based on the lottery of the special figure 2 has substantially the same meaning as the big hit election.

In the small winning game based on the small winning symbols of each type, the second big winning opening 15 is opened once for 1.8 seconds. As long as the game is played correctly, it is possible to win a plurality of prizes while the second big prize opening 15 is open. It is controlled to the passage permitting state (the state shown in FIG. 3(B)).

In the jackpot game (two-type jackpot game) executed based on the passage of the game ball to the specific area 16, even in the two-type jackpot game based on the "small hit pattern s", the two-type jackpot game based on the "small hit pattern t" Also in the game, the first big winning port 14 is opened once per 1R from the 2nd R to the 10th R with a maximum opening time of 29.5 seconds.

The game state after the end of the two types of jackpot games based on the "small winning pattern s" is a non-short-time state if the game state at the time of winning is a non-short-time state or a short-time state, and a normal short-time state if it is a short-time state. state. The number of times of time saving in the normal time saving state is set to 100 times.

On the other hand, the game state after the end of the two-type jackpot game based on the "small hit pattern t" is any of the non-time-saving state, the slight time-saving state, and the normal time-saving state at the time of winning. It is in a non-short-time state. It should be noted that the lottery of the special figure 2 in this form is mainly in the normal time saving state, and there is almost no lottery of the special figure 2 in the non-time saving state and the slight time saving state.

Moreover, when it is determined that the game is lost as a result of the special symbol lottery, the type of the lost symbol is determined. As shown in FIG. 69, there are three types of loss patterns (loss patterns stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 indicator 81a) determined by the special figure 1 lottery. Specifically, in the special figure 1 lottery, it is determined to be one of "special figure 1_losing pattern S", "special figure 1_losing pattern T", and "special figure 1_losing pattern U". In addition, it will not be determined to be lost in the lottery of special figure 2.

"Special figure 1_loss pattern S" is a normal loss that does not affect the transition of the game state, but "special figure 1_loss pattern T" and "special figure 1_loss pattern U" serve as control triggers for the time saving state. It is a special loss (an example of a specific result). That is, when the result of the special symbol lottery is a special loss (also referred to as a time saving loss), the game control microcomputer 101 controls the game state after the stop display of the losing symbol to a time saving state. However, if it is already in the time-saving state (normal time-saving state or slight time-saving state) at the control timing to the time-saving state based on the special loss (that is, if the time-saving flag is ON), the setting of the game state is not changed. In other words, special losses are treated in the same way as normal losses.

More specifically, the game state after the stop display of the “losing pattern T” in the non-time saving state is the normal time saving state, and the number of times of time saving is set to 100 times. In addition, the game state after the stop display of the “loss pattern U” in the non-time-saving state is a slightly time-saving state, and the number of times of time-saving is set to 800 times.

<Game state>
Here, the game state of the pachinko game machine of the fourth embodiment will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 70(A), the probability of winning the normal symbol lottery in the time saving state (normal time saving state, slight time saving state) is the same as the winning probability of the normal symbols in the non time saving state. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the probability of being determined as winning in the normal symbol lottery is set to 65535/65536 in any of the game states of the non-time saving state, the normal time saving state, and the slight time saving state. In other words, in any game state, the normal symbol lottery is determined to be almost hit. In addition, in the time saving state, the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery may be higher than in the non-time saving state.

In addition, in the time-saving state (normal time-saving state, slight time-saving state), as shown in FIG. 70(B), the fluctuation time of normal symbols is shorter than the non-time-saving state. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the variation time of the normal symbol is 60 seconds in the non-time saving state, 1 second in the normal time saving state, and 30 seconds in the slight time saving state. It should be noted that the normal symbol stop time is 0.5 seconds in any game state.

In addition, in the time saving state (normal time saving state, slight time saving state), as shown in FIG. 70(C), the opening time of the electric chew 12D in the auxiliary game becomes longer than the non-time saving state. Specifically, in this form, the opening time of the electric chew 12D is 0.05 seconds per time in the non-time saving state, but it is 2.5 seconds in the normal time saving state and 0.1 seconds in the slight time saving state is.

Also, in the time saving state, as shown in FIG. 70(C), the number of opening times of the electric chew 12D in the auxiliary game may be greater than in the non-time saving state. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the number of times the electric chew 12D is opened is once in the non-time saving state and the slight time saving state, but twice in the normal time saving state.

Here, in the non-time-saving state, if the normal pattern lottery is executed, it will almost win, but the normal pattern fluctuation time is as long as 60 seconds, and the opening of the electric chew 12D in the auxiliary game is 0.05 seconds once. and very short time. Therefore, in the non-time-saving state, even if the game is played in the right-handed manner (the manner in which the game ball can pass through the gate 13), it is hardly expected to win the electric chew 12D.

On the other hand, in the normal time-saving state, if the normal symbol lottery is executed, it is almost a win, the normal symbol fluctuation time is as short as 1 second, and the opening of the electric chew 12D in the auxiliary game is 2.5 seconds. Twice is long enough. Therefore, in the normal time-saving state, winning a prize to the electric chew 12D can occur frequently by playing the game with the right hand. That is, it can be said that the normal time saving state is a game state in which it is easier to win the electric chew 12D than in the non-time saving state.

On the other hand, in the slightly reduced time state, if the normal symbol lottery is executed, it will almost win, but the normal symbol fluctuation time is as long as 30 seconds, and the opening of the electric chew 12D in the auxiliary game is 0.1 seconds. One time is short. Therefore, in the micro time saving state, various parameters related to the ease of winning the electric chew 12D (the winning probability of the normal pattern lottery, the normal pattern fluctuation time and stop time, the opening pattern of the electric chew 12D) are in a non-time saving state In comparison, although the setting is such that it is easy to win the electric chew 12D, it is almost impossible to expect to win the electric chew 12D even if the game is played with the right hand.

In this way, in the non-time-saving state and the slight time-saving state, it is not expected to win the electric chew 12D even if the player hits to the right, so the player proceeds with the game by hitting to the left. On the other hand, in the normal time-saving state, hitting to the right often results in winning prizes in the electric chew 12D, so the player proceeds with the game by hitting to the right. In addition, in the pachinko game machine of the fourth embodiment, the game is played by hitting to the right even during the jackpot game.

Like the normal time saving state, the slight time saving state can be said to be a game state in which it is easy to win the electric chew 12D compared to the non-working time saving state, but it is more difficult to win the electric chew 12D than the normal time saving state. It is the game state of the setting. In addition, the slightly reduced working hours state is a game state closer to a non-working reduced state than the normal reduced working hours state, since winning of the electric chew 12D cannot be expected. In addition, the normal time saving state is an example of the specific game state, and the non-time saving state and the minute time saving state are examples of the non-specific game state.

By the way, in the normal time-saving state, the base, which is the ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of balls fired, is higher than in the non-time-saving state. Therefore, the normal time saving state is also called "high base state", and the non-time saving state is also called "low base state". A short time state is also an example of a "low base state." In the high base state, you can aim for a big hit without greatly reducing the number of game balls you have. Note that the high base state is a state in which so-called electric support control (control for supporting winning to the second starting port 12 by the electric chew 12D) is being performed. Therefore, the high base state is also called an electric support control state. The low base state is also referred to as a non-electric support control state.

The winning probability in the normal symbol lottery, the normal symbol fluctuation time and stop time, the opening time and number of openings of the electric chew 12D, etc. can be appropriately changed within a range that does not interfere with the game performance.

<Special figure fluctuation pattern>
Next, determination of a special figure variation pattern (variation pattern of special symbols) will be described. The pachinko game machine of the fourth embodiment determines a special figure variation pattern according to a different special figure variation pattern determination table in the non-time saving state, the slight time saving state and the normal time saving state (see FIG. 71).

First, the special figure variation pattern determination table in the non-time saving state will be described based on FIG. 71(A). In the non-time-saving state, the game is progressed by hitting to the left, and the lottery of the special figure 1 is performed. The lottery result of the special figure 1 has a big hit and a loss. In the case of a big hit, select either a special figure variation pattern P80 to perform SP reach or a special figure variation pattern P81 to perform normal reach without developing into SP reach. On the other hand, in the case of losing, if it is a losing pattern S that is usually losing or a losing pattern U that is a control trigger for a minute time saving state, when it is determined that there is a reach, a special figure variation pattern that performs SP reach Select either P82 or special figure variation pattern P83 that performs normal reach without developing into SP reach, and when it is determined that there is no reach, depending on the number of retained balls, special figure variation in which reach is not formed Select pattern P84 or P85. In addition, when the losing pattern U is stopped and displayed in the non-time-saving state, it shifts to the slight time-saving state, but in this form, the slight time-saving state is the least advantageous gaming state for the player, so the losing pattern U is displayed in the non-time-saving state. When pulled, the same special figure variation pattern as when the losing pattern S is pulled is selected.

On the other hand, in the case of a loss, if the stop pattern is a loss pattern T that triggers the control of the normal time saving state, a special figure variation pattern P86 for performing a RUSH rush effect is selected. When the losing pattern T is stop-displayed in the non-time-saving state, it shifts to the normal time-saving state. The RUSH rush production is a production that suggests shifting to a normal working hours state. The RUSH rush effect will be described later.

Next, the special figure variation pattern determination table in the minute time saving state will be described based on FIG. 71(B). The short time state is a game state that is least advantageous for the player in this form. That is, in the present embodiment, the minute time saving state functions as a normal game state (normal game state). In the slightly reduced working hours state, the game is advanced by hitting to the left, and the lottery of the special figure 1 is performed. When the lottery result of the special figure 1 is a big hit, either the special figure variation pattern P90 which performs SP reach or the special figure variation pattern P91 which performs normal reach without developing into SP reach is selected. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special figure 1 is lost, no matter what the lost pattern is, when it is determined that there is a reach, the special figure fluctuation pattern P92 to perform SP reach, or to SP reach Select any of the special figure variation patterns P93 that perform normal reach without developing, and when it is determined that there is no reach, select the special figure variation pattern P94 or P95 in which reach is not formed according to the number of retained balls. . Since the game state is not newly set even if the special losing (losing pattern T, losing pattern U) is drawn in the slightly reduced time state, when the special losing is drawn in the slightly reduced time state, the normal losing (losing pattern S) is drawn. I am trying to select the same special figure variation pattern as when.

Next, the special figure variation pattern determination table in the normal time saving state will be described based on FIG. 72(C). The normal time saving state is the most advantageous game state for the player in this form. The number of times of time saving in the normal time saving state is set to 100 times, a small win is always won in the lottery of the special figure 2, and V passage always occurs when a small win game is executed. Therefore, being controlled to the normal time-saving state means acquisition of the next big hit game (so-called Renso determination).

In the normal time-saving state, the game is played by hitting to the right, and the lottery of the special figure 2 is performed. As shown in FIG. 72(C), when the special figure 2 lottery is made in the normal time saving state, the special figure variation pattern P100 with a variation time of 13 seconds is selected as the special figure 2 variation pattern. When this special figure variation pattern is selected, immediate hit production is executed. In the immediate hit performance, the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2 and EZ3 are stop-displayed in a stop mode (double number) indicating winning as soon as the ready-to-win is formed within the fluctuation time of 13 seconds.

<Processing of game control microcomputer>
Next, processing performed by the game control microcomputer 101 in the fourth embodiment will be described. In the fourth embodiment, a game state management process shown in FIG. 72 is performed instead of the game state management process (FIG. 61) explained in the third embodiment. In addition, since the pachinko game machine of the fourth embodiment is not set to the high probability state, it does not perform processing related to the probability variation flag indicating the high probability state.

As shown in FIG. 72, in the gaming state management process (S1602) in the fourth embodiment, first, it is determined whether or not the time saving flag indicating the time saving state is ON (S2101), and if not ON, the process proceeds to step S2110. , If it is ON, the value of the time saving counter that counts the number of times of special figure fluctuation (variation display of special symbols) executed during the time saving state is decremented by 1 (S2102), and the value of the time saving counter is "0". It is determined whether or not there is (S2103). If not "0", the process proceeds to step S2110, and if "0", the time saving flag is turned OFF (S2104), the game state flag update process (S2105) is performed, and the process proceeds to step S2110.

In the game state flag update process (S2105), the value of the game state flag is set to a value corresponding to the current game state. As shown in the table in FIG. 72, the value of the game state flag is set to "0" if it is a non-time saving state, if it is a normal time saving state it is set to "1", If it is a slight time saving state " 2”. In this game state flag update process (S2105), since the time saving flag has just been turned OFF, the value of the game state flag is set to the value "0" corresponding to the non-time saving state.

In step S2110, it is determined whether or not the time saving flag is OFF. If the time saving flag is not OFF, the process proceeds to step S2130, but if the time saving flag is OFF, subsequently, it is determined whether or not the special symbol that is stopped and displayed is a special loss (S2111). Then, if it is not a special loss (losing pattern T or losing pattern U), the process proceeds to step S2130, but if it is a special loss, the time saving flag is turned on (S2112), and the number of time saving times according to the type of losing pattern (Fig. 69 See) is set to the time saving counter (S2113), the game state flag update process (S2114) is performed, and the process proceeds to step S2130.

In this game state flag update process (S2114), if the time saving flag is turned ON based on the lost pattern T, the value of the game state flag is set to the value "1" corresponding to the normal time saving state, and the lost pattern U If the time saving flag is turned ON based on, the value of the game state flag is set to the value "2" corresponding to the slight time saving state. By setting the value of the game state flag to "1", the game state is controlled to the normal time-saving state, and by setting the value of the game state flag to "2", the game state is controlled to be the slight time-saving state. . It should be noted that each time-saving state in the present form, that the special figure fluctuation of the predetermined upper limit number of executions (time-saving number of times) is performed, or the next jackpot game is executed end by the establishment of either end condition .

It should be noted that in the present embodiment, the time saving state is controlled based on the special loss is limited to when it is a non-working time saving state (when YES in step S2110). That is, even if a special loss is pulled in the slight time saving state, a new time saving state is not set. Here, in the present embodiment, in the gaming state management process (S1602), the process (steps S2101 to S2105) relating to whether to end the time saving state is performed first, and then the processing relating to whether to control the time saving state based on the special loss. (Steps S2110 to S2114) are performed. Therefore, for example, in the variation of special figure 1, which is the final variation of the minute time saving state, when the special loss is stopped and displayed, the process of steps S2101 to S2105 is transferred from the minute time saving state to the non-time saving state, Steps S2110 to S2114 It will be transferred from the non-time-saving state to the time-saving state by the processing of . In addition, the processing of steps S2110 to S2114 is configured to be performed prior to the processing of steps S2101 to S2105, so that even if a special loss is pulled in the final variation of the time saving state, it may be configured not to be controlled to a new time saving state. .

At step S2130, the game control microcomputer 101 sets the game state designation command including the information of the game state flag (that is, the information of the current game state) to the output buffer of the game RAM 104. FIG. By outputting this command, the sub-control board 120 is notified of the current game state information.

<Game flow in the fourth embodiment>
Next, the flow of game progress in the pachinko gaming machine of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachinko game machine of the fourth embodiment, the game state that is not the most advantageous for the player among the non-time saving state, the slight time saving state, and the normal working time saving state cannot be shifted to the normal working time saving state even if the losing pattern U is drawn. It is in a short time state. The non-time-saving state is a game state more advantageous than the slight time-saving state in that it can be shifted to the normal time-saving state by drawing the losing pattern U. In addition, since the normal time-saving state is a gaming state in which the acquisition of the jackpot game based on the special drawing 2 is substantially confirmed, it is the most It is an advantageous playing state.

In this form, the minute time saving state functions as a normal game state. As shown in FIG. 73, when it is a slightly short time state, the production mode is set to the normal production mode (detailed later). In the short time state, the game is advanced by hitting to the left, and the lottery of the special figure 1 is performed. The pachinko game machine of this form is configured so as not to directly shift from the minute time-saving state to the normal time-saving state. Therefore, when the player is in a slight time-saving state, the game proceeds with the aim of first shifting to a non-time-saving state. When the "big hit symbol S" is won in the short working time state, the game state after the big winning game is again set to the short working time state. On the other hand, when the "jackpot symbol T" is won, the game state after the jackpot game is set to the non-time-saving state. Also, when the number of executions of the special figure variation becomes 800 times (the number of times of time saving in the time saving state) without winning the jackpot in the time saving state, it is set to the non-time saving state.

The non-time-saving state is a game state that can be shifted to the normal time-saving state by drawing a special loss, and is one of the game states that are advantageous for the player. When it is a non-time saving state, production mode is set to chance production mode (detailed later). In the non-time saving state, the game is advanced by hitting to the left, and the lottery of the special figure 1 is performed. In this form, you will win a special loss with a probability of 1/5 in the lottery of special figure 1. At this time, it is distributed to the losing pattern T (the pattern that triggers the normal time saving state) with a probability of 1/2, and it is distributed to the losing pattern U (the pattern that triggers the slight time saving state) with a probability of 1/2. When the special loss won in the non-time-saving state is the losing pattern U, the game is played aiming at the shift to the non-time-saving state again in order to shift to the slight time-saving state.

On the other hand, when the special loss won in the non-time-saving state is the losing design T, it shifts to the normal time-saving state. The normal time saving state is a game state in which the acquisition of the jackpot game based on the lottery of the special figure 2 is substantially determined. When it is a normal time saving state, the production mode is set to the RUSH production mode (detailed later). In the normal time saving state, the game is progressed by hitting to the right, and the lottery of the special figure 2 is performed. In the lottery of special figure 2, a small hit is always won. At this time, it is distributed to the small winning pattern s (the pattern that triggers the normal time saving state) with a probability of 4/5, and to the small winning pattern t (the pattern that triggers the non-time saving state) with a probability of 1/5. be done. When the winning small win in the normal time saving state is the small winning pattern s, the normal time saving state is set again after the two-kind big winning game based on the passage of V, so that the so-called big win consecutive game is decided.

On the other hand, when the small hit won in the normal time-saving state is the small-hit symbol t, the non-time-saving state is set after the two-kind jackpot game based on V passage. In this non-time-saving state, if the losing pattern T can be drawn, it can be returned to the normal time-saving state. On the other hand, when the losing pattern U is drawn, the game shifts to a slight time-saving state. Thus, in the present embodiment, when the normal time saving state ends, it is set to the non-time saving state once without directly shifting to the slight time saving state. Therefore, the player can expect to be set to the normal time-saving state again, and the amusement of the game is improved.

In the non-time-saving state, when the jackpot is won based on the lottery of the special figure 1, even when the jackpot pattern S is drawn or when the jackpot pattern T is drawn, the gaming state after the jackpot game is finished is non-time-saving. state. As a result, the player is prevented from being discouraged by being set in a slight time-reduction state, which is more disadvantageous than the normal non-time-reduction state, even though the player has won a big win.

Here, the game state when the power is turned on will be described. When the power is turned on without the operation of the RAM clear switch 191, the game state at power-on takes over the game state at power-off. Therefore, when the power supply is turned off in the short working hours state after closing the shop on the previous day, the game state when the power is turned on when the shop opens remains in the short working hours state. On the other hand, when the power is turned on by operating the RAM clear switch 191, the flags and the like are initialized. That is, as shown in FIG. 73, when the RAM is cleared in response to power-on, the game state becomes a non-time-saving state. As described above, the non-time-saving state is a game state that is more advantageous to the player than the slight time-saving state in that a transition to the normal time-saving state based on the losing pattern T can be expected. Therefore, it can be said that the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment can be set to an advantageous state for the player by the operation of an employee of the gaming hall (hall). That is, it can be said that the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment is equipped with an advantageous setting function. As a result, in this embodiment, a player aiming at the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment in a state where no one has played a game since the RAM is cleared by an employee of the gaming hall, etc., can use the pachinko machine of this embodiment when the amusement hall opens. You can expect to play the game machine. That is, it can be expected to improve the operation of the pachinko game machine of this embodiment immediately after the opening of the game hall (so-called first thing in the morning).

<Production example in the fourth embodiment>
Next, an example of an effect in the pachinko game machine of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 and 75. FIG. First, the presentation mode will be explained.

74(A), a "normal effect mode" in which a daytime background image is displayed on the display unit 50a, and a daytime background image as shown in FIG. is displayed on the upper and lower portions of the display unit 50a. "RUSH production mode" displayed in is included.

The normal production mode (Fig. 74(A)) is a production mode that is set in the case of a slight time reduction state. Since the non-time-saving state in this form is a game state advantageous for a player as mentioned above, this slight time-saving state substantially functions as a normal game state. The setting of the normal production mode (in other words, the display of the background image in the daytime) functions as a suggestion that the time is short.

The chance production mode (FIG. 74(B)) is a production mode that is set in the non-time saving state. Since the non-time-saving state in this form can shift to the normal time-saving state based on the lost pattern T, it is a chance for the player to shift to the normal time-saving state. The setting of the chance production mode (in other words, the display of the band image OG including the character of the chance) functions as a suggestion that it is in a non-time saving state. Moreover, since it sets to a non-time-saving state when RAM clear is made, the setting of chance production mode also functions as a suggestion that RAM clear was made.

RUSH production mode (Fig. 74 (C)) is production mode that is set in the normal working hours state. When it is controlled to the normal time-saving state, the execution of the 2 types of jackpot games based on the lottery of the special figure 2 is confirmed, so the setting of the RUSH production mode (in other words, the display of the background image of the universe) is the normal time-saving state. In addition to functioning as a suggestion of the fact, it also functions as a suggestion of finalizing the execution of the jackpot game. In addition, in the normal time-saving state, the game is progressed with the aim of winning a prize to the second start port 12 by hitting to the right. A right-handed shot image G108 informing that the player should hit is displayed in the upper right part of the display section 50a.

Next, the advance notice effect in the normal effect mode will be described. In the pachinko game machine of the fourth embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 121 can execute a dialogue announcement effect in which a predetermined character is displayed together with a dialogue when the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are displayed in a variable manner. Dialogue The type of dialogue in the notice production includes dialogue that suggests that the expectation of a big hit is high (such as "chance") and dialogue that suggests that the expectation of a big hit is higher (such as "hot heat"). , There is a line (specific line) that suggests that the pachinko machine of this form is equipped with an advantageous setting function. The pachinko game machine of this embodiment can execute the effect shown in FIG. 74(D) as the dialogue announcement effect of the specific dialogue. The production shown in FIG. 74(D) is a speech announcement production in which a mini-character with an angel as a motif says, "It might be easier to rush into RUSH first thing in the morning." Equipped with an advantageous setting function, in other words, it is possible to grasp that the first thing in the morning is set to a non-time-saving state by clearing the RAM, and that there is a possibility that it is easy to shift to the normal time-saving state. It should be noted that such a speech announcement effect for a specific speech functions as an explanation effect for explaining to the player that an advantageous setting function is installed. The explanation of the fact that the advantageous setting function is installed does not necessarily have to be performed as a speech announcement effect, and may be performed as an ending effect accompanying the ending of the jackpot game, or as a customer waiting effect. .

Next, the RUSH rush effect performed when shifting from the non-time saving state to the normal working time saving state will be described. When the winning design T is won based on the lottery of the special figure 1 in the non-time saving state, the game control microcomputer 101 selects the special figure variation pattern P86 (see FIG. 71(A)). And the production control microcomputer 121, when the special figure fluctuation pattern indicated by the special figure 1 fluctuation start command received from the game control microcomputer 101 is P86, performs the fluctuation production accompanied by the RUSH rush production. Specifically, the production control microcomputer 121 sets the production patterns EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 to the reach state as a RUSH rush production (FIGS. 75(A) and (B)), and then sets the medium production pattern EZ2 to the special pattern TZ. Stop display with a special eye. In this form, the special symbol TZ is an image containing characters (RUSH) of the name of the production mode (that is, RUSH production mode) corresponding to the destination game state (normal time saving state). In this case, the small symbols KZ1, KZ2 and KZ3 are stopped and displayed at specific stitches of "1, 3, 5". When the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are stopped and displayed with special eyes in this manner, it is suggested that the game is shifted to the normal time-saving state (RUSH performance mode). That is, the fact that the production patterns EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are stopped and displayed with a special eye is a production that suggests to the player that the shift to the normal time-saving state (pulling the losing pattern T) or a shift to the RUSH production mode. It functions as a production that suggests to do. The special stitches of the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2 and EZ3 and the specific stitches of the small symbols KZ1, KZ2 and KZ3 can be changed as appropriate.

<Effects of the Fourth Embodiment>
As described in detail above, according to the pachinko game machine of the fourth embodiment, the RAM clear operation (ON operation of the power switch 193 while pressing the RAM clear switch 191) is performed by an employee of the game hall. It is possible to set the time-saving state, and the non-time-saving state is advantageous to the player in that it can be shifted to the normal time-saving state by drawing the losing pattern T. That is, according to this embodiment, it is possible for an employee of the game arcade to set a game state that is advantageous to the player, and an improvement in service to the player can be expected.

Moreover, according to the pachinko game machine of 4th Embodiment, RAM clear operation for setting to a non-time-saving state is operation possible only at the time of power-on. In other words, in this embodiment, it is possible to set the game state of the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment to a non-time-saving state when the power is turned on to open the game arcade. Therefore, it is possible to guide a player who expects to play a game in a non-time-saving state to a gaming machine that has not been played by anyone since the opening of the amusement arcade.

Moreover, according to the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment, when it is set to the non-time saving state, it is set to the chance production mode (Fig. 74 (B)), so that the RAM clear operation is performed by the employees of the game hall. It is possible for a player to judge whether or not the game machine is a game machine that has been used, and thus it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine of the fourth embodiment, it is possible to suggest, by means of a dialogue announcement effect, that there is a possibility that a gaming state that is advantageous to the player may be set by the operation of the employee of the gaming parlor or the like. (See FIG. 74(D)). Therefore, it is possible to inform the player that the game machine is equipped with an advantageous setting function.

<Modified example of the fourth embodiment>
A modification of the fourth embodiment will be described below. In addition, in the description of the modified example of the fourth embodiment, the same reference numerals are given to the same configurations as those of the pachinko game machine of the fourth embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted. Of course, configurations according to modifications of the fourth embodiment may be combined as appropriate. Moreover, technical features in the fourth embodiment and its modifications can be deleted as appropriate unless they are described as essential in this specification. In addition, the configurations included in the pachinko game machine PY1 of the first embodiment and its modifications, the second embodiment and its modifications, and the pachinko game machine of the third embodiment and its modifications hinder the game. It can be adopted in the game machine grasped from the fourth embodiment and its modifications as long as it does not cause any trouble.

In the fourth embodiment, when a jackpot is won in a short time state, the game state after the big win game is not set to the normal short time state, but the winning in the short time state is controlled to the normal short time state. You may provide the jackpot pattern used as an opportunity.

In the fourth embodiment, the number of times of time saving in the time saving state is set to 800 times. A plurality of types of unsuccessful patterns may be provided, and the number of times of time saving in the slight time saving state may be varied according to the types of unsuccessful patterns. For example, if the time saving state is set based on a certain lost pattern, the number of times of time saving is set to a small number such as 30 times, and if the time saving state is set based on another losing pattern, the time saving number of times is 900 times, etc. If the number of times is set to be large, it is possible to provide a slightly time-saving state that easily shifts to a non-time-saving state and a state that does not easily shift to the non-time-saving state, and an improvement in the amusement of the game can be expected.

In the fourth embodiment, when the normal time saving state ends, it does not move directly to the short working time state, but is configured to be set to the non-short working time state once, but it is possible to directly move to the short working time state. There is a configuration (a configuration in which the game state after the jackpot game based on winning in the normal time-saving state is set to a short-time state, or a configuration in which the normal time-saving state is completed by digesting the number of time-saving states). good.

In the fourth embodiment, setting the chance production mode (displaying the band image OG containing the characters of the chance) suggests that it is in a non-time-saving state, but suggests that it is in a non-time-saving state ( Suggestion that it is a game machine with RAM cleared) may be performed by other effects such as displaying a character image that is not displayed in a game state other than the non-time saving state. In this case, the production (suggestion production) that suggests that it is in a non-time-saving state does not have to be always performed if it is in a non-time-saving state, and is executed only when the production execution lottery is won It may be something that is done. In addition, in the fourth embodiment, the same daytime background image is displayed in both the non-working time saving state and the slightly working time saving state, so the effect that suggests the non-working time saving state is executed only when the lottery is won. When it is configured to do, it is possible to make it difficult to understand that the non-time-saving state has been controlled to the slight time-saving state based on the losing pattern U, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game. Since the state in which the band image OG including the character of chance is not displayed in the chance effect mode is the same as the normal effect mode, it can be said that both are set to the same effect mode.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, even if it is controlled to a non-time-saving state by turning on the power with RAM clear, when it is controlled to a non-time-saving state in response to the end of the jackpot game state (state in which the jackpot game is being executed) Also, even if it is controlled to a non-time-saving state in response to the number of time-savings being consumed in a slight time-saving state, the same production mode (chance production mode) is set. It is set to the chance production mode only when it is controlled to the time saving state, and when it is controlled to the non-time saving state according to the end of the jackpot game state, or when the number of time saving times has been consumed in the slight time saving state Non-time saving When it is controlled to the state, it may be configured to be set to a production mode different from the chance production mode. Specifically, for example, if it is controlled to a non-time-saving state in response to the end of the jackpot gaming state, or if it is controlled to a non-time-saving state in response to the number of time-savings being digested in a slight time-saving state, It is good also as a structure set to the same production mode as a time saving state. With such a configuration, it is possible to give a special feeling to the state after the RAM is cleared, and to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

In the fourth embodiment, the RAM clear operation using the RAM clear switch 191 was a state setting operation for setting the non-time saving state, but the state setting operation is an operation without using the RAM clear switch 191 (RAM clear operation). For example, it is good also as a structure set to a non-time-saving state by providing the exclusive switch for setting to a non-time-saving state, and pushing the said exclusive switch. In this case, the period during which the dedicated switch can be effectively operated may be a period other than when the power is turned on. Specifically, for example, it may be configured to be set to a non-time-saving state by pressing a dedicated switch during a customer waiting state (a state in which a customer waiting effect is being performed). It should be noted that the dedicated switch is preferably mounted on the main control board 100 or otherwise provided at a position where the player cannot arbitrarily operate it. That is, like the RAM clear switch 191, the dedicated switch is preferably provided at a position where it cannot be operated unless the game machine frame 2 is opened.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, it is configured as a so-called 1-type 2-type mixing machine capable of executing a jackpot game based on the passage of the game ball to the specific area 16 in the second big winning hole 15, but the so-called "ST machine" , or a "probability variable loop machine", it may be a game machine of a type other than a type 1 type 2 type mixed machine. In the case of a ST machine or a variable loop machine, it may be a so-called "symbol variable machine" that determines the transition to a high probability state with a high jackpot winning probability based on the type of special symbol that has been won, or a V attacker (specific area It may be a so-called “V probability changer” in which a transition to a high probability state is determined based on passage to a specific area in a large winning device having a . In addition, when configured as a "ST machine" or a "variable loop machine", it is configured to win a jackpot in both the special 1 lottery and the special 2 lottery, and the special 2 lottery is better than the special 1 lottery. A lottery may be advantageous in that a jackpot game with a large number of obtainable prize balls can be easily executed and the game state after the jackpot game is easily controlled to a high probability state. Also, even if a special loss is drawn in a high-probability state, the setting of the game state is not changed.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, the number of times of time saving in various time saving states can be appropriately changed within a range that does not interfere with the game. Further, in the above-described form, parameters in various time-saving states (normal pattern fluctuation time, stop time, electric chew opening pattern, etc.) can be changed as appropriate within a range that does not interfere with the game. Further, in the above embodiment, the types and distribution ratios of each big winning symbol, each small winning symbol, and each losing symbol can be appropriately changed within a range that does not interfere with the game.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, the machine is configured as a so-called 1-type 2-type mixing machine, but depending on the game characteristics to be realized, it may be a so-called Hanemono (2-type machine) that does not have a 1 type jackpot. That is, the lottery of the special figure 1 and the lottery of the special figure 2 may be configured so that the so-called "direct hit jackpot" cannot be won.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, the upper limit number of times of variable display of special symbols in the time saving state (time saving number of times) is counted even if the variable display of special figure 1 is performed or the variable display of special figure 2 is performed Although it was set as the total upper limit execution number, apart from this total upper limit execution number, special figure 1 upper limit execution number that counts only the variation display of special figure 1, special figure that only the variation display of special figure 2 is counted FIG. 2 may be configured so that an upper limit number of times of execution is provided, and the time saving state ends when any number of times is satisfied. In addition, special figure 1 upper limit execution frequency and special figure 2 upper limit execution frequency can be set to a value different from the total upper limit execution frequency. In addition, without providing the total upper limit number of executions, a special figure 1 upper limit number of executions and a special number 2 upper limit number of executions are provided, and when either number is satisfied, the time saving state ends, or special figure 2 Only an upper limit number of times of execution may be provided, and when this number of times is satisfied, the time saving state may be terminated.

<Invention shown in the fourth embodiment>
The above-described fourth embodiment and its modifications show inventions of the following means. In the description of the means described below, the corresponding structural names and expressions in the above-described embodiments, etc., and the reference numerals used in the drawings are added in parentheses for reference. However, the constituent elements of each invention are not limited to this appendix.

<Means S>
The invention according to means S1 is
A prize winning opening (first starting opening 11, second starting opening 12) into which game balls can enter,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 101) for setting a game state based on the entry of a game ball into the winning hole;
With production control means (production control microcomputer 121) for setting the production mode for producing production,
The game state includes a first state (normal time-saving state) in which game balls are likely to enter the winning opening, and a second state (non-time-saving state) in which game balls are less likely to enter the winning opening than in the first state. state), and
The game control means may set the second state as the initial state,
When the second state is set as the initial state, the effect control means has a specific mode (chance effect mode) including a predetermined suggestive effect (for example, the display of the strip image OG shown in FIG. 74(B)) as the effect mode. ) is a gaming machine characterized by setting

The invention according to means S2 is
A game machine according to means S1,
In the game state, there is a third state (slight time reduction state) which is different from the second state and in which the game ball is more difficult to enter the winning hole than in the first state,
The game control means can make a special determination of whether or not to set the first state (determination of whether or not to shift to the normal time saving state based on the losing pattern T),
The gaming machine is characterized in that the second state is more likely to be determined when the first state is set in the special determination than the third state.

The invention according to means S3 is
A gaming machine according to means S2,
The game control means changes the game state from the second state to the third state when a predetermined condition (stop display of the losing pattern U that triggers the transition to the short time state) is established in the second state. there is a
The game machine is characterized in that the effect control means continues the specific mode even if the game state changes from the second state to the third state in the specific mode.

By the way, in the gaming machine described in JP-A-2018-47326, after the jackpot game, it may be controlled to a time-saving state in which the game ball is likely to enter the starting port. However, there is room for improvement with respect to the effects in a gaming machine that can be controlled in a time-saving state. By installing the improved production, it can be expected to improve the interest of the game. Therefore, the invention according to means S provides a game machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2018-47326 that "a game ball enters a winning hole more easily than in the first state in which the game ball enters the winning hole." There are times when the difficult second state is set as the initial state, and when the second state is set as the initial state, a specific mode including a predetermined suggestive performance is set as the performance mode. As a result, it is possible to contribute to the enhancement of interest in the game through the performance.

14. Other Modified Examples Other modified examples common to the above embodiments will be described below. In the above-described form, the first start port 11 (fixed start port) in which the ease with which the game ball enters does not change, and the second start port 12 (variable start port, electric However, only one of them may be provided.

In the above-described form, the special figure 2 determination process is performed preferentially over the special figure 1 determination process (the variation display of the special figure 2 is performed preferentially over the variation display of the special figure 1). Special figure 1 determination processing is performed preferentially over special figure 2 determination processing (variation display of special figure 1 is performed preferentially than variation display of special figure 2) It may be configured. In this case, the special figure 1 lottery should be a lottery that is more advantageous than the special figure 2 lottery and makes it easier to win a big hit.

Moreover, in the above embodiment, the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine, but it is also possible to apply it to other pinball game machines such as an arrange ball machine and a mammoth ball game machine. Further, when the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine, the game characteristics of the game machine can be appropriately changed within a range that does not interfere with the game. That is, the present invention, if it does not interfere with the game, is a so-called pattern probability machine (a game machine in which the transition to a high probability state is determined based on the type of winning pattern), a so-called V probability machine (specification in the big winning opening) A game machine that controls to a high probability state based on the passage of the area (V area)), a so-called variable loop type game machine (once controlled to a high probability state, control to a high probability state until the start of the next jackpot game game machines), so-called ST machines (game machines that cut the number of times with variable probability), so-called 1 type 2 type mixing machines, Hanemono type game machines, etc.

In the above embodiment, the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 are displayed in a variable manner in synchronism with the special symbol variable display. It may be composed of patterns other than three, such as three. For example, you may provide two designs divided by special figure 1 and special figure 2. Moreover, one pattern common to the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 may be provided. In these cases, the display unit 50a of the image display device 50 may be used for display, and the sub-control board 120 may be used for control. Further, in areas other than the game area 6 of the game board 1, an LED device for displaying symbols may be provided. In this case, the main control board 100 or the sub-control board 120 may control the LED device.

Further, in the above embodiment, the main control board 100 performs basic control relating to the progress of the game, and the sub-control board 120 performs basic control relating to the progress of the presentation according to the progress of the game (game control). As described above, the control of the game and the control of the effect are performed by different substrates, but they may be configured to be performed by one substrate. In this case, the image control board 140 may be included in the one board, or may be provided separately from the one board.

It should be noted that when saying "a state that is advantageous to the player (advantageous game state, advantageous state, or special game state)", not all jackpot game states may correspond to this. For example, the jackpot game state scheduled to be controlled to the high probability state after that corresponds to the "state advantageous to the player", or the jackpot game state in which a relatively large number of prize balls can be obtained, such as substantially 10R. may correspond to "a state advantageous to the player". Also, the "state advantageous to the player" may be a high-probability state instead of a jackpot game state, or may be a high-base state (time-saving state). If the "state advantageous to the player" is a high probability state or a high base state (time saving state), various effects that make you expect to become a "state advantageous to the player" are special symbols. The effect is not limited to the effect during the variable display, and the effect may be performed at other timing such as the effect during the jackpot game.

PY1 Pachinko machine 50a Display unit 50 Image display device 101 Game control microcomputer 121 Effect control microcomputer EZ1 Left effect symbol EZ2 Middle effect symbol EZ3 Right effect symbol GZ Pseudo continuous symbol (specific image)
G40: Mini character image (first suggestive image)
G50: Mini character image (second suggestive image)
G61: Moving object image (predetermined index image)
L1... First line L2... Second line

Claims (1)

After the performance symbols are variably displayed, it is possible to execute a variable performance of stop-displaying in a stop mode indicating the result of determination as to whether an advantageous state advantageous to the player is made,
When a specific image is displayed in the variable effect, the temporarily stopped and displayed effect pattern is again displayed in a variable manner,
The pattern for displaying the specific image in the variable effect includes a predetermined reference pattern, a first non-reference pattern different from the reference pattern, and the specific image displayed more than the first non-reference pattern. A gaming machine characterized by having a second non-reference pattern with a late timing.

Images